Home

ISOTOPIC v4 Supervisor User Manual

1. 61 63 Calibration Wizard 68 77 KES CNEL OY scele adotta eR ER 84 Mahal ede y adt att Petite o n x tta 75 recall so iced aeu ata ate AEAEE dta 93 Energy calibration ooo ooo oo 61 62 Auto Calibrate aria oett tr o x E 86 Calibration Wizard 68 69 MANUAL olaa bal Baits 87 recalibration 74 ws etate tetti e a e sere 90 recall ed aue tic ate astitit ata 93 standards file END 89 A oo rex elects 90 using multiple spectra 92 Energy normalized difference 191 E Waar at aloe nan ace eet sale 32 Expanded Spectrum View 14 15 Field of view FOV o o 115 File recall PEC lt ao a s acts 29 SAVE spectrum o adeo tattoo es dovata 30 Ee Thebas d im c O O ee sales 28 o errebes aceto poto ee aeta 28 Hne saN re ode ed aee irt ae atit am he AU 293 Flattop c esce ate ah shot ate streets 39 SEITE on x bases tit aen caer ati d ai 37 39 MAIO e Cede tut aet bae 37 39 Fraction limit ber 201 266 Full Spectrum View ns cn lada esa 15 Sizing and moving ooooocccccoooo 20 PW TOM td Shoot ace el ies 94 PWHM utu tas x ade at wane en dcs 283 Gain TID sca bout afe y io ua e Dus 293 Gain Stabilizer 54 ei xh ER EXE TER 48 51 IV PIO reda AN 299 command line interface 311 Horizontal Scale z c 24 ida Ro e x Roo 296 COMER osa se adt atc Mbit i en 18 ZOOMT 19 vot atu eje y adeo at baii uem 19
2. leere 186 4 1 3 2 Directed Fit Method LLlleeeeeeeeeee RR III 186 ALA Peak Uncertat ty essem o e rne tH Os eet ene x edi RA wien 187 AtS Peak CoHttOIQ uocis de wie cost 6 ae hoe oa ER e one a EA ER Ds 188 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 TABLE OF CONTENTS Z LO Energy RecaliDration sais SEXUS WERDEN I EN ead eee 189 dla Peak A eee wus ORE GEER CURR eee LP ERR RE EDEN S 191 2 1271 Peak Acceptance TESSA e e uk ee e e ea 194 2 1 8 Narrow Peaks ir aie se IP n SUE Sante ta e NL OE cete eet 195 Locating VIUDA haad dedere 195 4 2 1 Background for Multiplets ssa pee e de me ene bens eR ORRS 196 4 2 2 Stepped Background calce ec tace A Leake wes 197 4 2 3 Parabolic Background cbe viv te eee x OE e eps VIF ae 198 4 24 Total Peak Area veresre x ce eim REIR EXCESS PEN ERE Ue Ree ehh es 199 Fraction Limit 2 Seq 244 eos edges n cM DEM a epe dE 201 Nuelide Activity Based On Peak Area a e ce tees 201 MIA Ato ares tedio d eg e qo N A o PRU cats Ec 202 4 5 1 Computing MDA Values cerdas do eR ea dco UE DU CE Rr SA nee d 202 T5 LT rea MeUOdS 5a canoe raters RERO GR arated E RUM a SERRA A 203 4 5 1 2 Background Methods oca be vet d ue weds booed ene 204 4 5 1 3 Computing MDA ata Sansome Sa ened qub pei e E RR lalo de 205 4 5 2 ISOTOPIC v4 MDA Methods o4 uso AA A eR 205 4 5 2 1 Method 1 Traditional ORTEC lleleleeeessess 205 4 5 2 2 Method 2 Critical bevel ORTEC scaricare Shee R
3. 58 JO SUMINATIZS eosi ob Sec Vig weet NS 58 More InTOERIABOIT ssr vu AA de ES Ule LAA 58 3 2 8 5 Setting the Rise Time in Digital MCBs 00 59 3 3 C aM DEHIG og AA VS A A EA Sd SP 60 3 3 1 An Introduction to Energy and Efficiency Calibration 61 3 3 1 1 Energy Calibrdtiolizas ces ek ace mea td RSS ERES eka ed 62 3 3 1 2 Efficiency Calibration as ertet eta weet rie it tte X e EC E 63 Interpolatyve Fit zieht A ERE Ee ESS 66 TABLE OF CONTENTS Eimear Bit ouam sve oe eg ine at ee ea padece qe 66 Quadrate Plis nas v Ee Ce ae eee Rd 67 Polynomial Dat 222 AE qo eu itte qus ete 67 353 2 Calbration Wizard uu Qoae M aes p ese ne leh ae eee data i 68 3 3 2 1 Energy Calibration a Sede A od SD He EORR Stoke 69 Create NEW ACE 69 Read Prom File cvs lanar mesas om roe tre SC er seges de 71 3 3 2 2 Creating and Editing Certificate Files o o ooooooo o 72 Using the Certificate File Editor 55e 000505 ee e 12 Manual Efficiency Calibration oooooo oooooooo o 75 3323 Efficiency Calibrations id EE TI Greate NeW Micha beds aep Stc pte os dae yuo T Read From File Efficiency 0 0 00 ee eee 79 3 3 2 4 Reviewing the Calibration Wizard Results o oo o 80 3 3 2 5 Editing the Energy Calibration ooo oooooomcoomoroo o 80 3 3 2 6 Editing the Efficiency Calibration o oo o oooooooomoooo o 82 3 3 2 7 Saving the C
4. Figure 221 First Part of Report 281 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual The normalization factor is the factor for changing the output activities to the requested units from the internal units of becquerels It is the quotient of the input multiplier and input divisor A value of 1 0 leaves the activities in becquerels User Selected Corrections This lists all available corrections and whether or not they were performed in this analysis If the decay during acquisition correction was enabled this entry is marked YEs The correction might be small due to the ratio of the half life to the real time so the effect might not be seen in the output activity Quality Factor This value is a measure of how well the spectrum matched the centroid energies of the library peaks see Section 4 1 6 page 189 It can range from 0 0 to 1 0 with 0 0 being the best If this value approaches 1 0 the calibration should be checked The value will also be large 1f there is large statistical variation in the library peaks in the spectrum This can occur when screening low level samples for a few nuclides because the centroid of a very small or nonexistent peak is not well defined Energy Recalibration Notice If the spectrum was recalibrated this message is printed The change might be small and the Quality Factor should be referenced for changes see page 189 for more details The new energy factors listed in this section are
5. 143 Select Tes ucc ia sis A 142 Pole Zero ads Feat t RR IE oA ERE 37 39 Presets see Acquisition presets 46 Print 333 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual CADERA Xen 93 lioc rs il its 161 Spect rra 30 QA see Quality assurance 251 Quality assurance i ccaw eae meets 251 acceptance thresholds 257 ANSI N13 30 and N42 14 251 archive QA database 263 background measurement 258 control chart 5c oe eae tete re oA qe x ts 259 create SDF file for QA 263 databas n a rat ooa da 277 328 database tables nann e pts 328 Lock Acquire on Violation s 254 sample measurement 258 Ss HI TE EDEN 254 SAS Mee te we rot ate Male toe mathew fot 250 warning limits 22 24a ra e x RES 257 Quality factor 4 9 xao ates te ta e ith 191 Random summing factor 260 Realtime ecu dat e bap mat ge et 46 O eae e OR alat ed ee 2 7 9 Recalibrallotr es kcu ote ox ex 90 189 CHOY MET REESE 282 317 Recall calibration A oe ere tpa S cet 93 l ad Dray i ex dence aste roo ex nts 155 read spectrum so shea o poer qe lecto 29 ROL ME ctas traia EX Mh 171 Report Crystal Reports 4 sic nee orte tek eh acd 128 Operator SOM sie aces ctra asta 123 Operator surface container 112 pape lencia Ae lara 318 QA sample report tec ora ts 279 Resistive Feedback 115 cin E
6. 208 liter drum B 25 Box Point source in a container LWS ConfigO1 LWS Config02 mm Figure 145 Only Configurations Marked Yes Will Be Displayed in the Container Wizard 3 7 2 Operator Permissions The list of operator permissions is shown in Operator Permissions Fig 146 These are several of the options that pe Allow Energy Recalibrations v the operator can change for a specific analysis Allow Background GA Tests v If you as supervisor do not want operators to DOM make one or more of these changes unmark the EE corresponding checkbox One reason for not Allow Configuration Selection Iv allowing these to be changed is to ensure that Allow Modification of Configuration Parameters Y the data are collected and analyzed according Allow Isotope Plot Y to a set procedure each time Allow MCB Settings Modifications Y Allow Recall Files Command IV If the option is not marked the menu item for Allow Recall Scan Command Y that function is not shown in the Operator program Cancel Allow Energy Recalibrations refers to the manual Energy calibration see Section 4 1 6 Figure 146 Set Permissions for the and not the automatic energy recalibration in Operator Program the analysis program 166 3 MENU COMMANDS Allow Isotope Plot lets the operator interactively adjust the matrix and container materials and densities This is explained in the Operator Manual The Supervisor program does not h
7. In this mode the vertical scale of the graph is adjusted so that all points are shown to scale All points are black If one or more data points are substantially out of range the graph could be quite compressed vertically e Fixed Vertical Scale On check mark In this mode the vertical scale of the graph is set to show the upper and lower alarm limits as full scale The data points within the alarm limits are colored black Out of range points are displayed in red at the lower or upper limits of the graph at the proper horizontal coordinate The out of range points are printed as a question mark To switch between the two display modes click on the menu item to mark it with a checkmark or unmark it Figures 202 through 205 show the screen and printout for a QA data set with Fixed Vertical Scale on then off Compare the location of the points that exceed alarm limits in Figs 202 and 203 to the location of the question marks in Figs 204 and 205 Y GammaVision Quality Assurance Al Xx Ele Scale PlotVariable Detector Options EG amp G ORTEC 1 DSPEC 075 Standard Sample Activity 9 374E 4 LU LU 1 I I 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7 28 97 Marker 8 12 97 01 01 AM 6 022E 5 Bq 8 26 97 Figure 202 Control Chart On Screen with Fixed Vertical Scale On 261 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 1 094E 5 Standard Sample Activity 4 055645 1 016E 5 es 9 765E 4 DUNS B E i
8. 245 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Taking the exponential of both sides and solving we find No 117 6 134 4 14 1 4 Calculation of Total Uncollided Flux per Unit Inventory In order to provide a simpler method for determining the term A Beck established the following table for unscattered flux one meter above the ground for various energies and a p values Energy a p MeV 0 0 06 0 206 0 312 0 625 6 25 oo 0 05 1 4403 0 0816 0 2245 0 3049 0 4748 1 147 1 58 0 1 2 114 0 1458 0 3627 0 4708 0 6786 1 359 1 71 0 15 3 3264 0 1702 0 4103 0 5261 0 7438 1 427 1 78 0 2 3 9056 0 1843 0 4550 0 5770 0 802 1 483 1 8 0 25 4 0640 0 2008 0 4697 0 5910 0 8185 1 506 1 86 0 364 4 7184 0 2268 0 5158 0 6429 0 8775 1 578 1 93 0 5 5 3904 0 2519 0 5595 0 6918 0 9334 1 650 2 0 662 6 1456 0 2788 0 6041 0 7412 0 9889 1 719 2 05 0 75 6 5312 0 2919 0 6257 0 7649 1 015 1 752 2 08 1 7 5280 0 3245 0 6769 0 8209 1 077 1 830 2 15 1 173 8 1472 0 3437 0 7067 0 8531 1 113 1 874 2 19 1 25 8 4384 0 3523 0 7198 0 8675 1 129 1 895 2 21 1 333 8 7504 0 3617 0 7336 0 8826 1 145 1 914 2 22 1 46 9 1472 0 3731 0 7511 0 9011 1 166 1 941 2 25 1 765 10 091 0 3997 0 7897 0 9428 1 211 1 997 2 29 2 004 10 818 0 4188 0 8173 0 9725 1 243 2 036 2
9. 297 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 298 7 UTILITIES 7 1 GVPlot GVPlot replaces WinPlots as our program for printing any type of ORTEC spectrum file In the interactive mode it can also be run in command line mode a preview of the spectrum plot is displayed on the screen and updated as you adjust the display parameters You can select the graph colors and symbols for the plot the start and stop channels or energy range the printer to be used and logarithmic or linear vertical scaling Optionally you can save these display settings and recall them for later use The sample detector and acquisition descriptions in the file can be printed or suppressed In addition you can save recall and display the spectrum file s corresponding analysis information as well as ROIs stored in the spectrum file or in a separate ROI file To start GVPlot click on Start Programs Isotopic 41 and GV Plot see Fig 226 GVPlot can also be run in command line mode or directly from other Windows programs see Section 7 1 5 In this mode you can either specify the settings or use the defaults fag Isotopic 41 Fi MAESTRO 32 gt m ORTEC gt AllPrograms Ej Startup gt Log Off Shut Down Isotopic Operator 4 1 Isotopic Supervisor 4 1 MCB Configuration Nuclide Library Editor Figure 226 Starting GVPlot The spectrum files are associated with GVPlot by the installa
10. Change Password 3 7 1 Database Management i Lock Unlock Detector The default ISOTOPIC database is called IsotopicDB mdb The Edit Detector List commands on the Database Management submenu Fig 140 Figure 139 Services allow you to create a new database for use in both the Supervisor Menu and Operator programs choose the database to be used for the results purge permanently delete scan records from the selected database and activate or inactivate Container Surface Mode configurations Each ISOTOPIC database holds analysis results as well as the configuration attenuation mode settings collimator definitions and detector names You can create as many databases as you wish and switch between them at any time CAUTION We strongly recommend against opening and manipu Create Database lating the IsotopicDB mdb database file in Microsoft an oe Access Editing and or accidentally saving the data Mare Corales base in an incompatible version of Access could make your database file unusable within ISOTOPIC Figure 140 Database Management Submenu NOTE The v4 x database is different than the databases from previous ISOTOPIC versions and is not cross compatible 3 7 1 1 Create Database This command allows you to create a new Create Access Database File ISOTOPIC databases All tables are auto Save in C3 User gt es EJ matically set up along with the four default adean database erstQrooxdaugh Mdb con
11. New Compound from Existing Database Entries Click on Next to go to the New Material dialog Fig 101 In this dialog enter the Name of the material IMPORTANT The name must not duplicate an existing material name be sure to check the list of existing entries before creating a new one If a duplicate entry is accidentally created ISOTOPIC will not allow you to populate the mass attenuation coefficients table for the duplicate or use either the original or duplicate entry To regain full access to the attenuation database functions in such cases we recommend you create a new database with Services Database Management Create Database Section 3 7 1 1 Any user defined elements or materials in your current database must be re created in the new database 134 3 MENU COMMANDS w Attenuation Materials Molybdenum y Add Edit I Delete Refresh Date 7 30 2007 11 22 49 AM Chemical Formula Atomic Weight 42 Density 10 28 Log X axis Attenuation Coefficient Ss5555555555 2000 4000 6000 Energy keV la o Figure 100 Ready to Edit Energies and Mass Attenuation Coefficients for New Element Attenuation Coefficient Wizard New material Enter the name of the new material IF a chemical formula is entered the Wizard will parse it to create a list of elements used in calculating the coefficients Use upper and lower case when entering the elements IF your material is a mixture whose co
12. 3 MENU COMMANDS At this time the cursor can be positioned using the calibration graphs calibration table Full Spectrum View or Expanded Spectrum View The cursor will show the energy based on the calibration up to this point The calibration can be refined by adding as many points as desired Any point can be deleted by selecting that point in the table of values Energy or FWHM and clicking on the Delete Energy button on the calibration sidebar The fit updates when a point is removed NOTE When you add calibration points to an existing table make sure none of the points in the table are highlighted Otherwise the highlighted points will be replaced with a new value To remove a highlight click the mouse anywhere outside the table and then enter the data for the new points After the desired number of points have been entered the energy values can be saved by clicking on the sidebar Save button This opens a standard file save dialog Fig 60 Assign a filename and ISOTOPIC will append the default energy calibration extension ENT The saved tables of values can be used for future calibrations using the same nuclides Save in Sy User z al al ex The table is in ASCII format and can be ise804a E changed off line using an ASCII compat ise805 E f SDSPP PODIOI Ent ible editor such as Windows Notepad or E Ae from the calibration sidebar control menu 16101 f SVDemo2 Ent Click on the sidebar title bar icon to open MTS
13. 4 ANALYSIS METHODS COUNTS X 10 Background Point Determined by 5 PT Average 752 763 CHANNEL NUMBER Figure 170 Gross and Net Peak Area A 45 PIT B x W 28 2 where A the background area B the background on low side of peak B the background on high side of peak W the peak width 4 1 2 2 Directed Fit Method In some cases the total summation method does not produce the desired answer for the peak area and does not produce negative peak areas Another method of obtaining the peak area for a particular energy is to fit the spectrum region with a background plus peak shape function This so called directed fit can be applied to peaks and has the ability to produce negative peak areas A gaussian fit is performed at the specified energy in the library and a peak area is determined The computed peak area and its corresponding activity can be positive or negative 185 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual The directed fit to the library peak area 1s done 1f the following are true The option is enabled The spectrum is energy calibrated The peak was rejected for any shape test by the total summation method The peak is a singlet multiplets allowed in ISOENV32 BR WN ere If all these conditions are met the spectrum region for 3 times the calibration FWHM centered on the peak energy is fit with a grid search least squares fit with nonlinear coefficients The function is the ba
14. Amplifier Amplifier2 ADC Stabilizer High Vokage Field Data About Status Presets MDA Preset Nuclide Report ERR Security Verification Eror DIM 24v State Of Health v ERR oo DIM 12v State OfHealth ERR DIM 12V State OfHealth y ERR DIM 24V State OfHealth 7 ERR Detector Temperature State Of EAR O00 Detector State Of Health Figure 29 The digiDART Status Tab more than the allowed limit the ERR is set until cleared by the program The numeric values are displayed in the units reported by the digiDART Security Detector temperature and Live detector temperature are available only for SMART 1 detectors For non SMART 1 detectors they display N A 43 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual The available parameters are Detector State of Health This reads OK if all the SOH are within operating limits and ERR if any one is outside the limits DIM 24V State of Health This is OK if the 24 volt supply in the DIM has stayed within 200 mV of 24 V since the last time the SOH was cleared DIM 12V State of Health This is OK if the 12 volt supply in the DIM has stayed within 200 mV of 12 V since the last time the SOH was cleared DIM 12V State of Health This is OK if the 12 volt supply in the DIM has stayed within 200 mV of 12 V since the last time the SOH was cleared DIM 24V State of Health This is OK if the 24 volt supply in the DIM has stayed
15. Detector orientation down E 2 5 MeV L D 1 3 a p 0 08 Since a p lt 0 1 assume a p 0 From Table 1 we find that for these conditions N N 1 07 Applying the polynomial fit used by the software for the same conditions the following array would be selected specific to a 2 5 MeV gamma ray L D a b c d 0 5 0 01679 0 09369 0 20177 0 75843 0 6 0 01194 0 06794 0 15896 0 78032 0 7 0 00827 0 05423 0 14345 0 79176 0 8 0 01794 0 09219 0 16737 0 81819 0 9 0 01725 0 08038 0 12008 0 88279 241 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual a b c d 0 00418 0 01398 0 00441 0 99267 0 00935 0 05220 0 12062 1 11052 0 02020 0 10903 0 22889 1 23552 0 03218 0 17748 0 37624 1 40313 For L D 1 3 we find the values for the coefficients of the third order polynomial to be as follows a 0 03218 b 0 17748 c 0 37624 d 1 40313 Substitute into the polynomial equation N No ay bx cy d 122 where y energy E in MeV then solve 25 No The value N N is found to be 0 03218 2 5 0 17748 2 5 123 0 37624 2 5 1 40313 N 1 0690 124 No Rounding to the nearest hundredth we get N N 1 07 Example 2 For the case where a p gt 0 5 the source is deposited very near the surface of the soil and a p is t
16. Figure 135 Edit or Manually Add Nuclide Name Deleting Nuclides from the Library To remove a nuclide from the library click on the nuclide pem Cut then on Cut This will remove the nuclide from the list In addition it will activate the gray Paste button at the bottom of the nuclide list and change its label UE the name Figure 136 Cut Nuclide is of the cut nuclide This is illustrated for Eu in Fig 136 Ready to Paste Rearranging the Library List The order of the nuclides in the library is the order in which they are listed on the report Nuclides can be rearranged in the LIB file list by cutting and pasting them into a different location To move a nuclide to a new position in the list highlight the nuclide to be moved Cut it from the list locate the nuclide immediately below the desired new position and click once on that nuclide to highlight it then click on the Paste button which will be labeled with the name of the Cut nuclide The Cut nuclide will be inserted in the space above the highlighted nuclide 159 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Several nuclides can be cut at one time from the list then pasted back into the list into a different order Cut nuclides remain queued up for pasting last one first according to the nuclide name on the Paste button To move a nuclide to the end of the library list Cut the nuclide from the list highlight the end entry and click on the
17. This chapter describes all of the ISOTOPIC Supervisor menu commands and their associated dialogs As is customary for Windows menus the shortcut key s if any are shown to the right of the menu function they duplicate Also the underlined letter in the menu item indicates a key that can be used together with the lt Alt gt key for quick access in the menu So for example the Recall dialog under File can be reached by the following key sequence lt Alt F gt lt Alt R gt The ellipsis following a menu selection indicates that a dialog is displayed to complete the function Finally a small arrow 66 99 gt following a menu item indicates a submenu with more commands The menus and commands in the order they appear on the menu bar are File Settings Recall Save As Print Compare Exit About ISOTOPIC Acquire Start Stop Clear Copy to Buffer QA gt Settings Measure Background Measure Sample Status Control Chart Archive Database Download Spectra ZDT Display Select MCB Properties Calibrate Energy Description Recall Calibration Save Calibration Print Calibration Calibration Wizard page 28 page 32 Alt 1 Alt 2 Alt 3 Alt 5 F3 page 60 25 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Calculate Settings Peak Info Sum Smooth Strip Settings Configurations Crystal Reports Attenuation Peak Backg
18. 3 5 2 Container Surface Mode Configurations This opens the Configuration Wizard for Container Surface Mode To create a Soil Mode configuration see Section 3 5 3 NOTE The Configuration Wizard is a new feature in ISOTOPIC v4 x that combines the former Analysis Options Operator Container Parameters and Collimator dialogs The result is a data acquisition and analysis configuration which is stored in the ISOTOPIC database Sample description SDF files are now used only in QA see Section 5 A configuration is similar to an Spr file in that it directs data acquisition analysis and reporting for container measurements However it also contains information about container type detector geometry and uranium plutonium enrichment The configurations settings are automatically saved in the database when you click on Finish on the last page of the wizard If you cancel out of the wizard the changes are not stored 3 5 2 1 Configuration Page Figure 73 shows the first page of the Configuration Wizard ISOTOPIC is supplied with six default configurations 208 liter drum B 25 box Pu capsule configuration Point source in a container 100 3 MENU COMMANDS o Water filter e Point source Isotopic Settings Configuration CO Edt gt Configurations Configuration name ws ConfigO1 Start from existing configuration aM 5 25 Box h Figure 73 Configuration Page You can use these configurat
19. Alt F7 Keypad lt gt Keypad lt gt Keypad lt 5 gt Keypad lt gt Keypad lt gt Insert lt Ins gt Delete lt Del gt lt Shift 1 gt Shift 1 Alt 1 gt Alt 27 Alt 3 gt Alt 5 Alt 6 or F4 Alt gt lt Shift Alt gt lt Alt gt lt Shift Alt gt lt PrintScreen gt ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Table 7 Quick Reference to ISOTOPIC Keyboard Commands Function Change vertical scale so spectrum peaks are smaller Change vertical scale so spectrum peaks are larger Move marker to higher channel Move marker to lower channel Narrow the horizontal scale Widen the horizontal scale Jump to next higher peak Jump to next lower peak Jump to next higher ROL Jump to next lower ROI Advance to next library entry Recede to previous library entry Jump to higher channel number in 1 1 6th screen width increments Jump to lower channel number in 1 16th screen width increments Jump to first channel of the full spectrum Jump to last channel of the full spectrum Select Detector i 1 1 to 12 in pick list order Switch ROI bit control from OFF to SET to CLEAR In supported ORTEC digital MCBs switch between the two spectra stored in ZDT mode In supported ORTEC digital MCBs switch the disk spectrum to compare normal to disk ZDT spectrum or ZDT spectrum to disk normal spectrum Switch between displaying selected Detector
20. Energy Co 60 lt Unknown gt lt Unknown gt circu lt Unknown gt i Unknown Multiplet lt Unknown gt lt Unknown gt DIO Pp pd pd pd pd pd pr pr Buffer uran16h An1 Uranium ore low count rate DRTEC 7 18 00 AM Fri 19Ju02 Maker 4464 1 12022 keV 37 308 Cnts Analysis Results ESC or Close Sidebar to Cancel Figure 120 Display from UFO File Analysis Sidebar Figure 121 shows the Analysis Sidebar The buttons move the marker up and down through the results list library and spectrum simultaneously Vira Peak es Ame dfi The within Nuclide buttons move up and down the library NT fl list for the selected nuclide in the order the energies are tal Energy el stored in the library Since the library energies are not usually stored in increasing energy order this will cause the marker to jump about the spectrum This is useful in deciding if a nuclide is present or not by looking for all the lines associated with the nuclide If the selected peak has a Figure 121 zero area it is not displayed Analysis Results Sidebar 147 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual li Energy el The Energy buttons move the cursor up and down through the library peak list in energy order Only non zero area peaks are shown Since the library used for the analysis might not be the same as the working library this could be a different set of peaks than found with t
21. OK Cancel Help Choosing Program allows you to select any Windows program to be run with the report filename as an argument on the command line The report filename sent to the program is the spectrum filename with the extension RPT The default program is Windows Notepad In this case when the analysis finishes Notepad automatically starts and opens the rPT file Notepad can be used to save the RPT file to a different filename if you wish or to print the report Note that the analysis does not complete until you close the selected program e g Notepad 268 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 5 3 5 Analysis Tab Use this screen Fig 210 to select Container Surface Analysis Options the Analysis Method Additional Error Analysis and Peak Sample System Decay Report Analysis Corrections Analysis Method Additional Error Stripping options to be used pci le ISOWAN32 Analysis y 1 00000 5 3 5 1 Analysis Method Add p ISOTOPIC uses the ISOWAN32 11 00000 x and ISOENV32 analysis Programs analysis engines Because QA Peak Stripping Analysis measures detector consistency from Library Based Manual Based Peak Cutoff acquisition to acquisition you can Second Library fonopo use either engine However once Browse you have begun using a particular Third Library Jong UN engine to analyze QA measurements Browse for a particular detector be sure to continue using that engine We r rem He
22. Unknown 2 1103 80 ENS 733 Heec AN Me as Mersin Reat 31 113 62 ALE i Bi 214 0 0000 Shift keV Live 30 000 00 lt Unknown gt Foo OK wee ee lt Unknown gt m mi Unknown I Unknown ibrary Fea Co 60 Add Delete lt Unknown gt within Nuctde iii f Energy aj Buffer uran16h An1 Uranium ore low count rate ORTEC 7 24 05 AM Fri 19 Jul 02 Marker 4464 1120 22 keV 37 308 Cnts Analysis Results ESC or Close Sidebar to Cancel 2 Nuclide Peaks Unknown Peaks Figure 125 Results Interactive in Viewed Area e Energy The Energy buttons move the marker up and down through the library peak list in energy order Only non zero area peaks are shown Since the library used for the analysis might not be the same as the working library this could be a different set of peaks than found with the Peak buttons f Pek f The Peak buttons move up and down through the peaks found by the on line peak search The sensitivity is set in the system settings This could select more peaks than the analysis peaks above because of the difference in the cut off If the sensitivity for analysis is low e g 5 many peaks will not be reported because their uncertainty is too high They will have been found by the analysis but not reported 152 j Unknown d Multiple a The Unknown buttons move the marker up and down through the unknown peaks in energy order skipping over any l
23. 205 265 318 Menu ACUTE tt ay cot en 32 Calibrate Asin kik reae ative tae ae kok he 60 Display dd ree een ug X alah 171 INDEX Pile ones O 28 LIMON i eoa exftant lost oes 154 right mouse button 19 175 ROL PD 169 SEE pon aco adve at Malo tne ai i Rule 162 SILIO Ss tutae ala ate eio tata ic Rem 99 ME b r s Sez macte out ee etie me soles 13 Minimum Detectable Activity see MDA 202 Modeled Shape src o cas ota 38 hai RE PEE 18 moving the marker o oo ooo ooo o 18 Right mouse button menu 19 23 rubber rectangle aca esce tenen Ea 19 hor aper PN 36 Nuclide activity see Activity 201 Opi MIZE ai eut adde tores 37 Pase eNO s d ae too b x Ree 318 Passwords MENU duos dace uta mot Rt aco rad 167 PBC see Peaked Background Correction 210 peak acceptance tests 3i eese RR D x ROC 194 centroid 12 ao y loas da 188 peak centroid beta estt tores 200 284 o ues et ay O 191 total peak area 243 xoc eaten tp Ree x RA 199 uncertainty es ud kh at PER REX RAS 187 Peak area directed Ht oue qae amt eoe bu SRM a 185 example u acd ex adt et ttbi oa t Rss 186 IS tor sis ns 184 Peak Info aa aano eode anes 94 177 Peak search library based et 287 Peak search sensitivity 107 266 Peak stripping O 260 Tibrirysbasedo ies ee E m e x lcs 284 Peaked Background Correction PBC 210 create table automatic 143 create table manual
24. 30 mm Orientation Down Crystal Dia 59 mm Aspect Ratio 0 6 Detector Use File E Energy FWHM Calibration IV Use File C User GvDemo Clb ml Energy 3 771 1 5151e 1 c 2 4474e 9 c2 FWHM 5 471 8 4588e 4 c 1 3779e 8 c 2 dead layer of germanium is especially important at these energies 118 Figure 84 Soil Mode Operator Settings Dialog 3 MENU COMMANDS DOE EML Efficiency Complete the five associated fields The Detector Efficiency is the actual stated efficiency of the detector from the manufacturer s data sheet for ORTEC detectors refer to the crystal s Solid State Photon Detector Operator Manual The Orientation is either up or down and is selected from the droplist Down means the detector endcap is facing down or toward the ground and Up is the opposite For a detector to face downward it must be supported on a tripod or table The preferred orientation is down The Length and Diameter of the germanium crystal are entered from the manufacturer s data sheet for the detector The Aspect Ratio is calculated from these two numbers NOTE The efficiency orientation and crystal dimensions are used in the calculation of the absolute efficiency factors in the DOE EML method Care should be taken to enter the proper numbers These are not used if Use File is specified Use File For this method click on the browse button to find the efficiency file to be used in the analysis
25. Fig 127 Select the amount of shift and click on OK The shift increments in energy equivalent to 0 1 al zl ES channel ISOTOPIC will perform the new analysis and display the results Figure 127 Shift keV The residuals are the differences between the calculated spectrum based on peak shape peak area and background and the actual raw data These can be displayed in the spectrum window by marking the Show Residuals checkbox refer to Fig 122 The scaling factor for the residual display is the same as for the data display In log mode the scale of the residuals display is somewhat exaggerated and the residuals could appear more significant than they actually are Saving the Analysis Results in a UFO File The results of this analysis are stored in memory and can be stored as a uro file on disk by selecting Store Results As from the Analysis Sidebar control menu see Fig 121 Mark 153 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual unmark the Table item to show hide the Analysis Results Table Use the Print command in the results window control menu to print the results table 3 5 8 Mode Container Surface or Soil This selects the Settings Configurations dialogs presented in Supervisor and fixes the mode of operation for the Operator program You can select either the Container Surface ISOTOPIC mode or the Soil M 1 mode Container Surface Mode is used for spills or other small floor areas where the Soil
26. Hou H ou dod 222 4 ANALYSIS METHODS The side of the detector also detects gamma rays and must be included in the overall full peak intrinsic efficiency To estimate the average length of gamma ray cylinder penetration length CPL assume that for side detection the detector is a bar See Fig 183 The average thickness of the penetration distance is computed using Eqn 99 CPL Figure 183 Top View of a Detector Used to Estimate Detector Penetration Thickness CPL 42 R 99 If you know the relative fraction of gamma ray activity remaining in the crystal when penetrated from the side and from the front you can determine the total peak area intrinsic efficiency for the side e Tu mM CPL E ae 100 is if 1 e where side full energy peak intrinsic efficiency u linear attenuation coefficient for germanium at energy of the gamma ray penetrating the detector cm l length of the detector cm Thus information about the length of the detector crystal is needed to compute the side efficiency 4 11 2 Computing Item Activity For a point source with no significant attenuation positioned with an offset greater than the diameter of the detector both the side and top of the detector will see activity To compute the activity of the source both detector efficiencies are needed See Fig 184 223 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual m 2R gt F
27. If the peak area was not used in the activity calculation because it failed the sensitivity test or a shape test the peak area is added to the background for the MDA calculation unless the MDA defines the background separately If the background is 0 it is set to 1 for the MDA calculation The background will still be reported as O on the report By reviewing the individual MDA values which are printed on the nuclide peak matrix in the report you can determine how relevant the selected MDA value is to the physical situation The MDA reported for the nuclide is the value for the first peak in the library The report specifies which MDA method was used 4 5 1 Computing MDA Values MDA values for many methods depend on area and background values Area and background determination varies from method to method The information needed to validate the MDA results can be found in the peak analysis Details dialog Fig 180 refer also to the Analysis Results Table discussion on page 1 the analysis options Section 3 5 2 3 for Container Surface Mode Section 3 5 3 3 for Soil Mode and manual integration of the spectrum peaks Seventeen 202 4 ANALYSIS METHODS methods for calculating the MDA are explained below Select the preferred MDA method by modifying the MDA type parameter in the B30winds ini file Section A 1 3 The numbering scheme for MDA type corresponds to the method numbers below the default is Method 12 Regulatory Guide 4 16 The B3
28. In Soil Mode analyses all gamma rays in the library are averaged weighted by their yield branching ratio To exclude a particular gamma ray from the averaged activity calculation mark its Not In Average A peak flag see Section 3 6 3 3 In all cases make certain that the most intense clean no interferences likely gamma ray for a particular nuclide is referenced first in your library The next three most intense gamma rays should be listed next in the library Do not clutter your library with too many nuclides and gamma rays The search engines will not be very effective in this situation Use only the nuclides and gamma rays that are likely to be present If using the supplied Libo or Lib1 master library it might be helpful to delete all X rays from the list of gamma rays for each nuclide The energy Auto calibrate feature works better if the library includes no X rays 121 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual The Fraction Limit is used to reject nuclides if enough different gamma rays are not detected The gamma ray detected fraction is the ratio of the sum of the yields of the peaks for a specific nuclide in the library located in the spectrum and the sum of the yields of all the peaks for that nuclide in the library The Fraction Limit is the lowest ratio that will be accepted for the nuclide to be considered present For example Co has two peaks with about 99 branch for each peak If both peaks
29. LOMO id ts tti tod aca ek slats 18 LOC UC da tie e E XR ER 18 Indexing buttons Do ard eat 21 LIB sgn sis toe ache ta 21 291 PEAK rey tuae deat uit walk wie kak 21 291 ROT rada nhs wate aes 22 291 Input count rate cc es ceca vehement se ots 177 InSight Mode 45x shone ace olaaa 38 39 ISOQE DANI da sid ace En nah mies 314 Keyboard commands 2d ace x vale oto RE eo RES 289 quick reference ll its 290 REG Suar add led 65 84 LID dica bora elote ais dd 90 A E E 155 CCID Peaks a uoce x shot ate atau trae ge x t 160 load MVP PDT PIDEN 155 Master wet ook adora etii tet aoi dcs is 156 Match Wide 107 266 MENU tiras to ES 154 nuclide flags dra ear eR 158 vns rs ls ida 161 photon flags t x ica estt itor e E Res 160 Pa adt act Mati tod auc sta 161 SHOW DEAKS ce Lek oett tap e oth 155 Suspecte a Mati tace A AURA hh 154 Working ii ln RES 155 156 265 Library based peak stripping 284 287 Linear scalenie d asco e pou e bb 17 LIVE DIG oou asm adeo ate ation pe oa oe dod hn 46 Lock detector Laia xi doe ace eet poe X ts 167 master passWOId dare cios dit 167 Lock Unlock DOIBCIOES st ooo ase eaten Mey ah 167 Logarithmic scale wi eot or pe ex ote 17 MeL methods 45 e p ee Rath 236 MaK ROL AA amp f het ae eei a h 170 176 Marker Lco i aw tone xad mds E xi ea 15 moving with the mouse 18 Mass attenuation coefficients 130 230 247 316 NIDUA OT UN 202 MDA type apo os ete ate 108
30. MENU COMMANDS The Libraries directory contains the library Lib and mdb and peaked background correction PBC files The Reports directory contains the QA reports The Table Files directory includes the tables for the alpha rho xho information energy ENT and efficiency EFT The Sample Types directory is intended for the sample definition spF files which direct spectrum analysis in QA The Calibrations directory contains the combined energy and efficiency calibration files CLB 3 1 2 Recall This command opens a standard file Recall Spectrum File open dialog Fig 15 that allows you T Ge Use jend to select a spectrum file for display put Wh lect a file it acxts20 Wh essocmoo spc Y MixEu000mm Ant en you se ids a Hie 1 opens In d Manuals Wisi o Bllvistuoconm spc new buffer window The spectrum files Test Files W canberra detector Spc Y MixEu100mm An1 are created with the ISOTOPIC Save Wee Bloc HA vixeu100mm spe y 104 an1 Ya MixEu250mm Ant As command and by any other Y 109 2 Ant Y MiDemo An1 Mi mixeuzsomm spe programs that can produce the CHN e SPC or SPE format e g gt MAESTRO GammaVision 32 Fiename GvDemo Spe Files of type Integer SPC y Cancel Note the Show Description checkbox Y Show Description Integer Data Format 16384 Channels on the lower left of the dialog Use MIXED GAMMA MARINELLI ON ENDCAP OF P40268A this to display the sample description
31. Uncertainty Certificate Dat Add New Update Delete Clear All Save As Library Group Assay From Certificate y Select from Lib Activity Ez y Isotope Halflife D ays Uncertainty Energy Gammas 100d Date M d yy h mm ss tt Fit Type Above None y Below None y Knee 10 00 keV Cancel Figure 42 Open the Blank Efficiency Table File 73 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual The table contains the following columns Isotope name formatted based on the library entries Gamma ray energy keV Activity in Bq or Ci at the date and time specified in column 6 Gammas sec for this energy at the specified date and time Uncertainty for this nuclide Certification date and time for the gammas sec calibration The gammas sec are automatically decay corrected from the date time in the Gammas s to the date time of the spectrum acquisition e Half life of this nuclide in days e Yield as gammas 100 disintegrations 7 Click on the Library Group droplist and select a gamma ray corresponding to an entry in your source certificate then click on Select from Lib This will automatically retrieve the Isotope Energy Halflife and yield Gammas 100d from the ISOTOPIC database Enter the assay data from the source certificate activity Gammas s Uncertainty certification Date and Time and click on Add New see Fig 43 Certificat
32. Use this dialog see Fig 160 to select colors for various features in the two spectrum windows Each scroll bar controls the color of a different feature The vertical colored stripes behind the scroll bars show the available colors The Background scroll bar controls the background color of the spectrum window Foreground determines the color of the spectrum points or fill ROI governs the color of the ROI points or fill The points fill of a compared spectrum File Compare use the Compare color unless they overlap with the original spectrum in which case the Composite color is used To change a color click and hold the left mouse button on the scroll bar button and drag it slowly across the different colors When the desired color is displayed in the box beside the OK button release the mouse button The spectrum window will immediately change color To cancel a color change return the slider button to its starting color or close the Spectrum Colors palette by clicking on Cancel or pressing lt Esc gt Background Full Foreground Full ROI fall Compare Composite Mult Peaks Special EN o Default Cancel 4 Figure 160 Display Color Selections To reset the color values to the original ISOTOPIC colors click on Defaults To accept the color changes click on OK These color changes will be recalled the next time ISOTOPIC is started NOTE The Spectrum Color
33. and lt PgUp gt lt PgDn gt keys the peak buttons or by selections in other lists such as the library energy list The spectrum display can be expanded to show more detail or contracted to show more data using the Zoom In and Zoom Out features Zooming in and out can be performed using the Toolbar buttons the Display menu commands or the rubber rectangle see Section 2 3 3 The rubber rectangle allows the spectrum to be expanded to any horizontal or vertical scale The baseline or zero level at the bottom of the display can also be offset with this tool allowing the greatest possible flexibility in showing the spectrum in any detail The Toolbar and Display menu zoom commands offer a quick way to change the display These change both the horizontal and vertical scales at the same time For Zoom In the horizontal width is reduced by about 6 of full width ADC conversion gain and the vertical scale is halved The Zoom In button and menu item zoom to a minimum horizontal scale of 6 of the ADC conversion gain For Zoom Out the horizontal width is increased by about 6 of full width ADC conversion gain and the vertical scale is doubled 15 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual The Keypad lt gt and Keypad lt gt accelerator keys duplicate the Zoom In and Zoom Out Toolbar buttons and Display menu commands The lt F5 gt lt F6 gt and 1 1 keys change the vertical scale by a factor of two without changing
34. calibration Collect a spectrum with one source or calibrate with this spectrum Exit the calibration function Clear the Detector Collect the spectrum of the second source Calibrate by adding the new lines to the existing ones which are retained MB WN The process can be repeated for additional sources When completed the calibration should be saved on disk The individual spectra can be saved or used in other application software In addition the calibrations in the spectra can be updated by recalling each spectrum in turn recalling the complete calibration and re saving the spectrum To use more than one stored spectrum to make a single calibration Calibrate using one spectrum Exit the calibration function Save the calibration in a file Recall the second spectrum Recall the calibration because recalling the spectrum has replaced the first calibration with the calibration from the spectrum 6 Select Calibrate Energy and enter the peak energies for the second spectrum aL see e The process can be repeated for additional spectra 92 3 3 4 Recall Calibration This command see Fig 66 opens a standard file recall dialog allowing you to recall the calibration fields from the specified file to the working 3 MENU COMMANDS Efficiency Table calibration for the currently selected Detector The current working cali dem Size bration is lost The calibration data can be read
35. m1 file and click on Save The file save Soil Setup dialog will close and the fields all the inputs on the Detector Acquisition File Menu Analysis and Report tabs will be set to blanks or to their default values Enter the new settings then use File Save to save them NOTE If the current settings have not already been saved be sure to do so before selecting New otherwise they will be lost Open Use this command to open an M1 file from a standard file open dialog The contents of the file replace the current settings which are lost unless they have been saved Save This saves the current settings to the m1 file most recently retrieved during this work session Use it to save any changes to the parameters in a particular settings file If no settings file has been retrieved during this configuration session this command functions the same as Save As Save As This saves the current settings in an m1 file using a standard file save dialog Enter a filename and click on Save Alpha Rho The Alpha Rho menu is shown in Fig 89 Use these functions to create change print and display the alpha rho tables New Edit NOTE Ifa nuclide is in the analysis library but not in the alpha rho table En it is assumed to be uniformly distributed in the soil that is the alpha rho is 0 0 If the Override box on the Analysis tab is marked o 85 see Section 3 1 3 the table values are ignored and all table nuclides Al
36. ph e p a Tu Pa v 136 P Hs P e Ne In the case of a thin layer on the surface a p and the unscattered flux is a ph 137 p 2 17 S 2 a The software solves the equations for the given value of a p The air density soil density and detector height are specified in the Settings Configurations dialogs for Soil Mode The mass attenuation coefficients are calculated for a given energy by logarithmic interpolation of Beck s values 247 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual The activities of uniformly and exponentially distributed nuclides are typically reported in different units Bq g and Bq cm respectively To compare activities of different distributions the units can be converted The program estimates the activity per area by calculating the depth of soil that will absorb 90 of the gamma rays at the peak energy and multiplies the flux by p X depth to convert Bq g to Bq cm To report exponentially distributed nuclides in Bq g the flux must be divided by p x depth 4 14 1 5 Calculation of the Overall Calibration Factor Recalling that the total absorption peak count rate per unit inventory or concentration is equal to the three functions just calculated it is now possible to solve for N JA as follows N N N PL ss Ip O 138 A N Us Because the gamma spectroscopy software has generated N net peak count rate specific to a radionucli
37. straight line background 3 For energies above 200 keV the peak search sensitivity is 2 or higher The parabolic background is calculated as the least squares fit to the actual spectrum data at the low energy background data point the spectrum data point at the channel most below the straight line background and the spectrum data at the high energy background data point This parabolic form is calculated channel by channel and subtracted from the original spectrum to obtain the net spectrum for the fit Figure 178 shows this case for an actual spectrum 198 4 ANALYSIS METHODS Calculated Straight Line Background Parabolic Fit to the Background Figure 178 Parabolic Background 4 2 4 Total Peak Area The net spectrum which is the composite of the contributions of the individual peaks can be represented as a weighted sum of the Gaussian peak shapes The weighting factors of each component are proportional to the area of that component peak The peaks to be included in the deconvolution are each positioned at the library energy or the peak finder energy of the component The shape is calculated for the peak at the given energy even though the change in shape with energy within the energy range of the multiplet is small The calibration peak shape is used The contribution of a unit height peak is calculated for each channel in the multiplet range for each candidate energy This matrix of peak amplitudes multiplied by the
38. u espe LL a mmm 2 a d ad Ld P eden defen 7 28 97 Marker 8 12 97 01 01 AM 6 022E 5 Bq 8 26 97 Figure 203 Printout of Control Chart with Fixed Vertical Scale On GammaVision Quality Assurance Al XI Ele Scale PlotVariable Detector EG amp G ORTEC 1 DSPEC 075 Options Standard Sample Activity 6 6236 45 4 822E 5 1 22E 5 Marker 8 12 97 01 01 AM 6 022E 5 Bq 8 25 97 5 8138 4 7 27 97 Figure 204 Control Chart On Screen with Fixed Vertical Scale Off 262 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE EG amp G ORTEC 9 2 98 10 22 26 AM 1 DSPEC 075 6 623E 5 Standard Sample Activity 4 822E 5 j 3 021E 5 FDA B XITYILPRAYYTIFTYFXITLLPLLEYTT TM AAA id esssossossaconsestoons esssesose LL E 0 1e po E E papedgn gq qpop 4 p A A E PE dopo der 7127197 Marker 8 12 97 01 01 AM 6 022E 5 Bq 8 25 97 Figure 205 Printout of Control Chart with Fixed Vertical Scale Off 5 2 6 Archive Database This utility allows you to create a copy of the QA database file GvQa32 Mdb for archival A standard file save dialog opens allowing you to select the target folder and name of the archive database This operation does not remove records from or compact the GvQa32 Mdb database file 5 3 Creating a Sample Description SDF File for QA ISOTOPIC QA uses an ORTEC sample description spF file to govern the data analysis and reporting process A sample description file Default SDF is installe
39. 099 108 uis 131 os os oss oss oss oss os 106 114 125 238 4 ANALYSIS METHODS L D 03 7091 Loss ose os Table 2 Angular Correction Factor N N Downward Facing Detector Plane Source Distribution a p XD Although not the preferred orientation N N values have also been determined for upward facing Ge detectors The two tables given below provide N N values for the limiting cases where a p 0 and a p oo Table 3 Angular Correction Factor N N Upward Facing Detector Uniform Source Distribution o p 0 Energy L D HA MeV Pos os or os os 1o 14 12 23 os osi osz oss oss oor os vos vus 131 os Joss Joss oss oss oss os 106 xus 125 zo os fos2 oss oss oo ose 100 vos 116 725 os Joss Joss oor oss oos oso ros 167 239 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Table 4 Angular Correction Factor N N Upward Facing Detector Plane Source Distribution a p 0 Energy L D MeV 07 Les o7 os vs 091 The data represented in these four tables are used by ISOTOPIC in the following manner N N values presented by Helfer and Miller have been fitted to curves and are represented within ISOTOPIC as coefficients to a third order polynomial These coefficients are represented as arrays with one array per each of the four tables previously presented Table Description N 1 E Y
40. 137 e No defined chemical formula If you are instead entering a material with no defined chemical weight such as combustibles or glass and combustibles the fields on the Size page will be empty Enter the Density of the matrix in units of g cc Do not enter an atomic weight This value becomes the default density for this material when selected for a configuration It can be adjusted in the Configuration Wizard 136 3 MENU COMMANDS e Click on Next to continue to the Composition page Fig 104 The chemical formula is used to calculate the total absorption coefficient from the individual coefficients in the database These can be combined in one of two ways On this dialog select either combination by Number of atoms or by Percent by atomic weight Both methods are a weighted average of the component coefficients this selects the weighting factors In the example of sand combining by number of atoms means that the total absorption coefficient is the sum of the silicon coefficient and twice the oxygen coefficient divided by the number of atoms 3 While the percent by weight method means that the total absorption coefficient is 0 4675 or 28 08 divided by 28 08 15 99 15 99 times the silicon coefficient and 0 5325 or 31 98 divided by 28 08 15 99 15 99 Click on Next to continue Attenuation Coefficient Wizard Composition The coefficients of the new material will be calculated using the relative amounts of
41. 33 2 25 11 397 0 4357 0 8414 0 9982 1 271 2 071 2 36 2 5 12 17 0 4536 0 8667 1 025 1 300 2 105 2 39 For a p 0 uniform profile natural emitters the source strength is 1 y g s for soil at all depths For a p gt 0 exponential profile fallout emitter the source strength is 1 y cm s emitted from an infinite column of soil where the activity exponentially decreases with depth at relaxation length of 1 a at soil density p 246 4 ANALYSIS METHODS The value for a p has been selected and the energy E in MeV is also established at this point The flux is calculated by solving one of three equations depending on the value of a p For these equations So surface activity photons s cm Sy soil activity per unit volume photons s cm D soil density in g cm the default value is 1 6 g cm p air density in g cm the default value is 0 0012 g cm h height of detector above ground in cm the default value is 100 cm u p mass attenuation coefficient of soil L p mass attenuation coefficient of air When a p 0 the distribution is uniform and the unscattered flux is given by Ha Pa Pah VA cb Ps Pa p Sle ARIAS E Pooh 135 S p 2 us Pa u p ph Pa When the distribution of a radionuclide decreases exponentially with depth the unscattered flux is E 1 a P Ha H ue
42. 4 1 2 2 MDA Type allows you to choose the MDA calculation to be used for calculating the MDA for the report The MDA is a measure of how little activity could be present without being The MDA is reported in units of activity such as becquerels The calibration geometry backgrounds 108 3 MENU COMMANDS system and source induced detector resolution and particular nuclide all seriously affect the MDA reported The Supervisor Manual provides explanations of the different MDA formulas used by ISOTOPIC The default is Method 12 Regulatory Guide 4 16 To use another MDA method change the MDA type parameter in the B30winds ini file see the Supervisor Manual The parameters in the Additional Error section are used in the calculation of the total uncertainty Total uncertainty is composed of error estimates that follow a normal distribution and error estimates that follow a uniform distribution over a range Most errors in gamma spectroscopy whether systematic or random follow a normal distribution Error estimates are included for counting random summing absorption nuclide uncertainty efficiency and geometry Enter additional errors related to the measurement that follow a normal distribution at the 1 sigma level Enter uniform distribution errors 9 at the complete range of the uniform error limit That is if the likelihood of an uncertainty is uniform over 3 of the reported results enter 3 0 in this field The error estimates
43. 604 71 3 047E404 5 435E4D0 7 54E402 6 50E4D1 G 795 87 4 570E404 3 952E 01 4 14E 01 G 1400 58 2 832E 04 1 599E 01 1 35E 01 C Library energies cae 2 937E404 G 1 206E403 2 14E 01 C Te 242 72 2 220E404 3 647E403 2 99E 02 in library order 847 43 1 450E404 8 159 03 1 98E 02 C 326 59 4 352E 04 1 588E404 8 53E 03 931 30 9 866E404 3 390E404 4 24E 03 C 889 82 6 795E405 1 685E 05 1 19E 03 C 1494 53 1 295E 06 2 069E 05 6 07E 04 C 847 05 5 8525405 5 836E 05 2 76E D4 232 64 1 883E406 7 D5E405 1 23E 04 N 241 BR 2 1273E402 59 53 2 127E402 1 015E400 1 58E 05 2 68E406 G i This peak used in the nuclide activity average Nuclide codes Peak too wide hut only one peak in library Complete Peak is part of a multiplet and this area went explanation negative during deconvolution of peaks Peak is too narrow Peak is too wide at FW25M but ok at FWHM 3 Peak fails sensitivity test Peak identified but first peak of this nuclide failed one or more qualification tests Peak activity higher than counting uncertainty range Peak activity lower than counting uncertainty range Peak outside analysis energy range amp Calculated peak centroid is not close enough to the library energy centroid for positive identification P Peakbackground subtraction Peak codes Nuclide Codes Peak Codes T Thermal Neutron Activation G Gamma Ray F Fast Neutron Activation
44. 64 3 MENU COMMANDS If your spectrum contains many well separated peaks ISOTOPIC can use two energy regions for separate fitting The energy separating the two regions called the knee is specified by you The best fit to the two regions is often obtained by entering a knee energy that corresponds to a region where the efficiency is slowly varying and not at the maximum point This is usually about 300 400 keV for p type detectors and 100 keV for n type The Calibration Wizard presents an efficiency curve that allows you to clearly see the effect of the knee energy so you can easily determine the best value The knee value if incorrectly chosen can cause poor results near the knee especially below the knee Using many data points near the knee aids in selecting the correct knee energy A poor choice of type of fit can result in a good fit to poor data which will yield a poor efficiency calibration The calibration source should contain isolated singlets over the entire energy range of interest If the energy region near the knee is important to the analysis several points around the knee should be used for both the two function and polynomial type of fits If you wish you can perform the efficiency calibration using one or more spectra to minimize the difficulty of obtaining the required number of singlets The data from these multiple spectra must be entered manually see the discussion starting on page 75 ISOTOPIC offers several optio
45. AS S oa ha atin E OER GENER EE Ge IE RE 299 TV Screen AAA A bere ail hoe teneor Leste 299 7 1 2 SEHE Fool bar A Pie oe e cue eat vB aoe ES 301 7 1 3 Menu CoOmbiands ona posa ee tee ah ee be bata EPIO END 302 T less A CR DER E ae COP e CO An Eb ce Eo 302 TIES 2 VIEW TORTOR PROPER 303 Flo OPUN S ce a cid oae Gomi E E TEEN E E 304 Graphen eos Wee Be Be oS hw oe Ree ER EE DN ERE 304 ithe rod c PC IT 306 Auto Toad UFO 2 ce A e Ce bos x e 306 PASA ROT ns CE E de PES ED EE ER ea E Pit 306 Modify Active ROUGE caducada 306 CCAR tope tp ra AU ERRARE M A a ACORDE Sg 306 Cleat Ale SA E doe dogs hus V sau d e 307 Save Rl c REHAB RENE A AAN MERI 307 Recall Eilenn etus dara Escuche bte nsa Esch os qoe iod 307 7 1 4 Right Mouse Button Menu Commands 020 e eee eens 307 Toll Show Residuals sane See hood ce hee eee LES PSY ce Be Eee ee 307 ES AA e abo e o eb a bee Rayos 308 TAI LOOM UC ASA o CR EA SERRE EO RE E 308 YI Undo Zom IM sasies x heed ok ee bee haha eee ux quara 308 7 1 4 5 Full View AAA A 308 LAO Mar RO oerte A EE A E 308 7 1 4 7 Clear Active ROL 20 citrico 308 2 14 58 Show Rk OLD AES cia a Se DER a SR RA va ees 309 TADO Peak Info 425 oo eddie abel chat A E A od pies 310 7 1 4 10 Show Hover Window Exa de ii wee eus 310 Jake Sum A ered x p E eager anne 310 JE E Print Op als ai redet ra toa s 310 Vals T9 PrOBOCEUBS es EOS MESES ES 310 7 1 5 Command Line Interface 5e eed d EROR e a ea IRR 3
46. Add New to add this nuclide to the list Edit To change any of the current nuclides select the nuclide in the list use horizontal scroll bars if needed This will display the current settings for this nuclide Make any changes needed Any or all of the entries can be changed When finished with the changes click on Update 3 MENU COMMANDS Properties x E CO e PPP rf Amplifier Ampliier2 ADC Stabilizer High Voltage Field Data About Status Presets MDA Preset Nuclide Report Nuclide Lo ROI Hi ROI Factor Add New IUBET EK Update gt Delete Library Report l Nuclide Eu 154 Nuclide Eu 154 Factor 1 0000 000 Low ROI 643 Units Energ 12314 y High ROI 663 f Marker 653 123 23 keV 1 762 Cnts Figure 32 Nuclide Report Setup Tab To remove an entry select the entry and click on Delete When the properties dialog is closed all the values are written to the digiDART and will be used when the Nuclide Report is displayed on the digiDART display 3 2 8 2 Gain Stabilization The gain stabilizer operates to maintain the selected peak in its original position This is done by controlling the amplification factor of a separate amplifier so that the peak is stationary The gain stabilizer requires a peak in the spectrum to monitor the changes in the gain of the system amplifier The input pulse height to channel number relationship is 51 ISOTOPIC
47. Background Correction table values for the PBC C 1 4 QA Database Files MDB Microsoft Access database file extension C 2 Database Tables for ISOTOPIC QA C 2 1 QA Detectors Detector Table Only one of these tables for entire database one record for each detector being monitored for QA with fields defined as follows Field Name SQL Data Type Description Detector SQL_INTEGER Detector ID number Primary Key DetName SQL_CHAR 32 Detector Pick List Name DetDesc SQL_CHAR 64 Detector Description Creation SQL_TIMESTAMP Date Time this record created NumMeas SQL_INTEGER Measurement counter all types for this detector NumBack SQL_INTEGER Background type only Measurement counter for this detector SamFile SQL_CHAR 64 Sample Type File Name SamType SQL_CHAR 64 Sample Type Description LibFile SQL_CHAR 64 Nuclide Library File Name Setup SQL_SMALLINT Setup Flagword Limits SQL_SMALLINT Limit Settings Flagword 328 Field Name MinBack LowBack BigBack MaxBack MinA ctivity LowActivity BigActivity MaxaA ctivity MinShift LowShift BigShift MaxShift MinFWHM LowFWHM BigFWHM MaxFWHM MinFWTM LowFWTM BigFWTM MaxFWTM Operator SOL Data Type SQL_REAL SQL_REAL SQL_REAL SQL_REAL SQL_REAL SQL_REAL SQL_REAL SQL_REAL SQL_REAL SQL_REAL SQL_REAL SQL_REAL SQL_REAL SQL_REAL SQL_REAL SQL_REAL SQL_REAL SQL_REAL SQL_REAL SQL_REAL SQL_CHAR 64 APPENDIX C FILE TYPES AND FORMATS Description Min Backgroun
48. ConfigO1 Isotopic LWS ConfigO1 Isotopic LWS Config 1 Isotopic LWS ConfigO1 Isotopic LWS Config01 Isotopic L w S ConfigO1 070508 test02 070508 test03 070508 test04 070508 test05 070508 test06 070508 test0 070508 test08 070508 test09 070508 test10 070508 test11 070508 test12 208 liter drum LDrum02 rum LDrumO1 5 4 2007 1 46 37 PM 5 8 2007 3 08 50 PM 5 8 2007 3 10 00 PM 5 8 2007 3 12 20 PM 5 8 2007 3 25 44 PM 5 8 2007 3 33 54 PM 5 8 2007 3 38 05 PM 5 8 2007 3 39 30 PM 5 8 2007 3 41 10 PM 5 8 2007 3 53 53 PM 5 8 2007 3 55 53 PM 5 8 2007 4 20 05 PM JD Decipin Type Dae Spectr Water Filter Buf00000 4n1 070508 test02 Iso00003 n1 070508 test03 Iso00004 An1 070508 test04 Iso00005 An1 070508 test05 IsoD0007 n1 070508 test06 Iso00008 An1 070508 test0 Iso00009 4n1 070508 test08 lso00010 4n1 070508 test09 s000011 4m1 070508 testi 0 lso00012 4n1 070508 test11 Iso00013 n1 070508 test12 Iso00014 An1 2 1s000017 4n1 LDrum02 Buf00002 4n1 00018 4n1 LDrumO1 Buff 19 An1 LDrumO4 AI 5 lso00020 4n1 LDrumO5 Buf0005 4n1 LConfig2 01 Iso00021 amp n1 LConfig2 01 Buf00006 4n1 LConfig1 01 Iso00022 An1 Isotopic LWS Config 1 LConfig1 02 131 Isotopic LWS Config 1 1234 Isotopic LWS Config02 070517 2det 01 Isotopic LWS Config02 070517 2det 02 Isotopic LWS Config02 070517 2det 03 co60 am241 Isotopic LWS Config02 070517 2det 04 co60 am241 Isotopic LWS Confiq01 070517 1det 0
49. Detector ID 12592 Detector system 122 Calibration Filename GvDemo ini Energy Calibration Created O5 ipr 1995 06 44 56 Zero offset 3 771 keV Gain 0 162 keV channel Quadratic 2 447E D9 ke channel 2 Efficiency Calibration Created O7 Sep 2000 16 22 36 Type Polynomial Uncertainty 3 396 amp Coefficients O 126920 4 060596 0 731664 0 124767 0 008437 0 000215 Library Files Main analysis library Calibni lib Library Match Width 0 500 Analysis parameters Analysis engine vanz G52W2 01 Start Channel 10 i 5 38keV Stop channel 16000 z588 55keV Peak rejection level 100 000 Peak search sensitivity 5 Sample Size 1 000 Activity scaling factor 1 0000E 00 1 0000E400 1 0000E 00 Detection limit method Traditional ORTEC method 0 0000000E 00 O 0000000E 00 0 0004 best method Random error Systematic error Fraction Limit Background width Half lives decay limit 12 000 Corrections Status Comments Decay correct to date YES D6 Jun 1991 16 37 33 Decay during acquisition YES Decay during collection No True coincidence correction No Peaked background correction NO Absorption Internal Noa Geometry carrection No Random summing No Energy Calibration Normalized diff 0 0310 The energy calibration was changed to fit the spectrum Zero offset 3 682 keV Gain 162 keV channel Quadratic 274E 09 keV channel az 13 SEP 2000 13 45 58 Page 1 1 0000E 00 based on spectrum
50. FWHM radio buttons at the bottom of the Energy Calibration Sidebar display the table and graph for either energy vs channel Fig 58 or FWHM vs energy Fig 59 Isotopic Supervisor Isotopic Mode BEE Ele Acquire Calibrate Calculate Analtze Library Services Window ze ese 4 Cael i cm 2 9 9 4 Per Energy 1856 Channel 8226 90 ee E 1332 5000 keV p cal 74605 Table 0292 11 Energies 50 8456 8587 Delete Energy FWHM Graph O x Recall Save 2 693 Fit C Energy FWHM FWHM F No FWHM Cal Auto Calibrate O0RTEC Buffer GvDemo Spc MIXED GAMMA MARINELLI ON ENDCAP OF P402684 11 06 18 AM Fri 12JuH02 0 8837 3 Energy keV Marker 8 226 1 332 52 keV 37 358 Cnts FWHM 1 858705 Calibrating Close Sidebar to Finish or ESC to Cancel 1 Nuclide Peaks 0 Unknown Peaks Figure 59 FWHM Calibration Display Click on FWHM The table shows the one value entered and the graph shows a horizontal line For a single point the FWHM is assumed to be a constant Using the Full Spectrum View or the Library List window select a peak in the low energy part of the spectrum and move the marker to the centroid of the peak Again click in the E field at the top of the sidebar and enter the energy of this peak Both the energy function and FWHM function as well as their corresponding tables will update with the new entry so progress can be monitored 88
51. Figure 245 Link the Tables in the New Database to the Tables in the ISOTOPIC Database Figure 246 shows the completed query 322 APPENDIX B TRANSFERRING INFORMATION FROM THE ISOTOPIC DATABASE EZ Microsoft Access Ele Edit View Insert Query Tools Window Help E Bus amp s amp i v 4 BE N o al mE NIG amp amp Simple results Select Query IsotopicPeaks IsotopicResults Figure 246 A Finished Simple Query 4 Run the query and verify that the results of the query are the same as the results from the corresponding ISOTOPIC report 5 Save the query with a descriptive file name 6 If the results are correct you are ready to develop an Excel query or custom Access report Refer to your Access user manual for information on developing a report B 2 Transferring the Data to Excel At this point you can transfer the data to Excel The quick and dirty method is to simply cut and paste from the HTML report into the spreadsheet The more advanced method is to develop an Excel query which uses the same fields present in the Access query 323 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual To do this 1 Develop a new Excel query e Select the following menu sequence in Excel Data Import External Data New Database Query e Navigate to the example Buffer mdb database created using your version of Access e Select the simple query just developed in Access in this example Isotopic Query
52. ISOTOPIC except text entry The following sections describe specialized mouse functions 2 3 1 Moving the Marker with the Mouse To position the marker with the mouse move the pointer to the desired channel in the Expanded Spectrum View and click the left mouse button once This will move the marker to the mouse position Click in the Full Spectrum View to move the expanded view to that place This is 18 2 DISPLAY FEATURES generally a much easier way to move the marker around in the spectrum than using the arrow keys and keyboard shortcuts although mouse and keyboard commands can be mixed 2 3 2 The Right Mouse Button Menu Figure 7 shows the right mouse button menu To open it position the Start mouse pointer in the spectrum display click the right mouse button then Sod use the left mouse button to select from the list of commands Not all of the Copy to Buffer commands are available at all times depending on the spectrum displayed Farin and whether the rubber rectangle is active Except for Undo Zoom In and Zoom Out Input Count Rate all of these functions are on the Toolbar or in one of the ESA Menu items See Section 3 11 for more information on the commands a ie 2 3 3 Using the Rubber Rectangle SE SAS Sum The rubber rectangle is used for selecting a particular area of interest within a spectrum It can be used in conjunction with the right mouse button menu see Fig 7 for many functions To dra
53. N counts in the gamma ray peak in the spectrum are divided by the elapsed live time the resulting counting rate N Live Time is now corrected for dead time losses The standard deviation in that counting rate is y N Live Time Unfortunately extending the counting time to make up for losses due to system busy results in an incorrect result if the gamma ray flux is changing as a function of time If an isotope with a very short half life is placed in front of the detector the spectrometer might start out with a very high dead time but the isotope will decay during the count and the dead time will be zero by the end of the count If the spectrometer extends the counting time to make up for the lost counts it will no longer be counting the same source as when the losses occurred As a result the number of counts in the peak will not be correct When a supported ORTEC MCB operates in ZDT mode it adjusts for the dead time losses by taking very short acquisitions and applying a correction in real time that is as the data are coming in to the number of counts in the spectrum This technique allows the gamma ray flux to change while the acquisition is in progress yet the total counts recorded in each of the peaks are correct The resulting spectrum has no dead time at all in ZDT mode the data are corrected not the acquisition time Thus the net counts in a peak are divided by the real time to determine the count rate P Patent n
54. Output Bq C uCi nCi pCi Iv Peak List Reporting Uncertainty can be 1 2 or 3 sigma The s Reporting Uncertainty Iv Nuclide Identification uncertainty is reported at En EE f 1 2 3 Sigma the selected confidence limit on the reports the value is V Peak Identification Iv Unknown Peaks Send To C Printer printed on the report Che F G Pogam edee al The output report can be sent directly to a Printer File or Program When the output is sent to a program that program will be started Figure 87 Soil Mode Report Options with the report filename as an argument Windows Notepad can be used to view the report as soon as it is available To browse for the program or filename use the browse button beside the field If an asterisk is entered as the filename the report will be assigned the spectrum filename with the extension RPT In all cases the report file will be saved to disk 123 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 3 5 3 5 Menu Commands for the Soil Setup Dialog File The File menu is shown in Fig 88 These commands will recall settings M1 files from or save them to disk Using the settings files is an easy way to bonis restore the system to a known state Any number of settings files can be saved m Save As New This opens the Create Soil Settings File dialog a standard file save Figure 88 dialog Enter a filename for the new
55. Paste button Editing Nuclide Peaks When a nuclide is selected in the working u1B file the right half of the Editing dialog shows the peak list Note the column headers Rank Energy and Percent To sort the peak list by a particular parameter in the list click on the appropriate header To edit a peak either double click on the peak in the right hand list or click once on it then click on the Edit button This will open the Edit Library Peak dialog Fig 137 The Energy keV Gammas per 100 Disintegrations Photon Flags and Peak Flags will already be listed The Photon Flags are used to show the origin of the E dit Library Peak El ES peak Only one can be selected at a time Gamma Ray Associated Nuclide Cd 109 G and X Ray X mean the peak energy is due to a Energy kev ENEE nuclear or atomic transition respectively Positron Gammas per 100 Disintegrations 36100 Decay P is used for the 511 keV peak Single Escape Photon Flags S peaks are peaks for which a single 511 keV photon a Gamma Ray G x Ray x has escaped the detector This can only occur for full energy peaks above 1 022 MeV Double Escape D gt ee s peaks are peaks for which two 511 keV photons have iD escaped the detector Both single and double escape Peak Flags peaks are broader than gamma ray peaks Neither can Key Line K be used for activity calculations because the intensity Not In Average A of the peak is not related di
56. Peak Info display on the selected peak in the spectra stored in the PC The calculated value is computed by multiplying the net peak count rate by a user defined constant If the constant includes the efficiency and yield the displayed value will be activity The nuclide label and the activity units are entered by the user The report has this format 48 3 MENU COMMANDS Calculations These are the calculations used to generate the Nuclide Report Activity Uncertainty and Peak values Activity is calculated as follows NetCounts NucCoef Activity P LiveTime 2 where NucCoef is normally the inverse of the product of the efficiency and the yield Note that the efficiency is the ABSOLUTE full energy peak counting efficiency for the source detector geometry being used Thus in order to get meaningful activity results as in any counting situation the efficiency factors must be appropriate to the actual counting geometry If NucCoef is set to 1 the peak count rate is shown on the display LiveTime 1s the current live time NetCounts is computed with the following equation where GrossCounts is the sum of the counts in the ROI excluding the first and last 3 channels of the ROI Background is AvgCount first 3 chan AvgCount last 3 chan 2 Background ROIWidth 3 where ROIWidth is ROIWidth EndChannel StartChannel 1 6 4 49 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Uncert
57. There are no requirements on the spectrum or the library other than there must be at least five peaks 10 preferred in the spectrum that are in the library However this feature works best if the library does not contain X ray peaks The Auto Calibrate feature works as follows the spectrum is searched for all the major peaks then this peak list is compared to the library peak list to find the calibration that gives the best match Calibr EJE3 Energy Peak amp 4100 73 E 927 5700 keV Enter Table D Energies Delete energy Recall Save Fit Energy C FWHM Neeessessnsossosessesseseaseseoson Auto Calibrate Figure 57 Energy Calibration Sidebar CAUTION You can obtain an excellent spectrum for energy recalibration in only a few minutes However a good FWHM calibration requires a much longer acquisition Before using the Auto Calibrate function be sure to disable the FWHM calibration by marking the No FWHM Cal checkbox in the lower section on the Energy Calibration Sidebar Fig 57 Patent number 6 006 162 86 3 MENU COMMANDS 3 3 3 2 Manual Calibration If there is no energy calibration the energy of one or two known peaks must be entered Using the Full Spectrum View select a peak in the high energy channel part of the spectrum When this part of the spectrum is visible in the expanded display move the cursor to the known peak At this time the
58. Type Analysis Settings File is the Spr file configured for QA in Step 4 Click on Browse to select the spF file To edit the spr file click on Edit This will open the Analysis Options dialog see Section 5 3 Especially relevant sample type settings include e Sample type description e Acquisition presets e QA nuclide library file the one created per Step 3 On the left of the SAMPLE Analysis Parameter Limits section are checkboxes for marking the limits to be tracked Total Activity Bq Average Peak Shift keV Average FWHM Ratios and Average FWTM Ratios are the choices Click on the ones to be tracked Once you have at least one result for this detector in the QA database you can click on the Suggest button to automatically calculate suggested warning and alarm limits for the selected parameters based on the data obtained to date for this detector If you click on Suggest before the first QA sample measurement the software will take no action The actual limits can be determined from the samples counted in Step 2 above Click on OK ISOTOPIC will check the measurement limits to determine if they are set consistently If they are the dialog will close if not a message will be displayed on the Marker Information Line and the dialog will remain open so the limits can be changed QA data can now be collected using Acquire QA Measure Background and Acquire QA Measure Sample 257 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s
59. User y 5 cxts20 E Manuals Test Files Ml sH4275 5pc Y 104 An1 Ir 109 2 An1 Ml es9ocmoo spe Wieso Ig Demo3 Spc lico Spc Y MiDemo An1 Yr MixEu000mm Ant E MixEuODOmm Spc Y MixEu100mm Ani MA vixeu100mm 5pc Y MixEu250mm Ani amp er E3 Y vixam n0mm An1 Wrixcamooomm spe Y MixGam100mm An1 Miriam 100mm Spc Y MixGam250mm An1 Wrixcamzsomm spe Rich Detector Spe ose Filter Spc We canberra detector Spc WW mixeuzsomm spc Save as type field The file extension should be left at the default setting to avoid confusion This is especially true if the spectra are to be used in non ORTEC programs If you wish to save to other than Integer SPC use the Save as type list to select the desired format gt Save Cancel File name Save as type Integer SPC Figure 16 Save As If the filename you have specified already exists a message box opens asking you to verify the entry or cancel the operation Clicking on OK will completely overwrite the existing file After the disk file has been saved its filename is displayed on the spectrum window Title Bar For hardware with multiple spectra for instance MCBs that support ZDT mode both spectra are automatically saved in the file 3 1 4 Print The Print function does one of the following e If the marker is in an ROI the data contents of the ROI channels are printed e If the marker is not in an ROI the contents of the channels in the spe
60. X E Ray I Fission Product P Positron Decay N Naturally Occurring Isotope S Single Escape P Photon Reaction D Double Escape C Charged Particle Reaction E Key Line M No MDA Calculation Not in Average E Coincidence Corrected C Coincidence Peak H Halflife limit exceeded Figure 224 Summary of Library Peak Usage The symbols have the following meanings The peak FW10M and FW25M were wider than the calibrated shape by more than 20 which would indicate that this might be a multiplet Deconvolution was not possible however because only one peak was in the library 286 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE This peak was in an area that was deconvoluted and the area of this component was zero or minus The peak was then removed as a component and the deconvolution redone This usually indicates this peak was not present or the energy calibration needs adjusting The peak FW25M is less than 80 of the calibration FW25M This usually indicates that this peak is not present The peak FW25M was wider than the calibrated shape by more than 20 but the FWHM was within 20 of the calibrated FWHM This indicates that there might be a small peak near the main peak that should be included in the library The 1 sigma counting error was greater than the user set sensitivity cutoff value This peak was identified as belonging to this nuclide but the first peak in the library was not present or was disqualified No
61. a for uniform source distribution downward facing detector 0 LIN f pas de 2 E vs PIN for planar source distribution downward facing detector 0 LIN f m 3 E vs T uniform source distribution upward facing detector 0 N E 4 E vs E plane source distribution upward facing detector 0 The polynomial can be expressed as N No ap be ci d 120 where a b c and d are stored constants and y Ey in MeV Knowledge of detector orientation 1 e facing up or facing down specifies which two tables and therefore which corresponding arrays will be used in the calculations 240 4 ANALYSIS METHODS For this discussion let us assume that the detector is facing down This limits our interest to Tables 1 and 2 and the corresponding polynomial coefficients At this point the value to be used for a p must be considered Depending upon the value of a p there are three possible cases to be evaluated Three cases represent three general source distributions e a p lt 0 1 uniform source distribution a p 0 e o p gt 0 5 planar source distribution a p e e 0 1 lt a p lt 0 5 not distributed not planar These three general conditions are used in the following manner Example 1 For the case where a p lt 0 1 the source is deeply distributed and a p is assumed to be 0 which approximates this case by assuming the source to be uniformly distributed N N eus A 121 No No a p lt 0 1 a p 0 For example assume
62. analysis library energy x in keV E the expected peak energy x from the analysis library in keV It is not unusual for gain shifts to occur especially if the temperature changes Small gain shifts can affect the analysis but do not necessarily mean the data gathered with the detector should not be reported The spectrum calibration can be changed after data acquisition to compensate for these shifts You should take into account how practical this QA feature when deciding to keep or remove a particular detector e Total Background The count rate counts sec over the entire spectrum of the environmental background that is with no source present Total Background Total Counts Live Time The background should be monitored to verify that the detector and shield have not been contaminated by radioactive materials The value stored is the total count rate which is independent of the count time and any specific isotopic contamination A background analysis report can be printed after the analysis completes NOTE When choosing a QA source select nuclides that have long half lives Nuclides with short half lives decay rapidly Consequently the counting statistics problem will eventually override the benefit of including that nuclide in the QA check Thus 1f you have a mixed gamma source that also contains rapidly decaying nuclides do not include those nuclides in the QA library Good choices for a QA source combination include A
63. another field or until 5 seconds have elapsed since a character was last entered During the time the entry is underlined no other program or PC on the network can modify this value If the Detector is locked see Section 3 7 3 you must know the password before you can modify its MCB properties To view a locked Detector s properties in read only mode click on Cancel when the Unlock Password dialog opens 35 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 3 2 8 1 digiDART Amplifier Figure 22 shows the Amplifier tab This tab contents the controls for Field Data About Status Presets MDA Preset Nuclide Report Gain Baseline Restore Preamp Amplifier Ampifier2 ADC Stabilizer HighVoltage lifier Type Input Polarity and p see r Gain 1 87 Baseline Restore Optimize optimization The Start Auto 0 45 wle x Stat Aut optimize button should be clicked OM re ls m only after all of the controls on xS Preamplifier Type the tabs have been set m 0 4672 Resistor Feedback Input Polarity Coarse 4h HO ef NOTE The changes you make on this tab take place immediately There is no cancel or undo for this dialog Figure 22 The digiDART Amplifier Tab Gain Set the amplifier coarse gain by selecting from the Coarse droplist then adjust the Fine gain with the horizontal slider bar or the edit box in the range of 0 45 to 1 00 The resu
64. are found the ratio is 99 99 99 99 or 100 In this case Co will be marked present because the ratio is above the 70 fraction limit shown in the figure If one peak is not located the ratio is 0 99 99 99 50 Since this is below the 70 fraction limit in the figure Co will not be marked present in this spectrum If you wish to decay correct the concentrations of the nuclides to a specific date mark the Decay Date checkbox and enter the date in the format displayed below the date field This date format is determined by the current Windows date format setting The Match Width set the upper limit on how far the spectrum peak energy can be from the library energy and still assigned to the library nuclide That is the difference between the gamma ray peak energy in the spectrum and the gamma ray peak energy in the library must be less than this match width value or the spectrum peak will not be associated with that library peak Note that the tolerance is in multiples of the full width at half maximum FWHM This allows the tolerance to be wider at higher energies where the FWHM is larger and smaller at the lower energies The Analyze Chan analysis channels are the channel limits for the analysis of the spectrum The lower limit should be set above the lower level discriminator LLD cutoff The high limit should be at the high limit of useful data in the spectrum The Peak Cutoff limits the unknown peak list to peaks with 1
65. automatically uses a distance of 30 cm You can enter a distance in the crs file later with the StdDist exe utility which is discussed in Section 7 2 Performing the New Efficiency Calibration The dialog shown in Fig 47 will direct you to position the calibra tion source and click on OK to begin spectrum acquisition i Place the 1830 Mixed gamma in the calibration position and select OK E Cancel If the currently active window is an MCB and you entered addi ional Count Time acquisition will begin and will run until the preset is met When acquisition is complete a message box will notify you and ask if you wish to save the spectrum file If you answer Yes a file save dialog will open so you can assign a location and filename Figure 47 Position the Source for the Efficiency Calibration If the currently active window is a buffer or MCB that already contains a spectrum and in the case of the MCB if the Clear Data box is unmarked the existing spectrum will be used for the calibration ISOTOPIC will pause for a few seconds then notify you that acquisition is complete and ask if you wish to save the spectrum file If you answer Yes a file save dialog will open so you can assign a location and filename If you already saved this spectrum file earlier in the 78 3 MENU COMMANDS wizard that is if you first performed an energy calibration and that spectrum was sufficient for the efficiency calibration there
66. calculated from this first pass Next the width is reduced or increased depending on the peak area to background ratio and the library match width This adjustment makes two improvements 1 it reduces the number of channels in the peak for small peaks decreasing the uncertainty and 2 it improves the area calculation for peaks moved from the library energy This background calculation method that is automatically selecting 5 3 or 1 point averaging depending on which method best approximates the spectrum data has advantages when there are closely spaced peaks over other methods For example because the 1 point method will be used when a small peak is very near a large peak a more accurate measure of the background will be obtained as compared to the 5 or the 3 point average Fig 166 The background of the small peak 1s less affected by the other peak because the automatic method will tend toward the smaller values Even in the case of peaks that are further apart than those shown in Fig 166 the background is less dependent on the scatter in the data when the 5 point method is used 180 4 ANALYSIS METHODS Peak of interest Minimum Point with Error Bars Counts x 10 FWHM Average Background 2700 Channel Number Figure 166 Background of a Small Peak Near Large Peak 4 1 1 2 5 Point Average If the 5 point method is chosen the minimum 5 point average channel value is chosen and is not co
67. can be any positive number Uniform distribution in the soil means the type of distribution that might be expected for naturally occurring nuclides A planar distribution Plane means a uniform thin layer on the surface of the soil such as recent fallout By default the activity of planar and exponentially distributed sources are listed in units of activity m while uniform nuclides are in units of activity g See Section 4 14 1 2 for more details on the alpha rho parameter 125 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Alpha Rho Value Nuclide Co 50 Source Distribution Cancel Default e Uniform amp lpha Rho 0 C Plane amp lpha Rho Infinity m 2 Exponential amp lpha Rho gt 0625 Alpha Rho Concentration Ratio Limits Energy 1 keV Energy 2 keV 1173 1332 0 8 1 1 Energy 1 11173 keV Lower Limit 9 Energy 2 11332 keV Upper Limit 1 1 Update Delete Figure 91 Add Nuclide to Alpha Rho Table Concentration Ratio Limits Advanced spectroscopists can use the Concentration Ratio Limits the activity of two peaks to develop a more accurate alpha rho value If the alpha rho value is correct the activity ratio of Energy 1 to Energy 2 will approach 1 0 The Lower Limit and Upper Limit represent the acceptable Energy 1 Energy 2 ratios The alpha rho value might need to be adjusted if the ratio is outside these limits If Energy 1 Energy 2 is outside these limits the concentra
68. centroid of the peak will be calculated and displayed in the upper part of the calibration input window as in this example Channel 11343 15 This is the channel number of the peak centroid Now click in the E input box and enter the energy of this peak Click on the Enter button or press lt Enter gt A table and graph will appear on the screen Fig 58 They can be moved around and sized if they obscure the spectrum Isotopic Supervisor Isotopic Mode ME E Ele Acquire Calibrate Calculate Analyze Library Services Window ET ecu xl es A peja or Y AA Energy Channel 8226 90 E 1332 5000 keV Enter Table 11 Energies 1836 011 113 a 66 1836 04 Delete Energy Energy Graph Recall Save 2815 Fit Energy C FWHM T No FWHM Cal Auto Calibrate 9 ORTEC Buffer GyDemo Spc MIXED GAMMA MARINELLI ON ENDCAP OF P402684 11 05 35 4M Fri 12 Jul 02 Channel Marker 8 226 1 332 52 keV 37 368 Cnts FWHM 1 858705 Calibrating Close Sidebar to Finish or ESC to Cancel 1 Nuclide Peaks 0 Unknown Peaks Figure 58 Energy Calibration Display The table shows one value the one just entered and the graph shows a straight line fit from energy 0 channel 0 to the energy and channel just entered This is an approximate calibration it should be fairly accurate if the zero offset is small 87 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual The Energy and
69. clicking in this window opens a right mouse button menu which is discussed in Section 7 1 4 5 The Full Spectrum Window shows the full histogram from the file or the Detector memory The vertical scale switches between logarithmic and linear in concert with the scaling in the expanded window When you zoom in on part of the spectrum in the expanded window the 300 7 1 7 UTILITIES Full Spectrum Window displays a rectangular area that reflects the portion of spectrum now visible in the Expanded Spectrum Window To quickly move to different region in the spectrum either click on that region in the Full Spectrum Window or click and drag the rectangle to the new position and the expanded display will update immediately at the new position You can also zoom out by clicking and dragging a rubber rectangle over any portion of the Full Spectrum Window the starting point for Figure 228 Grab Area for the this operation must be outside of the current expanded view Full Spectrum Window indicator rectangle The full spectrum window can be moved and sized see Section 2 3 4 the grab zone for this window is shown in Fig 228 Residuals which can be displayed in the lower section of the spectrum window displays a comparison of the counts in each channel to the calculated counts for that channel as determined by the peak fitting algorithm This comparison can be displayed in counts absolute residuals or standard deviations relat
70. collected by a single detector in two positions assign each position the same detector Name but either 1 a different Orientation or 2 a different height offset and or standoff Enter the Weighting factor for this detector This factor is used in the averaging of results from multiple spectra The factors do not need to total 1 If you are using a Detector Collimator enter the Depth Recess Thickness and Inner Diameter in cm then specify the Collimator Material The depth dimension is the distance from the front of the collimator to the front of the detector If the front of the detector is flush with the face of the collimator the distance is 0 zero If no collimator is used mark the No Collimator checkbox To use the energy calibration from an existing ORTEC Calibration c1b File click on the browse button and select the desired file To use an existing PBC table browse and select the desired PBc file Field of View Detector Standoff ISOTOPIC includes a utility for calculating the Standoff for the current detector collimator combination and the detector Field of View FOV FOV is the space subtended in front of and coaxial with a collimated detector The FOV must be computed to establish the area necessary for a source s activity to be detected without a collimator correction 115 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual To use this tool click on the Calculate button to open the Field of View d
71. container correction factor for the i voxel D outer container correction factor for the i voxel n number of voxels The matrix inner container and outer container correction factors are defined on page 225 for Eqn 103 o is the uncertainty for the i voxel defined as follows 2 2 2 O O O ats T O 112 where the uncertainty due to matrix correction is O patris log RES 100 113 In this equation H mass attenuation coefficient for the matrix o uncertainty in the matrix assumed to be 5 p matrix density MT matrix thickness for the i voxel 232 4 ANALYSIS METHODS o the uncertainty in the voxel to detector distance ds a cal d o 100 0 2 114 d 114 where o uncertainty in distance assumed to be 0 5 cm d calibration distance d distance from the center of the i voxel to the detector o the uncertainty in the detector efficiency including detection from the detector side Based on measurements with a point source the uncertainty in the detector efficiency is about 346 at a source to detector distance of 30 cm At greater distances 396 is also assumed The uncertainty increases to 1596 at 10 cm At other distances the uncertainties are linearly interpolated o is limited to a minimum value of 3 in all cases In container wall attenuation the wall thickness has zero uncertainty so there is no uncertainty associated with the container wall
72. correction 4 11 7 Minimum Detectable Activity for Volumes The minimum detectable activity MDA for volumes can be computed using the MDA values obtained from the peak fitting programs and then correcting for geometry container attenuation and matrix attenuation The following formula is used to compute the MDA activity of a sample with its activity homogeneously distributed throughout a volume MDA o 3 MDA CF om CF air CF co 115 where MDA MDA of a sample whose activity is homogeneously distributed throughout the sample Bq MDA MDA of point source computed by the peak fitting algorithm Bq 233 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 4 12 U Enrichment Determination Methods in Containers It is difficult to determine the U enrichment in poorly characterized matrices because the primary gamma ray used for the determination of U is highly absorbed It is beneficial to have two methods available using different energy regions with different absorption characteristics Because the 186 keV gamma ray from U is lower energy than the 1001 keV gamma ray from BBU the 186 keV gamma ray is subject to higher attenuation than the 1001 keV gamma ray On the other hand the gamma rays in the 90 to 93 keV region require excellent peak deconvolution Frequently the counting statistics detector resolution and peak fitting ability are not adequate for an accurate determination If the results of the two method
73. e Select the Nuclide IsoActivity and SpcFile fields as shown in Fig 247 e Save the query with a descriptive name such as Isotopic Query Query Wizard Choose Columns What columns of data do you want to include in your query Available tables and columns Columns in your query MSysQueries 4 Nuclide MSysRelationships IsoActivity Nuclides SpcFile Simple results IsotopicResultslD Spectra Preview of data in selected column a ER SENE NEN Figure 247 Select the Fields to Be Used in the Excel Query 2 On the Excel spreadsheet page click the cursor where you want the query data returned 3 Click on DataMmport External Database Import Data 4 Select the name of the query just developed e g Isotopic Query 5 The data should now be transferred to the spreadsheet from the Buf fer mdb database as shown in Fig 248 324 APPENDIX B TRANSFERRING INFORMATION FROM THE ISOTOPIC DATABASE F3 Microsoft Excel Book1 GE File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help Da E GAY 8 o o Qz 0 BZU F228 38 Ca fa a 2d Ca fa 7 V ere A10 z n REN B C 1 Nuclide IsoActivity SpcFile 2 K40 50970 67188 C Documents and Settings Hagenauer 3 Na 22 584 4561157 C Documents and Settings Hagenauer 4 Th 230 3961 056396 C Documents and Settings lHagenauer 5 Th 232 90431 35156 C Documents and Settings Hagenauer 6 U 235 237770 0313 C Documents and Settings Hagenauer 7 U 238 739549
74. eee RII 175 STD WOW RS irte Qu AE ppt ea Uu aaah COE 175 3 11 Right Mouse Button Menu ous ou te RO IR qe Ro bn pude i e 175 SUL IS ASIA ehe L1 Se e EU RD e ee o aa ee at 175 SER BM rti CR 176 Bille 3s GT CU s 176 SLE d Copy TO BIEL Lies a A Ue pelos Gri M dett d pesi 176 Dobis OO IE Itin usse dur e duds ice UE a Pen NA DR RE DA 176 SOL AN A T ESCUR A Na 176 SUITS Undo Zoom M tas dls E Eh d UE x las RETE 176 d ls o Mark RA Ei EFE deb ree ELS ROLE dod 176 SL Clear ROLL estes erbe eer ale doe eeu e esL abuse bo 176 3 1110 Peak IBEO sorreta er AA AE Cer E RI dO SD Et ERR RE 177 3 11 11 Input Count Rates cos a PEDI TS E RAE 177 ARIAS IA dea eant A oae aon hid aca es ded iade pe rd oon 177 31113 MCB Properties oat a Peden Eod Rc sme we e dedos 177 4 ANALYSIS METHODS 22 6 dde EA AS BAG cu ee d reg AES 179 4 T Calculation Details Tor Peaks eid Pte ii a ee pP dis 179 4 1 1 Background Calculation Methods 0 0c cee eee eens 179 dbi Automate sa daa a 179 IN A E O s 181 4 1 1 3 3 Point vet OS wade ene o RUNE venous Eben Meda 181 4 1 1 4 l Point 4e eectbX ak ehon ee ke Kec A aw on 181 4 1 1 5 Example Background a oe a Oye bee a ea gua oa eee ake 182 4 T 2 Peak Area Singlets seh es Aper eee tr he NA A EE REPE 184 4 1 2 1 Total Summation Method leere 184 21 2 2 Directed Pit Method ei rex st ee A obe ex ede 185 4 1 3 Example Peak Area db A et ret sns 186 4 1 3 1 Total Summation Method
75. eee eens 6 1 5 Before Using ISOTOPIC Operator i5 eae cs at ae ee E Oe ae CoG eek 7 1 6 Sample Measurement Files and Filename Conventions o ooooccoccocoooo oo 7 1 6 1 Contamer Suttace Modes 5233557 ERI PAX eC REX RENTES iPEES RES 8 16 151 Reanalysis oed soni eeu DER ETE Mens Edeka d Cue EX E Ke 9 1 26 27 SOM Modena oir E REA ah uii b bete shat eet 9 1 62 T RE Anal vols OS Ca DR Eau da qx a ae 9 1 7 Operation Release Notes for Version 4 1 oooo ooooomoomocrmormommo oo 10 1 7 1 Regional Settings we etarra des 10 1 7 2 MCBs with a USB Interface UNKNOWN MODE Error After Power Loss aras estaca ta 10 2 DISPLAY FEATURES 20 30 da A le 13 A A II quiete e Rpm dte wi See Bs 15 Bee TRAS a ee dra etae os aks BES det itum Gee ERS eae a 16 29 Usmo ye MOUSE ae a 18 2 3 1 Moving the Marker with the Mouse i evene eR EC ES E heeded 18 2 3 2 The Right Mouse Button Menu 0 0 cece eee 19 2 3 3 Using the Rubber Rectangle sous UD E ERES CERE 19 2 3 4 Sizing and Moving the Full Spectrum View 0 00 ee eee eee 20 2 4 The ROI Peak and Library Indexing Buttons o ooo ooooooocrnoonoo 21 2 Drap and DEP ou v bae E E e 22 2 0 Associated Files br oh us A io 22 DE LEE 23 3 MENU COMMANDS o var daly Gearon wa wes AS A A ed Nea oy 25 SUL El o ont EE EE EE Ot ornate Ge ETE EE 28 A E E O A E TET 28 3o 27 Recalde e eee aes 29 EM o es O E O O NANO 30 Sh A A tate abuser ie att 30 Du a Rs een end g
76. efficiency calibration are separated to make it easier to do these calibrations If properly chosen sources and libraries are used the calibration process is simple PSpectra saved in the cHN format are compatible with older software however the cHN format does not contain the efficiency calibration data 61 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual quick and accurate You can save the input values so calibrations can easily be repeated with the same source The energy calibration can be changed without affecting the efficiency calibration With the Recall Calibration command the previously calculated efficiency calibration can be inserted into the new calibration data 3 3 1 1 Energy Calibration The energy calibration function calculates two sets of parameters the energy vs channel number and the peak shape or FWHM vs energy The inputs to this function are a spectrum or series of spectra with isolated peaks distributed over the energy range of interest and either a library or table of peak energies The library referred to here is an analysis gamma ray library The creation of a table of peak energies is described in this section The formula for energy vs channel number is E 4 4 a C 13 where E energy a coefficients Cx channel number The formula for FWHM vs channels is F b b C b C 14 where F FWHM b coefficients C channel number To calculate the FWHM in energy use
77. energy E d fitting coefficients E energy in MeV 67 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 3 3 2 Calibration Wizard The ISOTOPIC calibration wizard automates the complete calibration process including spectrum acquisition The calibration can be performed on the data in an MCB or in a buffer window using spectra on disk At the end of the calibration the complete results are presented for review During the review any or all of the calibration steps can be repeated with any changes necessary to improve the calibration Before starting the Calibration Wizard you will need a library containing entries for the peaks of interest If efficiency calibrating you will need a calibration source library and the corresponding source certificate You can use the same source and library for both calibrations or separate sources and libraries for each step REMINDER Before your operators recall and reanalyze scan data sets be sure the system is efficiency calibrated or the reanalysis results will show zero activity Figure 37 shows the first calibra Calibration Wizard tion wizard screen The options for each type of calibration are to Keep Current Create New Please select the types of calibration to perform or Read From File Energy Calibration Keep Current Create New Read From File Keep Current This means to continue using Efficiency Calibration Keep Curent Create New C Read From File t
78. for the dead time losses real time only Unfortunately in the analysis of the ZDT spectrum the uncertainty of the measurement cannot be determined using either spectrum NOTE This mode is not useful for quantitative analysis if the counting rate varies significantly during the measurement time particularly if the user desires an accurate counting rate and standard deviation calculation When you select the NORM_CORR mode ISOTOPIC ignores the ZDT spectrum and analyzes the LTC spectrum as it would for the Off ZDT mode CORR_ERR ZDT and Error Spectra Stored In the CORR_ERR mode the estimation of the statistical uncertainty is stored in place of the LTC spectrum and is referred to as the error spectrum ERR In this mode the ZDT spectrum is used to measure the counts in a peak and the error spectrum is used to determine the uncertainty of the measurement made in the corrected spectrum 55 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 56 For example if the area of a peak is measured in the corrected spectrum by summing channels 1000 to 1100 the variance of the measurement can be determined by summing the counts in channels 1000 to 1100 in the error spectrum Or shown another way the counts in channel i can be expressed as N i y V i with a 1 sigma confidence limit where N is the corrected spectral data and V is the variance error spectral data The live time is set to the real time within the analysis engine d
79. format and spectrum size of each file without having to open it Spectra up Figure 15 Recall a Spectrum File to 32K or 32768 channels can be recalled and analyzed If the maximum eight buffer windows are currently open ISOTOPIC attempts to close the oldest buffer Answering No cancels the recall operation and the oldest buffer remains onscreen Answering Yes closes the oldest buf fer and opens a new buffer containing the recalled file If the oldest buffer contains data that have not been saved a warning dialog first asks if the data should be saved Click on Yes to save and No to close without saving When the spectrum is successfully recalled ISOTOPIC loads its descriptors start time live time real time Detector 29 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual and sample descriptions and calibration information 1f any and displays the filename and sample description on the Title Bar of the buffer window For spectrum files containing multiple spectra such as ZDT mode spectra in DSPEC series instruments both spectra are automatically recalled 3 1 3 Save As This command opens a standard file save dialog Fig 16 so the current spectrum can be saved to disk Enter any valid filename consisting of an optional drive and directory a filename and an optional extension in the File name field and click on Save The recom mended and default extension are shown in the Save Spectrum File Save in
80. from a cLB file The later dialogs will ask for the filename for each calibration separately so each calibration can be from a different CLB file When you have made your selections click on Next to go to the next wizard screen which will depend on the selections made on this first screen NOTE Because the Calibration Wizard s flexibility the following sections of the manual discuss each of the wizard capabilities rather than following the wizard from start to finish For a demonstration of the Calibration Wizard start to finish work flow see the example in the Getting Started guide It steps through the process of creating a new energy and efficiency calibration including the use of the Certificate File Editor 3 3 2 1 Energy Calibration Create New If you chose to perform a new energy calibration the dialog shown in Fig 38 will open Click on Browse to find the correct Library file To view or change the contents of the library click on the adjacent Edit button This will open the ISOTOPIC Library Editor which is discussed in Section 3 6 3 page 155 When finished click on Next Enter the Source Label The description you enter here will be used immediately before acquisition to tell you which source to put on the detector When performing this calibration on an MCB enter the live time preset Count Time in seconds To collect a new spectrum mark the Clear Data Before Start checkbox If a spectrum is already in the MCB
81. from all corrections are explained in the Analysis Methods chapter of the Supervisor Manual If you wish to decay correct the concentrations of the nuclides to a specific date mark the Decay Date checkbox and enter the date in the format displayed below the date field This date format is determined by the current Windows date format setting Enter the Analysis Range in channels This is usually used to eliminate analysis of the ends of the spectrum that do not contain useful data The Analysis Range should be as wide as possible because the automatic energy recalibration feature see the Supervisor Manual requires separated library peaks to work properly Also the correlation of lines from a single nuclide done by the analysis is defeated if the energy range analyzed does not include all the lines The Activity and Quantity Units section determines how activity is reported All Container Shapes Except Surface Disk and Point Source Choose the appropriate Base Activity Units either becquerels per kilogram Bq Kg or microcuries per kilogram wCi Kg Next use the Activity and Quantity fields as follows to determine whether ISOTOPIC reports the total activity for a measured item or the item s activity per unit measure To report total activity enter only the Activity field and leave the Quantity field blank do not enter zero or any blank spaces To report activity per unit measure enter both fields 109 ISO
82. from any file containing Minin the correct records This includes CLB spc and analysis uFo files Maxim Close Alt F4 The complete calibration or just the energy or efficiency calibration can a be recalled the Recall Energy Calibration and Recall Efficiency Figure 65 Calibration checkboxes at the bottom of the dialog indicate which parts Efficiency Table of the calibration will be retrieved The original calibration is retained for Control Menu the parts not retrieved In all cases even with no box checked the calibration description is retrieved To change the calibration stored in a Recall Calibration File spectrum file recall the spectrum file Look in E User E its calibration is automatically loaded recall the desired calibration and store the spectrum back to disk Alpha la 28ntype clb Cst laa AMCO CIb Mga lan Beckerl clb pins laa Dspec clb Tmpl E160 clb a Ibottie cib laa E160ss clb 3 3 5 Save Calibration Save Calibration opens a standard aa Gmxendcp clb la N11089a c a GvDemo Clb laa N30201 cl laa iaea Clb lan N icalb c iaea1 Clb a nai clb laa M1679p70 clb a Pt clb laa Mmebdemo clb a Qed clb n file save dialog that allows you to File pame 4275calspc save the current working calibration Files of type RAS to disk in the cLB format Both the se Cancel Recall Energy Calibration V JV Recall Efficiency Calibratio
83. from the right mouse button menu or Options Graph 309 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 7 1 4 9 Peak Info This command opens a Peak Info box Fig 241 for the selected peak and leaves the box open until you click inside it This command works for peaks loaded from a UFO file and ROIs created within GVPlot or loaded from an rRot file The contents of the Peak Info box are described in Section 3 4 2 You can simultaneously display multiple Peak Info boxes as long as they do not overlap opening a new Peak Info box closes any overlapping boxes For very narrow N N N N N N N N i les N P Y EN b y TESEI TER AO AO TETAS AO ean A 4 aaa Peak 5536 67 898 07 keV peaks you might find it useful to position the marker FYWHM 1 57 FW 1 5 M 2 36 with the left right arrow keys before calling the Peak Library Y 88 at 898 02 2011 710 Bq Gross Area 233675 Info command When the marker is on a peak the NetArea 212276 505 right side of the Marker Information Line will display Gross Net Count Rate 64 91 58 97 cps a Peak Area readout Figure 241 The Peak Info Window for an 7 1 4 10 Show Hover Window ROE When you select this command a checkmark is displayed by this menu item to indicate that it is in hover window mode In this mode the Peak Info window opens when the mouse pointer is paused over a peak for approximately 1 second and closes when the pointer is moved away
84. if the peak is not well formed no ROI is marked There is no limit on the size of a peak or ROI therefore in some uncalibrated spectra large ROIs could be marked These accelerators duplicate the function of the Mark ROI Toolbar button and the ROI Mark Peak menu selection see Section 3 8 NOTE lt Insert gt and Keypad lt Ins gt work conveniently in combination with Ctrl gt and Ctrl to rapidly set peak ROIs 6 2 8 Clear ROI Delete or Keypad lt Del gt Delete and Keypad lt Del gt clear the ROI bits of all ROI channels contiguous to the channel containing the marker These accelerators duplicate the function of the Clear ROI button on the Toolbar and the ROI Clear menu selection see Section 3 8 6 2 9 Taller Shorter 1 1 When not in rubber rectangle mode the 1 and 1 keys decrease or increase the vertical full scale of the displayed spectrum so the peaks appear taller or shorter respectively The minimum is 16 counts full scale the maximum is 1024 million counts Each successive key press doubles or halves the full scale until the maximum or minimum is reached Whenever the maximum full scale value is reached the next 1 key press switches to logarithmic scale If the display is already in logarithmic scale the display switches to linear scale In either case the vertical full scale value is always shown on the Toolbar Note that if the number of counts exceeds the full scale value th
85. il the control menu Fig 61 Select Edit File Open the ent file to be edited it will be displayed as shown in Fig 62 Change energy values as needed and click on Save or click on Cancel to retain the original values Figure 60 Save Energy Calibration Table 89 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Move Editing C user GvDemo Ent i 2 x X Close Alt F4 v Graph v Table Restore Clear table Destroy Edit File Figure 61 Calibration Sidebar Control Menu Figure 62 The Energy Calibration File ENT 3 3 3 3 Easy Recalibration Using An ENT Table Using the table can speed up the calibration Recall Energy Table File HE process as follows For an uncalibrated Lookin Ga User amp e Ea spectrum enter one or two energies to T 0CM1673 Ent establish a basic calibration Next click Sea ae on the Recall button on the Energy EX Z test Ent Calibration Sidebar to open a standard ae file recall dialog Fig 63 Choose the ENT file to be used When the table is selected the peak at each energy in the list will be evaluated for centroid energy and A FWHM and added to the tables When all Figure 63 Recall Energy Calibration Table the peaks have been done the new fit and table will be displayed 3 3 3 4 Speeding Up Calibration with a Library A library can be used to speed up the calibration process as follows B
86. in Container Mode For soil mode the letter should always be F because there is no provision for changing the MDA method in Soil Mode configurations PBCTEST PBC PBC F off and filename The switch to turn on the PBC correction and the filename to use If the PBC is off in the spectrum then these values are used d a27 MPCTABLE MPC MPC F off and filename The switch to turn on the MPC or DAC calculation and the table filename to use The B30WIN TxT file has the labels for the output data The table used can be either MPC or DAC depending on the values in the table T do directed fit The switch to turn on the directed fit T Halt WAN32 on error This switch halts ISOWAN32 when an error occurs If this is false ISOWANJ32 exits in all cases and the error reporting is sent to ISOTOPIC If true ISOWAN32 displays a dialog indicating an error and must be closed before another analysis can be performed T keep small bad peaks The switch to keep or reject small peaks with bad peak shape This should be set to true to report peaks in low background systems with few counts Derived peak area char The character used to mark the peaks where area is derived from other peaks in library based peak stripping 318 APPENDIX A STARTUP AND ANALYSIS SETUP F Print discarded peak table If T this prints the discarded peaks table and the associated flags 12 Half lives decay cutoff The cutoff for the decay limit for the report The previous value w
87. is no need to save it again Click on No and continue through the wizard NOTE If at the end of acquisition not enough counts have accumulated for a good energy calibration you can acquire additional data by moving Back through the wizard to this screen increasing the Count Time and unmarking the Clear Data Before Start box then starting the additional acquisition If the efficiency calibration process detects a severe error an error message will be displayed Click on OK to continue the calibration process Several types of errors could be incurred depending on the state of the spectrum The peaks too close together error can be ignored When spectrum collection is complete or the buffer is used the efficiency calibration will be performed If successful the wizard will go to the Finish Calibration Wizard screen Fig 49 where you will have the opportunity to review and if necessary edit the resulting energy calibration by clicking on the Edit Efficiency button see Section 3 3 2 2 Read From File Efficiency If Read From File was selected Efficiency Calibration File L 1x for the efficiency calibration the dialog shown in Fig 48 opens Enter the name of the file in which the desired efficiency calibration is stored The calibration Description stored in the file is displayed read only so the correct file is easily Description fT LITER BOTTLE GEOMETRY seen and thereby reduce errors Any type of fi
88. it position the mouse pointer in the spectrum display click the right mouse button then use the left mouse button to select from its list of commands 3 11 1 Start This starts data collection in the selected Detector as described in Section 3 2 1 175 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 3 11 2 Stop Start Stop Stop terminates data collection in the selected Detector see Section 3 2 2 Clear Copy to Buffer 3 11 3 Clear Zoom In Zoom Out Clear erases the Detector spectral data and the descriptors e g real time Undo Zoom In live time start time for the selected Detector The presets are not altered Mark ROI See Section 3 2 3 Clear ROI Peak Info 3 11 4 Copy to Buffer Input Count Rate Sum The Copy to Buffer function transfers the data and descriptors e g live l MCB Properti time real time from the selected Detector to the buffer see Section 3 2 4 tata Figure 163 Right Mouse Button 3 11 5 Zoom In Menu Zoom In adjusts the horizontal and vertical scales in the Expanded Spectrum View to view a smaller portion of the spectrum as described in Section 3 9 4 3 11 6 Zoom Out Zoom Out adjusts the horizontal and vertical scales in the Expanded Spectrum View to view a larger portion of the spectrum as described in Section 3 9 5 3 11 7 Undo Zoom In This will undo or reverse the last Zoom In operation done with the rubber rectangle It restores the display to the horizontal and
89. it will be used if you do not mark the Clear box The counting time must be long enough to accumulate well formed peaks with low counting uncertainty 69 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual If the FWHM calibration fails one of the internal validity tests a message will be displayed Click on OK to acknowledge the message and the calibration process will continue Remember to check the FWHM at the end of the process by clicking on Edit Energy on the review page see Fig 49 Click on Next to begin the energy calibration Performing the New Energy Calibration The dialog shown in Fig 39 will direct you to position the calibration source and click on OK to begin spectrum acquisition If the currently active window 1s an MCB and you marked the Clear Data box acquisition will begin and will run until the preset is met When acquisition is com plete a message box will notify you and ask if you wish to save the spectrum file If you answer Yes a file save dialog will open so you can assign a location and filename Energy Calibration Wizard 2I x Please enter the following information for the energy calibration Library C User teccal mdb Browse Edit Source Label 1830 Count Time 3500 00 Seconds tea tu Figure 38 Choose Library and Source Name for Energy Calibration Energy Calibration x i Place the 1830 Mixed gamma in the calibration pos
90. its constituents Select percent by weight or by number of atoms IF this is a mixture whose chemical Formula is not known select percent by weight C Percent by Weight Cancel lt Back Next gt Figure 104 Choose How Relative Amount Is Determined The Relative Amounts screen Fig 105 will open next This dialog is used to add materials or elements from the database Master List column to the Composition of New Material column If a chemical formula was entered previously the elements and number are already entered To add an element or material from the Master List click on the element enter the Number of Atoms and click on Add To remove an element from the new material click on the element in the Composition column and click on Remove To change the number of atoms remove the element then add it back entering the correct number of atoms in the dialog When the composition of the new material is correct click on Finish 137 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Attenuation Coefficient Wizard Relative amounts To create the coefficients For a new material Add the elements that make up the new material and enter the relative amount for each element Master List Composition of New Material Cancel lt Back Finish Figure 105 Define Composition of New Material The main Attenuation Materials dialog Fig 94 will reopen displaying the new coefficients To accept these values and return
91. measurement Figure 192 Begin Count for Background QA QA Acceptance Threshold Has Been Violated El Eg m Violation Total Background Minimum Maximum 5 000 174 40 50 00 Status r Recommendation Correct conditions contributing to the excursion of this parameter and or obtain supervisor assistance in establishing new threshold value s NOTE that any further data acquisition may be inhibited on this detector until this violation has been eliminated Figure 193 Background Warning Message Sample QA Measurment 21x Sample Type Qa47321 sdf This is GA for the 473214 11 sample Cancel Overwrite repeat previous sample measurement I NOTE Ensure that the correct sample is properly mounted at the Detector and press OK Start to continue Figure 194 Starting Sample Type QA Measurement 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 5 2 4 Status The QA status for the currently selected Detector is displayed as shown in Fig 195 Click on OK to close the dialog QA Status for this Detector i21 x Measurements Recorded for this Detector Background only 1 Total Sample type and Background 3 r Minimum Low 34 Latest Measurement High r Maximum Total Background 5 000 Po LOW 50 00 100 00 Total Activity Bq 0 Peak Shift keV 0 50000 0 25000 o k 0 25000 0 50000 Ay FWHM Ratios 224240 0 90000 1 00000 o k
92. menu Fig 55 contains the Move Close Graph Table Restore and Destroy functions Close saves the efficiency and exits the efficiency calibration function Graph and Table are display hide toggles Use Restore to ignore all calibration inputs made during this calibration session and Destroy to clear the current working calibration and table of values The Efficiency Graph Control Menu Figure 56 shows the control menu for the graph of efficiency vs energy It contains selections to turn a Grid on off and to switch from Log Log to Linear axes The graph can also be Closed removed If closed it can be redisplayed with the Graph command from the Efficiency Calibration Sidebar s control menu The Efficiency Table Control Menu Figure 65 shows the control menu for the table of efficiency vs energy It contains commands to Print and Close the table If closed it can be redisplayed with the Table selection from the Efficiency Calibration Sidebar s control menu Other Efficiency Sidebar Control Menu Functions In addition to Edit File the Efficiency Calibration Sidebar control menu Fig 55 contains the Move Close Graph Table Restore and Destroy functions Close saves the efficiency and exits the efficiency calibration function Graph and Table are display hide toggles Use Restore to ignore all calibration inputs made during this calibration session and Destroy to clear the current working calibration and table of val
93. mouse or by using the Alt key plus the key that matches the underlined letter in the menu item name For example the multi key combination to activate the File menu is lt Alt F gt Note that the ISOTOPIC accelerator keys do not interfere with Windows menu operations or task switching For example when a menu is active 1 e pulled down the lt gt lt gt and 1 1 keys revert to their normal Windows functions of moving across the menu bar and scrolling up down within a menu respectively As soon as the menu is closed they behave as ISOTOPIC accelerators again 6 2 Marker and Display Function Keys 6 2 1 Next Channel lt gt gt lt gt When not in rubber rectangle mode the right and left arrow keys move the marker by one displayed pixel in the corresponding direction This can represent a jump of more than one spectral data memory channel especially if the horizontal scale in channels is larger than the width in pixels of the window see the discussion in Section 2 1 289 Key lt l gt or lt E5 gt 1 or F6 lt gt lt gt lt gt or lt F7 gt lt gt or lt F8 gt lt Ctrl gt gt lt Ctrl gt Shift Shift gt lt Alt gt gt Alt gt lt PageUp gt lt PageDown gt lt Home gt lt End gt lt Ctrl Fi gt lt F2 gt lt F3 gt lt Shift F3 gt lt F4 gt or lt Alt 6 gt F5 or 1 F6 or 1 F7 or F8 or lt gt
94. not found a not found message is printed here If the manual library based peak stripping is enabled the two additional library filenames involved are printed here Analysis Parameters Lists analysis related factors including analysis engine and analysis start and stop channels peak rejection cutoff and peak search sensitivity normalization factor user selected MDA random and systematic error fraction limit for nuclide identification and background method and half lives decay limit The peak rejection level is the user entered value for the 1 sigma error cutoff on peak utilization Any peaks with 1 sigma counting error greater than this value are not used in the analysis Library peaks that fail this test are still reported but not used in the analysis Peaks that are not in the library and fail are not reported in the unknown list 280 Header for each page Sample description from file Spectrum filename Data acquisition parameters Calibration information Analysis library Analysis parameters User selected corrections Quality factor Energy recalibration notice 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE G52M2 01 Spectrum name ORTEC gv i 63 PerkinElmer Instruments vaniz ORTEC GrDermo dni Sample description Mixed gamma marinelli on endcap of P40268 Spectrum Filename C 1 User GvDemo dni Acquisition information Start time 06 Jun 1991 18 37 33 Live time 3600 Real time 4220 Dead time 14 69 t
95. peak area table are displayed as illustrated in Fig 125 The table records can be sorted by such parameters as energy area FWHM and background by clicking on the desired column header Analysis Sidebar Figure 126 shows the interactive Analysis Sidebar The buttons move the marker up and down through the results lists library and spectrum simultaneously The buttons in the Library Peak section pertain to the results from the analysis the other buttons pertain to the spectrum The peak found buttons move to the next higher or lower peak in the analysis results list This includes non zero area library and unknown peaks above the cutoff See Peak button below Riedl del The within Nuclide buttons move up and down the library list for the selected nuclide in the order the energies are stored in the library Since the library energies are not usually stored in increasing energy order this will jump the marker around in the spectrum This is useful in deciding if a nuclide is present or not by looking for all the lines associated with the nuclide Only non zero area peaks are displayed 151 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Isotopic Supervisor Isotopic Mode BEI Es File Acquire Calibrate Calculate Analyze Library Services ROI Display Window Sal Sla 144 tes A ED AJga Bu z Analysis Results Table i x ee at 3 36 Energy wm Aes Backgowd Nucide Bq ETT 2 1069 98 1 66 E 18820
96. portion of the spectrum This command is duplicated by the Zoom Out button on the Toolbar 7 1 4 4 Undo Zoom In This will undo or reverse the last Zoom In operation done with the rubber rectangle It restores the display to the horizontal and vertical expansion before the Zoom In It is not the same as Zoom Out 7 1 4 5 Full View Full View adjusts the horizontal and vertical scaling to display the entire spectrum in the Expanded Spectrum View 7 1 4 6 Mark ROI This allows you to mark a peak as an ROI by clicking and dragging the rubber rectangle across a portion of the spectrum then selecting Mark ROI If Show ROI Bars is on see Section 7 1 4 8 the new ROI will be marked with the active ROI Bars until you either move to or create another ROI Use the Modify Active ROI command on the ROI menu Section 7 1 3 4 to widen the ROI boundaries or click and drag the ROI bars to increase or decrease the number of channels in the ROI 7 1 4 7 Clear Active ROI This clears the ROI bits in all ROI channels that adjoin the channel containing the marker This is the same as the Clear command on the ROI menu Section 7 1 3 4 308 7 UTILITIES 7 1 4 8 Show ROI Bars These are vertical markers that indicate the lower and upper active boundaries of each ROI in the spectrum The ROI bars for an y y inactive unselected ROI have solid fill when you click on an ROI to activate 1t only one is active at a time the bars for the active RO
97. sigma level The uncertainty estimate for a uniformly distributed error is used at the full range If a correction factor is not used the uncertainty estimate is zero for that component 4 7 2 Counting Uncertainty Estimate This is discussed in Section 4 1 4 4 7 3 Additional Normally Distributed Uncertainty Estimate Input is obtained from user input 2 Input rags pees 58 nor 1 00 where o variance of additional normally distributed uncertainty 1 sigma Input user input for normally distributed uncertainty 1 sigma 4 7 4 Random Summing Uncertainty Estimate O 2 EF 1 59 rsum 1 00 where O variance of random summing error estimate CF random summing correction factor 211 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 4 7 5 Absorption Uncertainty Estimate CF 1 Gi E z 60 100 where oas variance of attenuation error estimate CF absorption correction factor 4 7 6 Nuclide Uncertainty Uncertainty Estimate 2 Input al E 5 61 nuc 200 where o z variance of nuclide error estimate Input user uncertainty input for nuclide 2 sigma This is the uncertainty in the yield for the first gamma ray in the library for each nuclide 4 7 7 Efficiency Uncertainty Estimate The efficiency uncertainty is computed differently depending on the type of fit used for the efficiency calculation The components used for efficiency include the errors due t
98. submenu which contains the Display Analysis Results supervisor s two spectrum analysis tools Note that scan data Interactive In Viewed Area including archived data records can only be reanalyzed in Figure 118 Diagnosis ISOTOPIC Operator Submenu 3 5 7 1 Display Analysis Results This command displays the results of Recall Analysis Results File KE an analysis of the complete spectrum by Look in reading the analysis results stored in a i UFO file the uFo file selection dialog Tas B is shown in Fig 119 This differs from a An18282 UFO a Qa3b1 ufo the interactive analysis results in that the B ea rd jd analysis considers all of the spectrum and all of the library entries The uFo 8 Lizspe1 UFO js SvDemo3 UFO files are created by the analysis routine UU a in ISOTOPIC Operator Fies of ype Ufo Fies z Cancel Figure 119 Open a UFO File Figure 120 shows the display for a typical UFO file along with its spectrum file 146 3 MENU COMMANDS Isotopic Supervisor Isotopic Mode BEI Eg File Acquire Calibrate Calculate Analyze Library Services ROI Display Window cg esa x os a ED ALO e y Analysis Results Table bees Ada at 3 36 treo mm treo began uc 8 iub FREER CEST EM 1103 80 733 lt Unknown gt Show Residuals a TENE 2 Bi 214 0 0000 Real 31 113 62 lt Unknown gt yr Live 30 000 00 lt Unknown gt D Unknown Nuclide Dead 358 Unknown
99. the area not associated with the actual peak in the region of the peak the uncertainty due to the background is more accurately calculated In the case of a multiplet the sum of the reported backgrounds and net peak areas will be more than the sum of the gross spectrum for the same region because the background and some if not all of the net peak counts will be counted more than once so cc Multiplet Region of Deconvolution Background Region for Lower Peak 3 FWHM FWHM 2840 2680 2700 CHANNEL NUMBER Figure 179 Background for Multiplet Components The energy recalibration affects the multiplets in two ways For inclusion in the list of deconvolution candidates the first peak for this nuclide must be present If the first peak has not been found because it failed the centroid test see above then subsequent peaks are not used The deconvolution will then be performed with fewer candidates Secondly the library energies are used to define the location of the multiplet component library peaks The peak finder energies are derived from the channel number so although the reported energy may change the position relative to the actual data does not change A mismatch of these will result in an inaccurate fit and a different fit when the peak channels are shifted relative to the spectrum 200 4 ANALYSIS METHODS 4 3 Fraction Limit This is used in Soil Mode analyses only To verify the identi
100. the computer is disconnected The spectrum can then be viewed as the active spectrum in the digiDART The active spectrum is the spectrum where the new data are collected The current active spectrum is lost The lower left of the tab shows the total number of spectra not counting Amplifier Amplfier2 ADC Stabilizer HighVoltage the active spectrum stored in the Field Data About Status Presets MDA Preset Nuclide Report digiDART memory The spectrum ID Move Spectra of the active spectrum is shown in the FR lower right The stored spectra cannot s be viewed or stored in the computer Move until they are moved to the active spectrum position To move a spectrum from the stored 9 Stored Spectra 123657 memory to the active memory enter the spectrum number and click on Move Use the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through the list of spectra The label on the lower right does not update until a spectrum is moved The numbers are the same as the numbers on the digiDART display This only moves the spectrum to active memory To save the spectrum on the PC disk use the File Save commands Figure 27 The digiDART Field Data Tab The Acquire Download Spectra can also be used to download all the stored spectra and save on disk automatically They can then be viewed in the Buffer 42 About This tab Fig 28 displays hardware and firmware information about the currently selected
101. the horizontal scale The lt F7 gt lt F8 gt and keyboard lt gt lt gt keys change the horizontal scale by a factor of two without changing the vertical scale The Alt F7 key combination displays the whole spectrum in the expanded view Depending on the expansion or overall size of the spectrum all or part of the selected spectrum can be shown in the expanded view Therefore the number of channels might be larger than the horizontal size of the window as measured in pixels In this case where the number of channels shown exceeds the window size all of the channels cannot be represented by exactly one pixel dot Instead the channels are grouped together and the vertical displacement corresponding to the maximum channel in each group is displayed This maintains a meaningful representation of the relative peak heights in the spectrum For a more precise representation of the peak shapes displaying all available data 1 e where each pixel corresponds to exactly one channel the scale should be expanded until the number of channels is less than or equal to the size of the window Note that the marker can be moved by no less than one pixel or one channel whichever is greater at a time In the scenario described above where there are many more memory channels being represented on the display than there are pixels horizontally in the window the marker will move by more than one memory channel at a time even with the smallest possi
102. the program on the first pass through the spectrum The 1 sigma counting uncertainty in the peak net area as a fraction The activity for this nuclide based on this peak only It is zero for unknown peaks or if there is no efficiency calibration The minimum detectable activity for this nuclide in Bq based on this peak only It is zero for unknown peaks or if there is no efficiency calibration The peak flags described in the File Structure Manual as hexadecimal numbers The number of channels used in the calculation of the background below and above the peak If the background selection is set to a given number then these will both be the same For auto background these can be different 3 MENU COMMANDS BackLo Hi The calculated background values used to calculate the background SlopeAbove The slope of the background above the peak qfParaBack The parabolic factors for calculating the background If the parabolic background has not been used these are 0 irpNuclide The pointers to other records in the uFo file as described in the File Structure Manual They are only used in debugging 3 5 7 2 Interactive in Viewed Area This selection starts an interactive analysis session by analyzing the spectrum now displayed The working library selected with Library Select File is used The analysis parameters have been set in the Settings Configuration dialogs When the analysis is complete the graphical results and
103. the quadratic fit because of the efficiency knee The efficiency energy formula is ec pire RC 16 where efficiency at energy E a fitting coefficients E energy 66 3 MENU COMMANDS Quadratic Fit The quadratic fit fits a quadratic function to the log energy vs log efficiency curve At least three data points above the knee and two below the knee are required for this fit With only three points the fit will be reported as exact for all data points but the calibration could be inaccurate elsewhere If the input points are not well separated the best fit to the data points might not be an accurate representation of the efficiency outside the fitted region The efficiency energy formula is ad p a a5 In E az In E 17 where efficiency at energy E a fitting coefficients E energy Polynomial Fit The polynomial fit uses a 6 term polynomial to fit the natural logarithm of efficiency to the energy The function is optimized for p type detectors For n type detectors the low energy region below 60 keV is not well modeled by this function At least five well separated peaks are needed for the polynomial fit The knee value is not used in this fit and the function is grayed The polynomial option is only on the Above knee list the Below knee option is not used if polynomial fit is selected The polynomial efficiency energy formula is 6 dE ue 18 e e i l where e efficiency at
104. to the Detectors page If you calculated the standoff the new value will be displayed in the Detector Standoff to Collimator Front field Click on Next to go to the Finished page Fig 83 3 5 2 5 Final Page This page Fig 83 gives you the opportunity to go Back and review the settings for this configuration before finishing the wizard and returning to the Supervisor program Isotopic Settings Finished Cortainer Wall Thickness If you would like to review or edit your entries click Back To exit this wizard without saving your changes click Cancel Otherwise click Finished Cancel lt Back Finish Figure 83 Final Page 3 5 3 Soil Mode Configurations This opens the Soil Gamma Analysis Parameter Setup dialog for Soil Mode Fig 84 To create a Container Surface Mode configuration see Section 3 5 2 117 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Use this dialog to specify the detector calibrations data acquisition analysis and reporting settings for soil monitoring Typically you will save this suite of analysis parameters so it can be retrieved for reuse with the dialog s File Recall command Section 3 5 3 5 The parameter set is saved in a file with the extension M1 The current settings are retained for use in the analysis but are not saved if there is no filename in the Soil Setup File field However the settings are stored in the analysis database as part of the scan data s
105. to their original function of moving the marker through the spectrum You can also adjust the size of the ROI by clicking and dragging the ROI bars Clear This clears the ROI bits in all ROI channels that adjoin the channel containing the marker This is duplicated by the Clear Active ROI command on the right mouse button menu 306 7 UTILITIES Clear All This resets all the ROI bits in the spectrum removing all ROI markings from the spectrum Save File This command allows you to save to disk a table of the channel numbers for the current spectrum that have the ROI bit set The contents of the spectrum are not changed A standard Windows file save dialog opens allowing you to create a filename or overwrite an existing ROI file Recall File Recall File sets the ROIs in the spectrum according to the table in the disk file created by ROU Save File This command opens a standard file open dialog prompting you to select a filename When you select a file the ROIs in the currently displayed spectrum are set to conform to the table in the file The previous ROIs are cleared The spectrum data are not altered by this operation only the ROI bits In ror files the ROIs are saved by channel number Therefore if the spectrum peaks have shifted in position the ROIs in the file will not correspond exactly to the spectrum data 7 1 4 Right Mouse Button Menu Commands Figure 238 shows the right mouse button
106. tos A 9 e u Buffer a Pulse Ht Analysis Buffer Hatbox Spc hatbox Buf00285 Start 12 00 00 PM Create Background Files 3 21 1333 Real 1 824 00 Remove all sources verify parameters and select OK to begin data Live 1 800 00 collection i Dead 1 32 Analysis Library C User Test Files Uranium lib ire SS al Ll Real Time Preset Seconds Del Live Time Preset Seconds Peak r XJ vo at tart 7 Save Spectrum on Completion IV til Library OK Cancel ORTEC 9 40 16 4M Tue 7 31 2007 ROI Figure 107 Creating a PBC File from an Archived Spectrum File e Mark the Save Spectrum on Completion checkbox to save the spectrum after the analysis and click on OK e ISOTOPIC will analyze the spectrum file create an analysis An1 file and a PBc file and display the dialog shown in Fig 108 139 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Isotopic40 All Background files have been created Figure 108 PBC Process Complete e The psc filename is structured as follows PBC Iso nnnnn Detector Name date where Iso identifies these as files generated in ISOTOPIC nnnnn is a numerical suffix reflecting the number of PBC acquisitions performed to date with the corresponding detector for the current database Detector name is the name on the detector droplist in the configuration dialogs and date is formatted according to the settings in Windows Control Pa
107. us define a parameter y as y In e This yields y Xor k Lasa 66 213 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual The fitted efficiency at any point x as defined in Eqs 64 and 65 above is y x M arx k 5m 67 Matrix Solution Equation 67 above is Eq 7 12 in Bevington except that the function f x has been replaced by x a particular type of polynomial JA 68 where x and n are defined in Eqs 64 and 65 From Eq 7 14 in Bevington the D matrix is calculated using Eq 68 above B E s MINA TEN 69 where o and N are defined in Eq y is defined in Eq 67 and x is defined in Eqs 64 and 65 From Eq 7 15 in Bevington the a matrix is calculated by Ok 2 loj k x 9 SN 70 where for a linear quadratic fit n n l k k and for a polynomial fit n 2 n k 2 k The o factor is the fractional uncertainty at the i calibration point o is not the absolute uncertainty because the actual curve being fitted is not the efficiencies themselves but the natural log of the curve SBevington Philip R and D K Robinson Data Reduction and Error Analysis for the Physical Sciences 2nd ed McGraw Hill 1992 214 4 ANALYSIS METHODS Matrix Inversion From Eq 7 20 in Bevington the n fitting parameter in our Eq 66 or Eq 63 can be calculated as a Y By Sine k 1 m 71 where is the inverse matrix of a 07 72 The 6 matrix is called the er
108. v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Channel number Intercept Gain pulse height 7 where Intercept The channel number of the zero height input pulse Gain The relation between pulse height and channel number slope of the curve Changes in either the intercept or gain can affect the positions of all the peaks in the spectrum When used with the zero stabilizer both the zero intercept and the gain slope will be monitored to keep all the peaks in the spectrum stabilized The zero stabilization and gain stabilization are separate functions in the MCB but both will affect the position of the peaks in the spectrum The stabilization operates by keeping a peak centered in the defined ROI The ROI should be made symmetrically about the center of a peak with reasonably good count rate in the higher channels of the spectrum The ROI should be about twice the FWHM of the peak If the region is too large counts not in the peak will have an effect on the stabilization The ROI can be cleared after the Peak command so that peak count preset can be used on another peak The coarse and fine gains should be set to the desired values both stabilizers initialized and the pole zero triggered before setting either stabilization peak For example on the 92X this is done with the Acquire MCB Properties dialog on the Model 919 it is done externally The Initialize dialog button sets the gain on the stabilization amplifier to its midpoint
109. weighting factors and summed is equal to the net spectrum For ISOENV32 the peak centroids are allowed to vary in the fitting The peak positions for all peaks are allowed to shift in the fitting process to obtain a reduced chi square The maximum number of channels to shift is set in B3OWINDS INI The weighting factors are determined by solving the matrix equation The final result that is the area of the individual components of the multiplet is the corresponding weighting factors times the unit height area of the peaks at their respective positions If any of the weighting factors and therefore the peak areas are negative or zero as a result of the deconvolution that peak candidate is deleted from the list and the remaining candidates are re fit Peak areas for deleted peaks are set to zero The fitting process is repeated until no peak areas are negative or there is only one peak remaining If there is only one peak remaining the 199 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual peak parameters for this peak are recalculated as if this peak were a singlet The peak shape parameters and energy are set to the calculated peak parameters The background reported for each component peak in a multiplet is the gross area for three times the FWHM centered at the peak centroid minus the component peak area Fig 179 This means that for each peak the areas of the other peaks in the multiplet are treated as background By including all
110. which are set with the Options Graph command These settings will also be used when you print the plot There are some differences between screen and printer fonts and colors If you do not have a color printer the screen colors will be rendered in grayscale Once you have opened a spectrum file Recall ROIs allows you to import the ROIs from an ROIT file You can also open the corresponding analysis results uro file with Recall UFO File 302 7 UTILITIES Recall a spectrum file for plotting Look in 3 User Mantle1 spc N71back spc P5041901 spe Mcbdemo spc N71calb spc ix pa234m16 Spe in Test2 spc Mk40 spe tte nail 0030 Spc ih Qcd1 omy spe in Test2job s Mna22 spc iu nail0031 Spe ber Qcd1gmy1 spe tye uran 6h sf N11089ac spe th P10633ab spe ih Ocd1 may spe N30201b spe bye p20666ac spc iu Test spc jen Fe File name N 71calb spc Files of type sec Format Spectra ad Cancel M Show Description Integer SPC Format 16384 Channels Gamma calibration source on endcap Figure 230 The Recall Spectrum File for Plotting Dialog Once you have used Options Graph to choose graph colors symbols and axis parameters you can save these settings in an ASCII text file with the Save Settings As command which opens a standard Windows file open dialog The Recall Settings command allows you to recall a particular settings file so you can quickly and reproducibly adjust the appearance of the spec
111. will not correspond exactly to the spectrum data For library files the ROIs are generated using the library energies and the energy and FWHM calibrations Y User El e le 8 Save in C Tmpl sa N11089ag roi citj C waterford la N30201b roi Cxt a Blank roi la Stabs roi J Mga a loax roi ja Test roi pins aa Mmebdem1 roi a Testes roi Sex sa Mmcbdemo roi Save as type Roi Files B Cancel Look in Y User J E e B E Tmpl laa N11089ag roi cit C waterford a N30201b roi Cxt las Blank roi laa Stabs roi Mga loax roi ai Test roi pins ai Mmcbdeml roi laa Testxxxx rol Scx E Mmcbdemo roi File name Mmcbdemo roi Files of type ROI Channels hd Cancel Figure 154 Save ROI File Dialog Figure 155 ROI File Recall Dialog 3 9 Display The commands on the Display menu Fig 156 control the color fill and scaling in the spectrum windows These functions are duplicated by indicated hot keys as well as commands on the toolbar and right mouse button menu see Section 3 11 3 9 1 Logarithmic Logarithmic toggles the vertical scale of the Expanded Spectrum View between the logarithmic and linear modes This function is duplicated by Keypad lt gt and the Log Linear Display button on the Toolbar v Logarithmic Keypad Automatic Keypad Baseline Zoom Zoom In Keypad Zoom Out Keypad Center Keypad 5 Full view Al
112. within 200 mV of 24 V since the last time the SOH was cleared Temperature State of Health This is OK if the detector temperature has stayed below the high temperature limit set in the detector since the last time the SOH was cleared This is available only for SMART 1 detectors High Voltage State of Health This is OK if the HV supply in the DIM has stayed within 200 V of specified bias voltage since the last time the SOH was cleared Shutdown State of Health This is OK if the detector shutdown has not activated since the last time the SOH was cleared Preamplifier overload State of Health This is OK if the preamplifier overload has not activated since the last time the SOH was cleared 44 3 MENU COMMANDS Security State of Health This is OK if the security test was passed at the end of the last spectrum acquisition This is available only for SMART 1 detectors Power State of Health This is OK if the power to the DIM was constant during the last spectrum acquisition 24 volts This is the current value of the 24 volt supply in the DIM as delivered to the detector 12 volts This is the current value of the 12 volt supply in the DIM as delivered to the detector 12 volts This is the current value of the 12 volt supply in the DIM as delivered to the detector 24 volts This is the current value of the 24 volt supply in the DIM as delivered to the detector High Voltage This is the current value of the high volt
113. 0 AM Chemical Formula Poo Atomic Weight CTAC Density ht Log X axis Enean Linear oeficient MassCoefficient 63 2 158 108 105 145 131 152 84 28 9 13 4 7 39 4 53 l 2000 4000 6000 8000 z J Energy keV Attenuation Coefficient Figure 95 Edit an Existing Attenuator 3 5 5 3 Adding New Entries to the Attenuation Database The first step is to click on Add to start the Attenuation Coefficient Wizard Fig 96 Note that you can mark a checkbox to skip this startup screen in the future Click on Next to continue At any time click on Back to go back to a previous dialog to make corrections or review the entries Click on Cancel to return to the main attenuation dialog without adding an entry to the database 131 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Attenuation Coefficient Wizard Introduction The Attenuation Wizard will help you add matrix materials to the database Skip this screen in the future Cancel Next gt N Figure 96 Start the Attenuation Wizard Figure 97 shows the Calculate Coefficients page You can define a new database entry as either a combination of other materials already in the database or you can use attenuation coefficients from textbooks and other reference sources to create an entirely new entry Attenuation Coefficient Wizard Calculate coefficients Select Calculate coefficients to a
114. 0winds ini file is located in c Program Files Isotopic4l Details Energy Centroid Center mlo mhi multilo hi Fyhm Fwi m Fw 4m rea Background Counts FirstNet FirstBackground Uncertainty Abundance MDA fwPeakFlagl 2 3 Lo HiWidth BackLo Hi Slope bove qfParaBack irpNuclide 165795 165 85 1003 88 986 1022 0 0 6 263 0 477 keV 12 01 0 915 keV 15 18 1 16 keV 181118 90187 181118 181118 0 0 0062793 aaa 4 13299 0x0000 0x0040 0x0000 iom 2647 33 2227 67 0 0 0 7 754 7530 0 12 Figure 180 Peak Analysis Details Dialog 4 5 1 1 Area Methods Ay Gross area under the peak determined by integrating the peak with a width of 2 5 times FWHM counts Areas computed in this manner are used in Methods 4 11 and 14 below To determine the area 1 Collect from the Details dialog the FWHM and peak centroid 2 Determine the starting channel by subtracting 1 25 channels times the FWHM and the ending channels by adding 1 25 channels times the FWHM 3 Establish an ROI and integrate Net peak area reported on the Identified Peak Summary Report or peak Details dialog counts Areas computed in this manner are used in Methods 9 and 10 below 203 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual A Gross area under the peak determined by integrating the peak with a width of 2 5 times FWHM minus one channel on the high and low energy side of the peaks Area
115. 1 200 1 500 Av FWTM Ratio 0 990000 0 75000 1 00000 o k 1 500 2 000 Figure 195 Showing Status of QA Measurements for a Detector 5 2 5 Control Charts The Control Chart functions display GammaVision Quality Assurance Wis ES File Scale PlotVariable Detector Options the data stored in the QA database as a TUTTI control chart The displayed data can be 1 DSPEC 075 scrolled backward or forward across the SENSUM DUDEN EDEN screen so that all collected data can be viewed A typical chart is shown in Fig 196 The short dashed lines represent the warning limits and the long dashed lines represent the acceptance threshold limits ANNI M Figure 197 shows the control chart File 7 28 87 Marker 8 12 97 01 01 AM 6 022E 5Bq 8 26 97 menu which contains the Print Graph command for printing the current graph on the current printer a standard Windows Print Setup command for selecting the printer and its setup features such as landscape vs portrait layout paper size number of copies and device control options the Exit command for closing the QA Chart Figure 196 Control Chart Example 259 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Program this duplicates the dialog upper right Close box and an About box providing version information about the chart program Choose the chart time period Week Month or Quarter from the Scale menu Fig 1
116. 1 co60 am241 LConfig1 02 131 Buf00007 An1 5 17 2007 4 01 20PM 1234 Buf0D008 4n1 5 17 2007 5 11 30PM 70517 2det 011so00023 An1 070517 2det 01 Buf00009 5 17 2007 5 13 57 PM 70517 2det 021so00024 An1 070517 2det 02 Buf00010 5 17 2007 5 15 08 PM 070517_2det_03 co60 am241 Iso00025 An1 070517 2det 5 17 2007 5 15 58 PM 070517 2det 04 co60 am241 Iso00026 An1 070517 2det 5 17 2007 5 17 03 PM 070517 1det 01 co60 am241 Buf00013 n1 v gt Delete Exit Options M Short file name V Compact database when the supervisor program is closed Figure 143 Select the Scans to Be Purged 3 7 1 4 Manage Configurations Once a Container Surface Mode configuration is created in Supervisor it cannot be deleted from the current ISOTOPIC database Therefore as you switch projects and add more configurations to the database the Configuration list in the wizard can become unwieldy There are two ways 164 3 MENU COMMANDS to manage the length of that list you can create a new database Section 3 7 1 1 which will contain only the default ISOTOPIC configurations or you can use the Manage Configurations dialog to inactivate the configurations you no longer wish to see on the container setup wizard s Configuration list Figure 144 shows the Manage Configurations dialog Configurations are listed in ascending order oldest configuration first To sort on any of the columns click on the header box Manage configurat
117. 11 IR DIE A O E 311 APPENDIX A STARTUP AND ANALYSIS SETUP o o ocoooooooonnnn n no o 313 Pole Analysis SEPA A E de 313 A 1 1 ISOWAN32 and ISOENV32 0 0c re 313 AZ ASOOE DD AID foo ogee isa 314 ALLS BSOWINDSAND sc caca a Be RR OD 316 Au SII 2 sued ao ee ean TIT UU TM 316 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual APPENDIX B TRANSFERRING INFORMATION FROM THE ISOTOPIC DATABASE 4 9 otura aro a ku tp ahaa wee LE 321 BL Whine a Simple QUESTY ISS A EA CEA ARA EA 321 B2 Transfemne the Data to Exeel 52v dte eet Rx wee ebbe eee Ot 323 APPENDIX C FILES TYPES AND FORMATS esee 327 Coke ISOTOPIC File Types ens kensa eran enade e t bua Rema ae telat EAR Meee eS 327 CI Ts Detector Filesi it on aot A SS 327 C12 Spectrum Bes ericsson boi TE MAR CERA 327 C 1 3 Miscellaneous Files oce vesc ep eI AE PE PEL ae aa ee ae eee es 327 CIA QA Database Piles 2s aon eee e ehe re t ae UR c Ea Ol P TE 328 2 Database Tables for ISOTOPIC QA socios tasar rra EG kat x V a dea 328 2 1 QA Detectors Detector Table lada a wo RE e de 328 C22 Application Information Table A Re ER RS 329 C23 M d Measurements Lable S 4 o o e at a Er Earn v oS i 329 C 2 4 P dmmmm Peaks Table S eeeeee hn 330 INDEX llb EA eats Bye abe E LES ELE 331 xiv NOTE We assume that you are familiar with 32 bit Microsoft Windows usage and terminology If you are not fully acquainted with the Windows envir
118. 2 logarithmic us aot mee poema 17 171 FRI e yids aes Bae Seek at ee Oe eh Se 19 Warning limits QA 02 0 0 0 cee eee 257 WINPLOTS see GVPlot 299 ZDT mode a Beat t Pad oe RR AD 54 zero stabilizer Aida dal 40 53 ZOOM Crasas da tal 15 19 Zoomin casi a e ed UR UE 18 172 e 9 t 5 95 95 9 nm n9 INDEX 335 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 336
119. 3 Additional Normally Distributed Uncertainty Estimate 211 4 7 4 Random Summing Uncertainty Estimate 0 0 00 c eee ee eee 211 4 7 5 Absorption Uncertainty Estimate 0 00 cece o 212 4 7 6 Nuclide Uncertainty Uncertainty Estimate 0 00000 ae 212 4 7 7 Efficiency Uncertainty Estimate oooooooooooomormonr o ros 212 AS Interpolatiye feck sees cle oa Re wee Rad Re ena ee eae eee en 212 4 7 7 2 Linear Quadratic or Polynomial oooooooomoooo o 213 Matrix Solullof sese E EX EOS PEE TEAM RERIG EE 214 Maitix INVERSION A RI re S 215 Uneertamty of the Fit sd 215 4 7 8 Geometry Correction Uncertainty Estimate 020000 eee 217 4 7 9 Uniformly Distributed Uncertainty Estimate oooooooomcooom o 217 4 8 Peak Uncertainty fora Zero Area Peak oia Re enn 218 4 9 Uncertainty of Results for Multiple Analyses llle 218 4 10 Reported Uncertainty for Entire Container Measurement 218 Z LL Analysis Algorithms Sencar Sn hs o oque eicere PEE EIE EET AERE dE 221 4 11 1 Characterizing the Detector Intrinsic Efficiency oooooo o o 221 4 11 2 Computing Item Activity xou sey dep eke kee Sa ae ENS Reh so 4 223 AV 123 Colimator C OLTeCUOD sse AAA is id 225 4 11 4 Computing MASSA SA oe aa rare es hace aealel 221 4 11 5 Fine Tuning the Plot a las 228 4 11 6 Uncertainty Estimate eee etae eso ted vie e G e
120. 32 Mdb or if the database file cannot be used for some reason a warning message will ask if you wish to create a QA database Click on OK to start the QA database setup wizard and go to Section 5 6 for instructions When the database has been successfully created you will be automatically returned to the Quality Assurance Settings dialog All the information gathered in preliminary Steps 1 4 can be entered in the Quality Assurance Settings dialog 256 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE The BACKGROUND Acquisition time and Count Rate Limits are entered using the information gathered in Step 1 above Enter the Real time or Live time in seconds for background spectra the dead time is near zero so these are usually equal The Minimum and Maximum count rate limits are the acceptance thresholds for the alarm limit Acceptance thresholds are used to indicate that the system is operating far from the expected conditions and can be used to prevent data acquisition from being performed at all until the condition is corrected If the Lock Acquire on Violation s box is marked and an acceptance threshold is exceeded the Detector is automatically locked out from use until the problem is corrected and QA is rerun The Low and High count rate limits are the warning limits and exceeding them will cause warning messages to be displayed The Background Report is printed after the analysis if it is enabled The report is stored or printed if enabled The SAMPLE
121. 375 C Documents and Settings Hagenauer 8 U KXRAY 0 C Documents and Settings Hagenauer Figure 248 Results of the Simple Query Additional data can be added to the queries by adding other fields found in other tables Be careful to properly link the tables or your query will not return the results you want Other forms and reports can be developed in Access and Excel 325 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 326 APPENDIX C FILES TYPES AND FORMATS This appendix describes the file structure for the ISOTOPIC program files See the ORTEC Software File Structures Manual for DOS and Windows Systems for complete descriptions of the formats for these files including SPC CHN and UFO files This appendix also includes two program examples that show how to access the spectrum files Our Analysis Results Toolkit A12 B32 can be used to develop user written programs to read the analysis results C 1 1 CXT SDF C 1 2 CHN SPC AN1 ROI BMP C 1 3 CLB LIB UFO C 1 ISOTOPIC File Types Detector Files ConteXT system Detector information used by ISOTOPIC not user modifiable Sample type defaults configured by clicking on the Edit button on the QA Settings dialog binary format Spectrum Files CHaNnels MAESTRO style spectral data file binary format SPeCtrum spectrum with full analysis settings calibration descriptions etc In
122. 4 171 2281 11 8406 9 159 2311 12 1826 1 817 2282 11 8520 20 148 2312 12 1940 1 806 2283 11 8634 15 136 2313 12 2054 3 205 2284 11 8748 47 125 2314 12 2168 9 783 2285 11 8862 120 113 2315 12 2282 4 228 2286 11 8976 225 102 2316 12 2396 1 239 2287 11 9090 461 091 2317 12 2510 2 251 2288 11 9204 835 079 2318 12 2624 1 737 2289 11 9318 1369 068 2319 12 2738 0 273 2290 11 9432 1887 057 2291 11 9546 2321 046 2292 11 9660 2391 034 2293 11 9774 2393 023 2294 11 9888 1972 011 2295 12 0002 1503 000 2296 12 0116 933 988 2297 12 0230 622 977 2298 12 0344 295 965 2299 12 0458 175 954 4 1 6 Energy Recalibration The spectrum energy calibration can be redone on the fly for the spectrum being analyzed This option is turned off by default and must be enabled to operate see Section A 1 3 This improves the analysis results and adjusts for small changes in the hardware gain Energy recalibration is first performed using singlet peaks only Then after deconvolution the spectrum is recalibrated using all the peaks If the energy calibration changes the spectrum is reanalyzed 189 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual For all peaks in the library the peak centroid energy in the spectrum is compared with the library energy If the difference between the library energy and the centroid energy is less than 0 5 keV or 0 5 times the FWHM or one channel whichever is greater that centroid is associated with that libra
123. 4585 8728 3 186E 04 11 91 1 385 CO 57 1004 71 165 85 131263 8338 2 703E 04 10 85 1 361 CE 139 g 1353 58 223 46 74461 1853 7 2 76E 03 33 02 0 416 SB 126 s Peak location from 2466 90 407 28 225790 2782 1 854E404 46 82 0 200 s peak finder 3487 94 575 87 14427 1655 1 571E404 40 44 0 294 sH 3530 45 582 89 123664 1658 1 585E404 43 54 0 262 TL 208 s 4007 22 661 61 115458 332468 3 666E 06 0 33 1 924 C3 137 4504 69 743 75 35467 1075 1 345E404 37 80 0 352 AG 110M s 5952 56 982 81 10110 158 2 646E 03 87 91 0 425 PA 234 s 6282 73 1152 91 23750 766 1 48685E 04 42 24 0 254 E 8058 83 1332 40 20294 218262 4 790E4 06 0 33 2 408 CO 60 8200 04 1353 90 5193 430 9 507E 03 34 89 0 219 s 8726 24 1440 78 2966 432 1 000E 04 31 65 0 255 E 9499 70 1568 49 2025 178 4 352E 03 52 40 0 313 s 11732 55 1937 17 194n 428 1 182E 04 32 54 0 546 E 15174 52 2505 48 305 19099 5 926E 05 0 81 2 974 E ee 3 Peak fails shape tests Closest match from suspect library Energy of peak D Peak area deconvoluted channel H Peak is close to a library peak Gross minus background Counting uncertainty Figure 222 Unidentified Peak Energy Matrix The fourth column shows the net area which is the gross area minus the background area The area is calculated by the summation method for singlets and by the fitting method for multiplets The next column shows either the net area divided by the live time to yield the counts second for the peak
124. 8 Method 8 RISO MDA B CR ag 4 65 x yA 47 LT NOTE If B is computed as zero it is assigned a value of 1 for MDA calculations 4 5 2 9 Method 9 LLD ORTEC _P xA E 48 CR a 4 66 X a LT where o counting uncertainty This value is found in the peak Details dialog 4 5 2 10 Method 10 Peak Area This method is useful if negative peak areas are expected CR a 49 mda LT 4 5 2 11 Method 11 Air Monitor GIMRAD also called DIN 25 482 Method ass ia meom X N CR maa z LT 207 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 4 5 2 12 Method 12 Regulatory Guide 4 16 This is a frequently used method in the USA 2 71 4 66 B CR 51 4 5 2 13 Method 13 Counting Lab USA This method is used when a minus MDA is needed in situations when the background is greater than the peak area A B N CR ___ 52 mda LT 52 where N number of channels included in the integration of the peak channels 4 5 2 14 Method 14 Erkennungsgrenze Detection Limit DIN 25 482 5 This method is described in the German DIN 25 482 teil 5 It is designed to establish a critical value for the spectrum 53 ne 4x LT N where N number of channels in the peak rounded up using the A peak method channels N number of channels in the background regions above and below the peak Usually this number is approximately half of the number of peak channels N channel
125. 90 4 ANALYSIS METHODS the best calibration For 2 point calibrations this number can be much larger than 1 0 because the calculated FWHM which is a linear function does not fit the spectrum FWHM at the ends of the spectrum If high values are reported and the analysis results are unacceptable a better calibration should be made The calibration section can be used to produce a multi point calibration which will reduce the energy difference n E E pi Li 2 FWHM 34 QUALITY FACTOR n where Ej the energy of the ith peak in the spectrum E the energy of the corresponding peak in the library FWHM the calculated FWHM of the peak at the library n the number of peaks in a spectrum with matching library peaks This energy normalized difference is printed on the report For a complex spectrum this number will range from 0 1 to 0 3 A large value indicates that a new calibration should be performed or that the library does not match the spectrum well Smaller values are usually associated with fewer peaks or a better calibration If an energy recalibration has occurred the library peak list is reanalyzed with the new energy calibration This results in more accurate peak values for centroid and area 4 1 7 Peak Search After the library peaks are located the spectrum is searched for any other peaks This is needed even if the list of unknown peak values is not requested for
126. 98 The Plot Variable menu Fig 199 contains functions for selecting Activity Peak Energy Peak Width Half Max Peak Width Tenth Max or Background Plot Variable Print Graph Week w Activity Exit v Month Peak Energy Figure 198 Peak Width amp Tenth Max Piguna Py OS Chart Pie Scale Menu BackGround Menu Figure 199 Plot Variable Menu The Detector menu item opens the list of Detectors for Pick Detector which background and sample measurements have been made Fig 200 Select a Detector for this control chart and click on OK Off line processing of the QA data base including detailed trend analyses can be done outside of ISOTOPIC The database format used is well documented and compatible with a number of popular software products including Microsoft Access NOTE We strongly recommend that you back up any Cancel ISOTOPIC database files before performing Figure 200 Detector Pick List manipulations on them outside of ISOTOPIC The Options menu Fig 201 includes an Always On Top command which keeps the QA window on top of all other windows v Always On Top no matter which window in ISOTOPIC or any other program might Fixed Vertical Scale be active Figure 201 QA Chart File Menu The Fixed Vertical Scale command adds flexibility in displaying control charts both on screen and on printouts for comparison with other charts 260 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE e Fixed Vertical Scale Off no check mark
127. Control Chart features to view the current status of measurements for the Detector and or view and print the data stored in the database as a control chart display In addition you can create an archive copy of the QA database 5 2 1 Settings The QA settings include the upper and lower radionuclide activity limits which when exceeded indicate that the system is not operating correctly There are two levels of limits The warning limits are determined by the settings in the Low and High fields in the Quality Assurance Settings dialog in Fig 191 The alarm limits those outside of the Minimum and Maximum fields If the result of a QA measurement is outside the warning limits a warning dialog is displayed If the QA result is outside the alarm limits a violation dialog is displayed Moreover if the Lock Acquire on Violation s box is marked the violation must be corrected and the QA 254 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE measurement repeated before the out of limits Detector can be used to collect more data in ISOTOPIC Generally after setup these levels should not be changed without careful consideration Normally the spectrum is cleared before a new QA spectrum is collected If you wish to use an existing spectrum to continue a count for QA information mark the Don t clear at Start checkbox and the existing spectrum will not be retained as the starting point for the additional data collection If desired additional information can be gen
128. Data About Status Presets MDA Preset Amplifier Amplifier2 ADC Stabilizer Nuclide Report High Voltage T Gain Stabilization Enabled Zero Stabilization Enabled Center Chan o Center Chan o Width fi Width fi Suggest Region Suggest Region m Adjustment Adjustment Initialize 0 Initialize 0 Figure 25 The digiDART Stabilizer Tab 3 MENU COMMANDS further corrections in that direction The Center Channel and Width fields show the peak currently used for stabilization To enable the stabilizer enter the Center Channel and Width values manually or click on the Suggest Region button Suggest Region reads the position of the marker and inserts values into the fields If the marker is in an ROL the limits of the ROI are used If the marker is not in an ROI the center channel is the marker channel and the width is 3 times the FWHM at this energy Now click on the appropriate Enabled checkbox to turn the stabilizer on Until changed in this dialog the stabilizer will stay active even if the power is turned off When the stabilizer is enabled the Center Channel and Width cannot be changed High Voltage Figure 26 shows the High Voltage tab which allows you to turn the high Field Data About Status Presets MDA Preset Nuclide Report voltage on or off set and monitor the Amplifier Amplifier2 ADC Stabilizer High Voltage voltage and choose the Shut
129. Down mode Target 3500 Volts Off Actual 3520 Volts r Shutdown Enter the detector high voltage in the JORTEC E Target field click On and monitor the voltage in the Actual field To turn the high voltage off click the On Off button The high voltage is overridden by the detector bias remote shutdown signal from the detector high voltage cannot be enabled if the remote shutdown or overload signals prevent it The Overload indicator means there is a bad connection in your system The Shutdown indicator means that either the detector is warm or you have chosen the wrong Shutdown mode Figure 26 The digiDART High Voltage Tab The shutdown can be ORTEC TTL or SMART The ORTEC mode is used for all ORTEC detectors except SMART 1 detectors which use the SMART setting For other detectors check with the manufacturer The TTL mode is used for most non ORTEC detectors The high voltage in the digiDART is supplied by the SMART 1 module or in a separate DIM The recommended HV for SMART 1 is displayed on the dialog For other detectors see the detector manual or data sheet for the correct voltage The polarity is determined by the DIM or SMART 1 module 41 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Field Data This tab see Fig 27 is used to view the spectra in the digiDART collected in field mode that is without a computer attached The digiDART is always in field mode when
130. Energy performing the energy and efficiency calibrations For energy Description recalibrations you can either use the wizard or the Energy PED C RDERDOR S command See also the Getting Started guide which walks you through a simple energy and efficiency calibration using Save Calibration Print Calibration the Calibration Wizard including the use of the Certificate File Calibration Wizard Editor Figure 34 Calibrate Menu NOTE Each detector must be calibrated independently even for multi detector systems The Energy and Calibration Wizard commands are only available if the Detector is not acquiring data If there is no energy calibration all choices except Energy Recall Calibration and Calibration Wizard are inactive gray 60 3 MENU COMMANDS 3 3 1 An Introduction to Energy and Efficiency Calibration The calibration of a spectroscopy system defines four relationships e Spectrum channel numbers and energy e FWHM of the peak and energy e Spectrum count rate and activity in becquerels or other units e True coincidence summing factor and energy The data collected are in counts unit time channel however to be most useful these data need to be converted to activities 1 e decays unit time at a given energy The calibration parameters perform this conversion These relationships are calculated from spectra user inputs and inputs from libraries and tables The calibration da
131. Es eS oe Se Sb SP ee ee eb ee ee be eS ee ee See Background width best method based on spectrum 2939 64 718 00 1514 79 009 70 82 1 517 Background width average of five points 2939 64 718 00 1372 12 001 422 37 1 517 Background width average of three points 2939 64 718 00 1299 43 005 119 77 1 5417 Background width minimum data point 2939 64 718 00 1214 72 008 69 70 1 517 Figure 169 Example of Different Background Method Results 4 1 2 Peak Area Singlets 4 1 2 1 Total Summation Method The gross area of the peak is the sum of the contents of each channel between the background channels including the two background channels as follows h A 7 2 C 27 where A the gross area C the data value of channel i l the center channel of the background calculation width at the low energy side of the spectrum h the center channel of the background calculation width at the high energy side of the spectrum This peak area calculation method referred to as total summation maintains precision as the peak gets smaller is less sensitive to random fluctuations in the data and is less sensitive to the differences between the spectrum peak shape and the calibrated peak shape Refer to Figs 168 and 169 and Table 4 to calculate the gross area for the example peak The integral from channel 2276 to 2311 is 18143 counts The net area is the gross area minus the background in those channels Fig 170 184
132. Fle Acquire Calibrate Calculate Analyze Library Services ROI Display Window c O KA tos A 293 POloj v 7 B Efficiency Table A Efficiency ici Delta 2 331 2E 002 5955E 002 TEA 0 0792 698 0200 7320E 002 4 7820E 002 1 0572 pp 022 0200 6588E 002 6 4242E 002 3 5234 Enter Calc 8928E 002 7 1574E 002 3 8393 2977E 002 5 2718E 002 0 4892 Table mE mE aa 10 Pairs Delete Entry Recall Save ee gt 0 07818 ES a ove Polynomial m Efficiency Below None Linear Energy ke ORTEC Buffer GvDemo Spc MIXED GAMMA MARINELLI ON ENDCAP OF P402684 2 52 28 PM Fri 12 Jul 02 EA Marker 5537 keV 20 972 Cnts Effic 0 030852 Calibrating Close Sidebar to ed ESC to Cancel Figure 52 Editing the Efficiency Calibration Any point in the table can be modified by selecting it and clicking on the Calc button to open the Efficiency Calculation Worksheet which allows you to enter or change the data for the peak Fig 53 In the Assay from Certificate section of the dialog enter the calibration Date and Time from the source data sheet Enter the Activity from the source and select the units from the droplist The source Uncertainty is entered here but can be left at 0 0 This uncertainty is used in the total uncertainty calculation 83 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual When the values are correct click the Calculate Efficien
133. I change to a diagonal fill see Fig 239 To display the ROI bars right click in the expanded window to open the right mouse button menu then click on ROI Bars to checkmark it To hide the ROI bars click on the command again to clear the checkmark When you activate an ROI by clicking on it the Marker Informa tion Line Fig 240 displays the following information about the Figure 239 Inactive solid active ROL and Active diagonal fill ROI Bars a The marker position in channels and energy b The counts in the marker channel c The start and end points for the ROI in channels for uncalibrated spectra and energy for calibrated spectra d The total counts in the ROI e The nuclide name if identified f The net peak area in counts g The peak background area in counts h The activity in the peak in becquerels Marker 353 60 78keY Cnts 3048 ROI 335 358 keV Cnts 208113 Name Am 241 Area 127237 Bkod 115403 Bo 5 747e 003 a b c d e f g h Figure 240 The GVPlot Marker Information Line You can shift the start or end channel of an ROI by moving the mouse over an ROI bar until the pointer changes to a double arrow then clicking and dragging the ROI bar to the desired location allow a moment for the display to update In addition you can widen the ROI in the Modify Active ROI mode Section 7 1 3 4 Set the color of the ROI bars with the Markers droplist in the Graph Properties dialog select Properties
134. I channels contiguous to the channel containing the marker This is duplicated by the ROI Del button on the Status Sidebar Keypad lt Del gt the Delete key and the Clear ROI Toolbar button See also Clear ROI on the right mouse button menu Section 3 11 9 3 8 4 Clear All This resets all the ROI bits in the displayed spectrum 1 e removes all ROI markings from the spectrum However it does not affect the ROI status of Mark Unmark Off 3 8 5 Save File This command opens a standard file save dialog Fig 154 that saves the current ROI table of the channel numbers in the active spectrum to a disk file The contents of the spectrum are not changed 170 3 MENU COMMANDS 3 8 6 Recall File Recall File sets the ROIs in the buffer or active Detector to the table in the disk file created by ROU Save File Section 3 8 5 from the table stored in an spc file from the analysis limits in a UFO file or from the energies in a library This command opens the dialog shown in Fig 155 prompting for a filename When you select a file the ROIs in the buffer or active Detector are set to conform to the table in the file The previous ROIs are cleared The data contents of the buffer or Detector are not altered by this operation only the ROI bits in the buffer or Detector In ROI spectrum and uFo files the ROIs are saved by channel number Therefore if the spectrum peaks have shifted in position the ROIs in the file
135. ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 4 8 Peak Uncertainty for a Zero Area Peak For a peak with zero activity 1f there is a background Orea V2 Background 84 If the background 0 the analysis engine assigns a peak count of 1 4 9 Uncertainty of Results for Multiple Analyses w2g e 1 1 A a E 85 This is calculated as w weight assignment for detector i o uncertainty for analysis i 4 10 Reported Uncertainty for Entire Container Measurement For nuclear waste measurements it is impossible to provide a mathematical basis for localized matrix attenuation and geometry because many of the critical parameters for each drum are typically not measured However estimates based on practical experience are presented that provide realistic uncertainties These practical experiences include the scanning large numbers of containers to empirically verify where the activity is actually located in drums and boxes thus the effect of geometry can be computed The models assume that matrix density is homogeneous and that any activity found is located within the container Practical experience indicates the deviation from homogeneity Overall uncertainty is described as o 86 2 2 2 O overall i 6 oi matrix T Semed 218 4 ANALYSIS METHODS where Overa Overall measurement uncertainty O uncertainty in peakfit O r uncertainty in matrix attenuation 96 0 5 uncertain
136. If the result is greater than the fraction limit the nuclide is marked as being present To turn off this test set the limit to zero The Units section allows you to choose either becquerels Bq or microcuries pCi as the base units and a Multiplier and Divisor to scale the numbers up or down The units label is printed at the top of the activity columns on the QA sample measurement report and should reflect the values chosen that is if pCi is chosen with a multiplier of 1000 then nanocuries should be entered in the Activity field The combined label activity quantity is limited to 14 characters Enter the sample Size units This field is linked to the Divisor field and the default unit is kilograms kg To use a unit of measure other than kg enter the abbreviation in the Size field then enter the appropriate factor for converting kilograms to these units For example to use grams enter g in the Size field and 1000 in the Divisor field 266 5 3 3 Decay Tab The Decay tab is shown in Fig 208 This dialog shows all the decay options and date time entry fields Mark the checkboxes in the Decay Correction section to enable or disable decay correction During Acquisition and decay correction to a given Date and Time Collection Both of these affect the report of the analysis of the total spectrum In the Sample Collection section mark the Collection checkbox and enter the times for sample collect ion These dates
137. LITY ASSURANC IE na eu cone erede p EXE OR pac 251 Doles InttOdUGLIOTE eu rs Eee test e eke dor ee piste dedi tide tonis diis d 251 5 1 1 Using QA Results to Diagnose System Problems Ls 233 5 2 QA SubMenu QS Roscio a NERIS EC MIR LR ON ERE EN EM VE RERUM d eS 254 Six NES da SS A IRI 254 5 2 1 1 Establishing QA Settings os eoe rae TARTE YR ESI 255 5 2 2 Measure Background 2s dort c oie o XE DEC pibus dcn PPS 258 5 2 3 Meas re Sample A ors ts Ie E dace eine Ne aoa na E ob ERE SRS 258 252522155 E eros ase Ce irae ed e p uae Voto see eue Es Suse Urt dde e 259 5 2 5 Control Charts s d esos iba Gade aver Me a ds ads Side os 259 342 0 ATEOS Database A ee Ree BWR EE CARE EEE ERE 263 5 3 Creating a Sample Description SDF File for QA 0 0 00 263 3 Sample Tab E de ul eek y Lice Y Ree ee 264 Dt System Lad s toe A ual cdit did decur a e 265 DN ELA AA Da E ET HR m 267 DOA REPO a gy Bo ee ers deat 267 5 95 95 A malysis Tub uin oues d soo e etos ra had Garhi Das ce Des o C acudieron b Gan ost 269 5 3 5 1 Analysis Method ito teneo Ee C Reno ree Ee 269 32 gt Additional BEEOES pss odas peas 269 Ni AMAS TS eere qd ete SA A b et ci dde 269 5 3 0 Corrections Tab 24 1 ooh ex Oe dt Le Ee b as mea 270 5 4 Caution Running the MCB Configuration Program Can Affect Container Configurations and QA usse ex eR a aes ees MAT ES MAP M 270 5 4 1 Confirming the MCB Identification 0 0 0 0 cee eee ee eee 273 DAM
138. Library Setup Suggestions for Soil Mode page 121 e General Suggestions On Library Entries page 155 1 2 Background The characterization of containers buildings and open areas for the radioactive content is necessary for several regulatory and safety reasons The movement or storage of containers of radioactive waste requires characterization of the contents for radioactivity to verify conformance with the U S Department of Transportation DOT regulations and with the criteria of the facility accepting or storing the waste Buildings and open areas must also be characterized for the radioactive content both before any cleanup and after the cleanup has been performed The analysis of waste containers has traditionally been a difficult task because most general gamma ray spectroscopy programs do not have the facilities to account for the efficiency complex attenuation and geometry corrections needed A similar situation holds for the analysis of large semi infinite areas In this case it is also the efficiency attenuation and geometry corrections which must be calculated but the assumptions and approximations are different from the container situation ISOTOPIC v4 1 analyzes a wide variety of geometries Depending on selections made by the Supervisor the program uses either the ISOTOPIC method Container Surface Mode in ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual ISOTOPIC v4 1 or the M 1 method Soil Mode for calcu
139. MODE on page 106 and LIBRARY SETUP SUGGESTIONS FOR SOIL MODE on page 121 Figure 130 shows the ISOTOPIC library Editing dialog The control menu is shown in Fig 131 click on the Title Bar icon to open it it contains several of the commands necessary to create and edit the LIB files Editing GvDemo Lib A Creation 4 13 88 10 58 04 AM Cd 103 Cadmium Move Edition 4 5 85 8 18 53 AM Half Life 436 Days X Close Alt F4 Uncertainty 54000 Nuclide Flags Show Master Library Edit Cd 109 Nee Restore Peaks 1l Sort Load Library HH U3 3 BOE H IEM 2 22 16 8 6000E 3 24 94 1 7000E Edit Cut Insert Paste Figure 130 Editing Library Dialog 3 6 3 1 Copying Nuclides From Library to Library Save Library As Figure 131 Library Edit Dialog Control Menu To copy nuclides from one library to another library for example to make a working library from a master library click on the Edit window control menu and select Show 156 3 MENU COMMANDS Master Library This will open a file selection dialog Choose the desired disk and file and click on Open Both libraries will be displayed side by side as illustrated in Fig 132 To copy a nuclide from the master library to the working library Go to the master library list and click once on the nuclide of interest This will activate the gray Insert Copy button at the b
140. Manual 5 2 2 Measure Background This command Fig 192 reminds you to verify that all sources have been removed from the Detector before proceeding Confirm that all sources have been removed for a background measurement click on OK Start The remain ing functions are performed automatically Mark the Overwrite repeat previous background measurement checkbox by clicking on it if the previous measurement was in error If a sample QA has been run since the background QA the previous background run cannot be overwritten For example if a problem was detected fixed and this run is to verify the repairs check the box so the bad value is not kept in the database Click on OK If the background is outside the set limits a warning similar to Fig 193 is displayed 5 2 3 Measure Sample This command opens the Sample QA Measure ment dialog Fig 194 It contains a reminder to place the QA source on the Detector Click on Overwrite to replace the last measurement Click on OK Start to begin the count The QA source spectra are collected for the preset time and analyzed automatically The analysis results are compared with the limits If the result is outside the limits a warning is displayed The results are also stored in the QA database 258 Background QA Measurement El x Ensure that detector is free of any samples and press OK Start to continue Cancel Overwrite repeat previous background
141. Mode is not appropriate The operator cannot change the mode 3 6 Library The Library menu is shown in Figure 128 The Library commands let you select display create edit or print the library files used in the Select Peak functions under the Settings and Calibrate menus using either the Select File ISOTOPIC library editor discussed here or the NuclideNavigator III EOR library editor if NuclideNavigator is installed Library files are organ E ized by nuclide then by the nuclide peaks Figure 128 Library Menu The nuclide library is used with reference to the peak search or report functions for quantitative identification of and activity calculations for spectral components according to calibrated peak energy The nuclide library data include the nuclide name half life and half life uncertainty The nuclide names can be any combination of eight characters but must be consistent throughout all files The library peak data include the energies and yield or gammas disintegration for each energy The default file extension is LIB Users are expected to develop libraries for calibration samples quality assurance auto calibration and suspect Several sample libraries may be necessary if different nuclides are present for different measurement streams ISOTOPIC is installed with a number of example libraries Lib0 1ib is an example of a master library It contains many common nuclide used in nuclear spectroscopy Note th
142. N AC MT 273 5 4 1 2 Container Configuration 0 0 cece eee eee 213 5 5 Quality Assurance Examples Ree EE CREE ERMOCE SAA 274 3 0 Creating the OA Database seba tra ta wee sees 277 a3 The QA AAA E E ee a 279 dido First Pag e ne str EEO A es See elk we win he Hd a 279 5 7 2 Unidentified Peak Summary ao ot arde pra d det 282 5 7 3 Peak Energy A II eo 284 5 7 4 Library Peak Usd sacar rra ps Fr Oen UE e 285 36529 Nueclides in Sample visco ei esee Xi teneo sent amp eel se Ove Peste 288 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 6 KEYBOARD FUNCTIONS u SA SERERE EXE SEG EA 289 A A a Be eee Re EE ED a ee wee EE Se RE UES ims 289 6 2 Marker and Display Function Keys 1d dc eter aw tee ne vase cere eee eek 289 62 l Next Channel eo ie ii AA ee eet 289 5 22 NeXPROL ria cd e ppt S E ren 291 O23 Next Peak scc ose v sort eu ae daca Vac tone at Bord acti wer do paa 291 6 2 4 Next Library Entry xo sae ee eu tent een tee Ral ene de e ed P doe ons 291 0 25 RSU ast C Dantiel seas rt pute A ee ee a bane RS 291 6 2 6 Jump Sixteenth Screen Width 4 29 aces env entere sheen Pe nerod RED 291 0 22 Wiser ROIS s coc Oe A A a 292 6 275 Clear ROL UR bola eck ee Oe eh e debo ean 292 6 2 9 Taller SNOMer rtve Le Pad ae We eee a we eee PERLES 292 6 2 10 Compare Vertical Separation patada Sara nte n C ded 203 0 2 bb Zoom In Zoom Out uo Da C CERCA CEDE S 293 02 12 Fine Gailh uas ea E oe Grace Gane nisin Grae Gabel si
143. ORTEC ISOTOPIC Supervisor Program for Radioactive Waste Characterization ISOPLUS B32 Software User s Manual Software Version 4 1 Printed in U S A ORTEC Part No 783630 0608 Manual Revision L Advanced Measurement Technology Inc a k a ORTEC a subsidiary of AMETEK Inc WARRANTY ORTEC DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE NOT EXPRESSLY SET FORTH HEREIN IN NO EVENT WILL ORTEC BE LIABLE FOR INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR LOST SAVINGS EVEN IF ORTEC HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THESE DATA Copyright 2008 Advanced Measurement Technology Inc All rights reserved ORTEC is a registered trademark of Advanced Measurement Technology Inc All other trademarks used herein are the property of their respective owners TABLE OF CONTENTS I INTRODUCTION naa Onn ceda ERU woes ea ESOS Se Qs OES Ae 1 al What SING Wea oe wane trt iS Se es E RA 1 1 1 1 Container Mode Enhancements 45952224 ES bev eye eews 1 1 1 2 Soil Mode Enhancements E ia 2 EES Other New Features 1o edere ete e as 2 1 1 4 User Manual Enhancements e A A AAA 3 2 Back rU eo cese teh Aa 3 1 3 The ISOPLUS B32 Software tt E cadet Bee rad EUR ga das 5 1 4 PC and Operating System Requirements 0 0 c
144. PBC Table 143 Adding Nucldes stands ts Lar 144 Rearrangmp a PBC Last ae 145 RECETAS Ae ata Ree oe in ate 145 Saving or Canceling Changes and Closing the Edit Session 146 IDIGONOSIS hors occ en eRe A aes Thee Meee 146 3 5 7 1 Display Analysis Results jena eosin caren aera Rex Eee 146 Analysis Sidebar sE 147 TABLE OF CONTENTS Analysis Results Table us pus sas 148 3 5 7 2 Interactive in Viewed Area ceras iia 151 Analysis Sidebar o e Ne 151 Saving the Analysis Results in a UFO File 153 3 5 8 Mode Container Surface or Soil ooooooooo ooo 154 O A ET CR OT T E T lia 154 26l A OEC 155 OSEA A A ES ES 155 SX MUI Tr 155 3 6 3 1 Copying Nuclides From Library to Library 156 3 6 3 2 Creating a New Library Manually 0000 157 3 6 3 3 Editing Library List Nuclides 2 5 aes es 158 Manually Adding Nuclides ooooooomoommo o o 159 Deleting Nuclides from the Library s usus 159 Rearranging the Library LiSt o oooooooooooo o 159 Editing Nuclide Peaks vicios serie xe RR e We asa 160 Adding Nuclide Peak ed 161 Rearranging the Peak List rias EX REP 161 3 6 3 4 Saving or Canceling Changes and Closing o ooooo o 161 QI MB Pe 161 SIESTA eaa Site tes ut ES LR Ee AS i NM EE 162 3 1 1 Database Malla cement su aloe e de Dto ea eae do mese CRON wie nee d 162 3 7 1 1 Create Database u
145. PLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 3 3 2 2 Creating and Editing Certificate Files The EFT file contains all the data needed to perform an efficiency calibration using this standard source There are three ways to create and edit a certificate file in ISOTOPIC e In the Certificate File Editor dialog This requires a known calibration source a nuclide library containing the gamma rays of interest and the certificate supplied by the authority that certified the source e g NIST NPL or PTB See Using the Certificate File Editor beginning on page 72 e Manually using the Efficiency Calibration Sidebar See Manual Efficiency Calibration on page 75 e By directly editing the ASCII text EFT file in Windows Notepad or another text processor The certificate file and the efficiency standard file from the efficiency calibration have the same structure except that the certificate file does not use the contents of the efficiency field and all fields must have valid contents Tables with all fields entered can be used in the Calibration Wizard Any energy in the ErT file that is not completely filled in will be ignored by the wizard Using the Certificate File Editor To create a new certificate file enter the Certificate File Editor from the main Supervisor screen start at Step 1 below or when using the Keep Current or Create New efficiency calibration setting in the Calibration Wizard start at Step 3 1 Use File Rec
146. PLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual The analysis version code changes as updates to the internal algorithms are made This code is only useful when requesting assistance for a particular spectrum The second line gives the laboratory name as entered on the Sample tab under Analyze Settings Sample Type and spectrum name Sample Description from File The sample description if any saved with the spectrum file The spc file description is 128 characters two lines and the cmn file description is 63 characters one line Spectrum Filename The user entered name for a CHN file or the original name of the spc file from CONVERT for spc files Data Acquisition Parameters These include the date and time data acquisition started the live time and real time values and Detector ID as stored in the spectrum file Calibration Information Includes the calibration filename and information about each of the calibrations energy efficiency TCC performed The filename and description are from the spectrum file if it is an spc file Each set of calibration data shows the date the calibration calculation was performed not the collection date of the calibration spectrum so each calibration can have a different date The offset and slope from the calibration data in the spc or cHN file are presented the quadratic factor is not printed Analysis Library This section of the report prints the analysis library filename If the library was
147. R 37 Resolution ade 37 39 Right mouse button menu 19 175 Clear on Aa me hong ace etie teta a d eds 176 Clear ROL toe sucht doce nate pto ntt 176 Copy to Buffer 5 eae ette o th 176 Input count rate oo oooooo o 177 Matk ROL Las dota 176 Peak tod dd Rahs 177 Start acquisition ias 175 Stop acquisition oooo ooooooooo 176 Undo Zoom n 223 xoc orcas Rs 176 ZOOM TN 24 tadas Rs 176 ZOOM Dadas Ka 176 Rise tme dosel a cdo 37 39 ROL A E 22 169 291 O skate wetting 170 176 292 C Tear AU tas ace x facet ast al ik ng monte ide 170 Mark I 170 176 292 M rk PEAK catas aiea olin PERO bes 170 Recall EHe 23 ex xat wali we ache Rcs 171 Save HB xxdsced a gt aret att arb tng n ee Ufer 170 O boe ane aiit ae anh 14 15 295 BROLIBeIU s vastes xtate ORI RR e 169 ROLSUUS Stet adie ca tatio oe aca 14 15 295 Rubber rectangle 1a ote ege Mata 19 Sample description creating in Supervisor 33 43 Sample Type COLTGG LOTIS se 2055 1 as 270 fraction limit rca deis 266 MDA OPE 0000 aded ue tete de ea 108 265 Save MI soil mode file 118 alpha rho RHO file 125 calibrato cc cad ta 93 A AE NE 161 ROLTIS 222463 rca tots RA 170 SDGCIEDED oed aod aate tes eRe Rota 30 Scaling autoseale nt So aS ence waite ede 17 172 A A wate tested 17 172 logarithmic ie tt toe o gea 17 171 Screen Caplio 293 Services Men toi 162 Settings Calculate rs ire ane lt e ta 94 qu
148. ROI the peak limits used are the same as the limits for the ROI Insert button on the Status Sidebar and the report is generated according to items 1 and 2 above If the Detector is acquiring data the values displayed are continuously updated with new values based on the new data NOTE This command uses the calculation described below as distinguished from the analysis engines used for detailed analysis Typically these results are not the same as the complete analysis peak results The Next Peak and Previous Peak buttons on the Status Sidebar will move the Peak Info box up and down in the spectrum The x factor is determined in Calculate Settings The peak information is displayed in a pop up box at the top of the peak Fig 69 It can also be displayed by double clicking the mouse in 94 3 MENU COMMANDS the ROI or on the peak or with the right mouse button menu To close the box press lt Esc gt or click in the box The background on the low channel side of the peak is the average of the first three channels of the ROI see Fig 70 The channel number for this background point is the middle channel of the three points The background on the high channel side of the peak is the average of the last three channels of the ROI The channel number for this background point is also the middle channel of the three points These two points on each side of the peak form the endpoints of the straight line background The backg
149. ROI status is unchanged with the marker 6 4 2 ZDT Normal lt F3 gt For MCBs operating in ZDT mode the lt F3 gt key switches between the normal LTC or uncertainty ERR spectrum and the ZDT corrected spectrum It duplicates the Acquire ZDT Display Select command 6 4 3 ZDT Compare lt Shift F3 gt For ZDT supporting instruments in Compare mode this accelerator switches the compare spectrum between the ZDT spectrum and its accompanying LTC or ERR spectrum It is used in combination with lt F3 gt or Acquire ZDT Display Select to display the normal to ZDT uncertainty to ZDT ZDT to normal or ZDT to uncertainty comparisons 6 4 4 Detector Buffer lt F4 gt The lt F4 gt key switches between the display of the data in the Detector and the data in the buffer It duplicates the function of lt Alt 6 gt and Display Detector Buffer see Section 6 3 5 295 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 6 4 5 Taller Shorter lt F5 gt lt F6 gt These keys decrease or increase the vertical full scale of the displayed spectrum so the peaks appear taller or shorter respectively They duplicate the function of the 1 and 1 keys The vertical scale value is always shown on the Toolbar 6 4 6 Narrower Wider lt F7 gt lt F8 gt These keys increase or decrease the horizontal scale of the data display so the peaks appear narrower or wider respectively They duplicate the function of lt gt and lt gt keys Th
150. SB interface e g digiDART DSPEC Pro and the PC to MCB connection is lost while running either the Supervisor or Operator program the software will immediately close the window for the missing MCB post a Detector busy or not responding message on the status bar at the bottom of the screen and open a buffer window see Fig 1 To reopen communication with the MCB in the Supervisor program Detector in UNKNOWN Mode Detector ISOCART 1 DIGIDART 1 is in UNKNOWN Mode Buffer Buffer Do you want to cancel UNKNOWN Mode Yes No E 255 uncal Detector busy or not responding Figure 1 USB Connected Detector in Unknown Mode Make sure all cable connections are secure Select the MCB from the Detector droplist on the Toolbar 10 1 INTRODUCTION e The UNKNOWN Mode dialog will open asking if you wish to cancel the unknown mode Clicking on Yes will clear the MCB memory reset the unit to data acquisition mode and open a corresponding spectrum window Clicking on No will reset the MCB to the proper mode but might retain the instrument memory unless the MCB is powered exclusively by the USB bus for instance the digi BASE If your MCB is line or battery powered and has a spectrum in memory click on No then re select the MCB from the Detector list If the spectrum has been retained in MCB memory it will be displayed onscreen e Before resuming data collection make sure the detector high voltage i
151. STATION 2 RICH DSJ2 ISOCART 1 DIGIDART 1 HP 1 DSPEC JR2 Hel ty Renumber All Itel Renumber New Update instrument list on all systems Instr Input System Figure 212 Original MCB Configuration Showing Our Two ISOCARTS Before closing the Configure Instruments Instrument Input System ID dialog double click J 1 HAYWOOD 4 E Description s Cancel on the MCB entries that EUDART TDIBIDART Y must be renumbered and or renamed This Close ISOCART 1 DIGIDART 1 will open the Change 3 ISOCART 2DIGIDART 2 Cancel Description or ID dialog 6 LAB dspr gem n15583a Hp Restore the original instrument number in Renumber All the ID field and click on Rerumber New OK as shown in Fig 213 Update instrument list on all systems Instr Input System 514 1 HAYWOOD Repeat for all Detectors that must be renumbered and or renamed Figure 213 Manually Renumbering and or Renaming Detectors to Maintain Container Configuration and QA Integrity When you are finished click on Close 272 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 5 4 1 Confirming the MCB Identification 5 4 1 1 QA To confirm that the original QA Settings are still in effect run background and sample QA measurements and check the results dialogs to confirm that the MCBs are being properly tracked 5 4 1 2 Container Configuration If the MCB Configuration program has renumbered one or more of your already configur
152. TABASE The default ISOTOPIC database file IsotopicDB mdb contains information useful for writing custom reports or for transferring to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet for further data processing The initial step in extracting data from selected tables is to initiate a Microsoft Access query This query can be used to write Access reports or to develop an Excel query derived from the Access query IsotopicDB mdb is in the Access 97 format ISOTOPIC writes to the database using tools that are compatible with that format only However any newer version of Access can be used to write a query by linking the tables into the available Access version You must furnish your own copy of Access CAUTION Do not convert the IsotopicDB mab file to a newer version of Access because ISOTOPIC will not be able to write to it after it is converted We strongly suggest that you make a copy of the original database file and manipulate or query the copy only B 1 Writing a Simple Query Enclosed is a very simple query to sort the results of information stored from the last Soil Mode measurement Consider the need to report the results of the last sample which are reported with the name of the SPC file The necessary information is found in four tables in the IsotopicDB mdb database see Table 12 Table 12 IsotopicDB mdb Tables Used for the Query Table Field Comment Nuclide Nuclides The proper nuclide is selected by linking the Nuclide ID fi
153. TE The units of measure selected here also affect the units available in the Operator program e g the Scan Control Area on the main Operator screen These units can 102 3 MENU COMMANDS be changed in the Operator program if the Allow Modification of Configuration Parameters checkbox is marked in Operator Permissions Section 3 7 2 Inner Container On the Inner Container tab Fig 74 choose a Material from the droplist The entries on this list are taken from the attenuation database which contains most common materials New materials can be added to the database as described in Section 3 5 5 3 Isotopic Settings Container lid Thickness Cortainer Wall p ls Thickness Depth Length Units Weight Units e cm C in kg C lb Inner Container Outer Container Filter Container Shape po Material SE X Depth 121 9200 cm Wall Thickness 0 2540 cm Density 1 1 gice Height 121 9200 cm Lid Thickness g soso cm Length 193 0400 cm Cancel lt Back Next gt Figure 74 Inner Container Tab Container Page If the object to be counted is not in a container e g a milling machine select None for the inner container Material 103 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual The Density is read from the database If you know that the actual density differs from the value in the database enter the known value here It will be saved for this Container Type only Enter the container dim
154. TOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual CAUTION A mistake here can affect your results by multiple orders of magnitude For instance if you wish to report total item activity but do not remove the default Kg entry from the Quantity field your results will be high by a factor of 1000 Likewise if you replace the Quantity entry with one or more blank spaces ISOTOPIC will read those spaces as characters and will assume you wish to apply a factor of 1000 Next enter a Multiplier and Divisor to scale the numbers up or down The units label is printed at the top of the activity columns on the report and should reflect the values chosen that is if pu Ci is chosen with a multiplier of 1000 then nanocuries should be entered in the Activity label field The combined label activity quantity is limited to 14 characters Surface Disk and Point Source in Container Shapes When you select either the Surface Disk or Point Source in Container shape on the Container page if either the Diameter or Depth is zero ISOTOPIC allows you to report only in activity units 1 e total activity of the item measured not concentration units 1 e activity per unit measure see Fig 78 Activity and Quantity Units Scale Factors to Reported Activity Base Activity Units S Activity label uci Multiplier 1 C Bg fe uci Quantity Label Divisor Figure 78 Activity and Quantity Units for Surface Disk and Point Source Container Shap
155. The first column shows the nuclide name These are arranged in library order The second column shows the average activity in becquerels or other units This number has been normalized by the scaling factors the decay during acquisition correction the decay during sample collection and random summing The third column shows the peak energies for each nuclide in the library order This is the library energy The next column shows the activity based only on this peak For a nuclide with only one peak this is the same as the entry in column 2 except for the normalization and correction factors The next column might contain a symbol E amp or which shows whether or not the peak passed various tests These symbols can be used to determine how to change the analysis in order to obtain better results 285 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Reported Activity based on MDA for each peak Half life in days activity this peak only i k Branching ratio TOPES UHMAR Y OF LIBRARY PEAK U AGE EPA Nuclide Average 9 X Peak Name Cod Activity Energy Activity Code MDA Value Becquerels kev Becquerels Becquerels Comments 4 E E F K 40 R 1 0193E 03 1460 83 1 019E403 1 60323E 01 4 68E 11 8 55E 00 G ENTE Sd 511 00 4 239E405 1 427E405 1 1DE 03 Library entries 1022 00 2 229E408 5 568E405 3 88E 04 C in order of library C8 134 R 3 0844E4D4
156. The peak centroid energy from the spectrum The peak centroid channel from the spectrum The low and high channel numbers for the peak region These are the beginning and end channel numbers for the background region around a single peak See also multilo hi 149 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual multilo hi Fwhm Fw10m Fw04m Area Background Counts FirstNet FirstBackground Uncertainty Abundance MDA fwpeakflag1 2 3 Lo HiWidth 150 The low and high channel numbers for the multiplet region These are the beginning and end channel numbers for the background region around the entire multiplet All peaks in the multiplet will have the same multilo hi values The full width at half maximum of the peak It is a measured value for single peaks and a calculated value for peaks in a multiplet region The full width at tenth maximum of the peak It is a measured value for single peaks and a calculated value for peaks in a multiplet region The full width at twenty fifth maximum of the peak It is a measured value for single peaks and a calculated value for peaks in a multiplet region The corrected net area of the peak For example the PBC correction could be applied to this number The corrected peak background calculated by the program The uncorrected net area of the peak The net area of the peak calculated on the first pass through the spectrum The peak background calculated by
157. This is the same format as the GammaVision CLB file and can be created with the commands on the Calibrate menu but the efficiency must be for the infinite plane geometry for the report to be meaningful NOTES Before selecting the Use File option take a point source calibration at a distance 5x the diameter of the detector and save it with the Save Calibration command under the Calibrate menu Detector crystal diameters will range from 25 mm to 85 mm depending on the efficiency of the detector If the detector crystal diameter is 50 mm then calibrate with a point source at 250 mm 25 cm The diameter of the detector crystal is given on the data sheet shipped with your detector Be sure to use the crystal diameter not the diameter of the endcap In Container Surface Mode when deciding on the detector to source distance for efficiency calibration with the calibration wizard we suggest 30 cm as a typical distance However if you position the calibration source at 5x the diameter of the detector crystal you can use the same calibration in Soil Mode and Container Surface Mode The normal height of the detector is 1 meter or 100 cm It can be placed at different heights and the software will adjust the efficiency in the DOE EML Beck method for the actual height entered here 119 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual The Energy FWHM Calibration section at the bottom of the dialog shows the current energy calibration stor
158. URANCE 1 Detector assignments in container configurations Soil Mode setup and reports Before you can assay a container with ISOTOPIC you must use the Configuration Wizard Settings Configurations to create a configuration for that particular type of container The Detectors page see Section 3 5 2 4 requires you to select and define the placement of each Detector used to measure this container type Once you have assigned a Detector to the configuration by choosing it from the Name droplist on the Detectors page all of the definition positioning data on the Detectors page will be linked to that Detector Name and will be saved in the ISOTOPIC database If the text Description for the Detector is changed when the MCB Configuration program is re run all of the configurations that use that Detector Name can no longer be employed unless they are updated with the changed Detector description string 2 Quality assurance Once you have established QA settings for those detectors and subsequently collected data using them if you then re run the MCB Configuration program for any reason you must ensure each instrument is still assigned its previous instrument number and description before collecting any more data Allowing the MCB Configuration program to assign a new instrument identification to a detector and then using that new identification interrupts the orderly accumulation of QA records This is because ISOTOPIC treats the renumbered
159. Y Unknown Peaks V Error Estimation Y MDA s and Correction Factors Y Spectrum and Interactive Plots V Print on completion Isotopic Interactive Plot No of Most Intense Peaks per Nuclide to Plot 5 enter O to show all peaks in the plot Cancel lt Back Next gt Figure 80 Report Tab Analysis Page The Reporting Options show the tables that can be included in the HTML port in the Operator program Note that these settings apply only to the standard Container Surface HTML report If 112 3 MENU COMMANDS you are using a custom Crystal Reports template to output your results that template will define the contents of your custom report The points on the Isotopic Interactive Plot are the activities relative to the key line Typically only the most intense gamma rays have meaningful data The plot can contain as many gamma rays as are defined in the library up to the number specified here Not many nuclides have more than 10 useful gamma rays The activity is based on the gamma ray count rate the detector efficiency the gamma ray yield branching ratio and attenuation Thus the gamma ray peak with the highest count rate may not be the peak with the highest activity Enter zero to plot all of the gamma rays for each nuclide HINT Be sure that the reference gamma ray is included in the No of Most Intense Peaks per Nuclide to Plot If for instance you use a setting of 5 but the reference gamma ray is the sixth most in
160. age bias supply in the DIM as delivered to the detector Detector temperature This is the detector temperature at the time the current spectrum acquisition stopped This is available only for SMART 1 detectors Live detector temperature This is the detector temperature at the current time This is available only for SMART 1 detectors This information is helpful to determine if the detector is cold enough to operate The normal operation temperature should be 88 100 K Do not ship the detector when the temperature is below 296 K Battery voltage This is the current voltage of the internal battery Battery full This is an estimate of the amount of power remaining in the battery 45 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Battery time remaining This is an estimate of the time remaining when operating the digiDART on the internal battery Presets Figure 30 shows the Presets tab MDA Properties for digiDART on middle ISO CART presets are shown on a separate tab Amplifier Amplitier2 ADC Stabilizer HighYoltage Field Data About Status Presets MDA Preset Nuclide Report The presets can only be set on a m DES Detector that is not acquiring data chius Presetin jano during acquisition the preset field 200 00 Live Time backgrounds are gray indicating that Start Chan 3012 they are inactive Any or all of the FEL Peak Width BE presets can be used at one time To Rol integra
161. ainty in percent is calculated as follows GrossCounts Background eee Uncertainty DU SNO AAA 100 etCounts Peak is the position of the maximum count and is computed with the following equation Peak MaximumROIChan EnergySlope Energylntercept 6 where MaximumROIChan is the channel in the ROI with the most counts If there are no data the center channel of the ROI is used EnergySlope and Energylntercept are the energy calibration values as entered on the digiDART keypad or by software If the values are not present the result is given in channels The setup dialog is shown in Fig 32 Add New 50 Manual Add Nuclides can be added to the list using the library to assist in the region definition or manually To add a nuclide manually enter the nuclide name ROI start and end channels multiplicative factor and units in the Report section Now click on Add New to add this nuclide to the list The units need only be entered once since they are the same for all nuclides in the table Library Add To use the library to aid in the definition select the nuclide from the library Nuclide droplist Next choose the gamma ray energy from the Energy droplist This defines the gamma ray to be used Click on the Select from Lib button in the Report section This will update all the entries in this section and show as a yellow band the region to be used in both the expanded and full spectrum views Finally click on
162. alibration and Finishing the Wizard 86 Soe ENET E Vs oret eet te se ER Dix eene Eb RR et as RS CERE 86 5 3 3 e Auto Calibra OM uo Lu dap er o A RE AEN Ree T 86 95 52 Manual Calibration ouo no Vett peter e eoo on pu 87 3 3 3 3 Easy Recalibration Using An ENT Table 90 3 3 3 4 Speeding Up Calibration with a Library o o ooooooo 90 3 3 3 5 Other Sidebar Control Menu Functions 92 3 3 3 6 Using Multiple Spectra for a Single Calibration 22 3 3 4 Recall Calibration as si a ei de 93 3395 eave Calibration A Rd 93 3 3 6 Print Calibre IE Ben E EE dis 93 SA oen bou que es eee eee pug an dele eae AE 94 DT Setups a ee ee 94 JA 2 AA A A A 94 du d SUS A E A ASA ARE 97 A ego bci hex E 98 3 43 UE a a RS S dial rh Lu C Ld Baa ag LIE 98 9 95 SEM ta E oda 99 3 5 1 General Good Practice Procedures for ISOTOPIC Measurements 99 3 5 2 Container Surface Mode Configurations 0 0 cece eee o 100 3 5 2 1 Configuration Page oo icy a dot fers Ptr E PERO outed ah ant 100 20924 2 COMP ta Du ae Eee eae eee 102 Inner Container S eese censo eee meee e ts 103 Outer Contamer ElMer Page 2o oes er vt err 104 M tik Paseo secs rr is 105 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 3 5 3 3 5 4 3 5 5 3 5 6 3 5 7 IL Analysis PAE NS DS AS 106 Analysis LADA TA rd Bee a 106 Uranium Plutonium Tab 0 0 e
163. ality assurance ooooooooooo 254 Settings MENU saa sirere oto pav ERES 99 Configurations s xx ure RE XR 100 setup analysis setup x2 us sire ais ith DRE XOU x 313 quality assurance o ooooooomoo 255 Small peaks flag Loc td x nth 318 SMART 1 detector o o o o o 43 SIMOOL tb 98 SOU Modet tes 2 acquisition and analysis setup 117 fil names 4 scc tl da 9 Stabilizer id shee ave rabia 40 O Clete TEN 51 e IO ase tei aceite Sof aeu 40 TO aded DAE Se dicat eati Ser at Ru ac 53 Start acquisition A TN 33 State of health SOH oooooooo 43 Status sidebar s ae a a lak ay 15 StdDi i siste ts eet tab e E data 311 Stop acquisition cs dra ia ias 33 SLDS air tl dns 98 stripping TaClOE s soo ena on 99 SUM daba 97 177 Suspect Ds rido als lots 154 match width in B30winds ini 318 must be in CAUSE ciu eek ue REA 154 Throuehipul 225 ea arat e oo e x RE 38 39 TIME Cons bait ck oy xa ee ro Ce Y OW e 36 Title Bat oss ied s y yat eli cc ce 13 XOOIDAE 1 oesd rs teli acta s bee 14 total summation o oo oooooo o o 184 186 Uncertainty COWES ed wire Bi see ate ae ERO GE CHEN 210 totaled Eel khoa sa ee NEAR E th 210 Uncertainty reporting 112 267 Undo Zoom ries abe vct ex 176 Units piod O Back baa e E Rcs 266 Unlock detector 26 ac vati roc week ds 167 Vertical Auto Scale 17 172 Vertical SCA iia tac ERA 202 293 A xit esti ERE 17 17
164. all to open any spectrum file with an adequate energy calibration you can also use an MCB window if you wish This will normally be the spc file for the most recent calibration which will also retrieve the FWHM calibration 2 Use the Library Select File command to load a library containing the gamma rays of interest or browse to retrieve it in the Calibration Wizard in Step 5 below 3 Select Calibrate Calibration Wizard This will display the opening screen see Fig 37 4 Click on Keep Current for the energy calibration and Create New for the efficiency calibration then click on Next 72 3 MENU COMMANDS The Efficiency Calibration Efficiency Calibration Wizard HEI Wizard screen Fig 41 will Please enter the following information for the efficiency calibration Pd If oe ps for Ce icaeFie Bios Edit F Tp ibrary Pes Next Library FAUsetGvDemo Lib Browse Edit click on the Edit button beside 5 Label the Certificate File field Tor Count Time 60 00 Seconds V Clear Data Befor Because the detector to ee Jo 00 JN source Distance is set to zero a warning message will be displayed The recommended minimum distance 1s 30 cm Click on OK A blank Certificate File Editor will Cancel Help open Fig 42 Figure 41 Click on Edit to Open a Blank Certificate File Editor Certificate File Editor Editing New Isotope Energy Activity Gammas s
165. ally increases The FWHM parameter is very important and most useful if the spectrum contains many multiplets particularly in regions where they are important to the analysis e Average FWTM ratio The sum of the ratio of each peak s measured FWTM vs its effective calibrated FWTM divided by the total number of peaks for all peaks defined in the analysis library This test check the electronic noise and pole zero adjustment of the amplifier P 2 FWTM peas FWTM E dj Average FWTM Ratio Y i where P the number of identified peaks in the spectrum FWHM weas the measured FWTM of analysis library peak x in keV FWHM gica the effective calibrated FWTM of analysis library peak x in keV The full width at tenth maximum FWTM is useful for determining if noise has suddenly entered the spectroscopy system The effect will be greater for low energy peaks than high energy peaks This test is more sensitive than the FWHM test for detecting the sudden presence of noise Neutron damage causes a low energy tail the FWTM test is a sensitive indicator of this 252 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE e Average Library Peak Energy Shift The average of the deviation of the measured peak energy from the expected peak energy for all energies defined in the analysis library y E eas Eril Average Peak Energy Shift E x 1 where E the number of identified peak energies in the spectrum Eveas the measured peak energy corresponding to
166. am See the accompanying Getting Started in ISOTOPIC v4 1 manual Part No 931065 for instructions on installing the ISOTOPIC software as well as a step by step walkthrough from configuration in the ISOTOPIC Supervisor v4 1 program through field use with ISOTOPIC Operator v4 1 1 1 What s New 1 1 1 Container Mode Enhancements As of v4 a new algorithm for increased accuracy for close in measurements additional sensitivity achieved by calibrating the side of the detector as well as the front and improved field of view FOV based on the actual detector crystal dimensions e The new Configuration Wizard for Container Surface Mode which combines analysis and report setup detector selection and position information collimator description and container characterization in one convenient wizard The resulting analysis setup called a Hagenauer R C Nondestructive Assay Quantification of Poorly Characterized Radioactive Isotopes Proceedings of the 4th Nondestructive Assay and Nondestructive Waste Characterization Conference Salt Lake City 1995 H L Beck et al In Situ Ge Li and Nal TI Gamma Ray Spectrometry U S Dept of Energy Environmental Measurements Laboratory HASL 258 September 1972 K Helfer and K M Miller Calibration Factors for Ge Detectors Used for Field Spectrometry Health Physics Vol 55 No 1 pp 15 29 1988 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual configuratio
167. ame for each scan This is one way to determine the spectrum filenames for a scan if the printed report is not available Unwanted scans can be removed by selecting the scan and clicking on Delete This will delete the data but the disk space will not be recovered unless you mark the Compress the database when the 163 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Supervisor program is closed checkbox The database will then be compacted to recover the space from deleted scans when you exit ISOTOPIC Supervisor NOTE There is no undo for a deletion Before deleting any scans from the database we strongly recommend that you make a backup copy of your database Scans are listed in ascending order oldest scan first according to ID To reverse the sort mark the Most recent scan first checkbox By default the short spectrum filenames are listed To display the complete path and filename for each scan unmark the Short file name box To remove a scan from the database click on the scan to highlight it then click on Delete To remove more than scan at a time use lt Shift Left click gt to highlight a contiguous block of scans or lt Ctrl Left click gt to highlight several different scans then click on Delete To close the dialog click Exit Purge scans Isotopic 208 liter drum Water Filter Isotopic LWS Config 1 Isotopic LWS ConfigO1 Isotopic LWS Config Isotopic LWS ConfigO1 Isotopic LWS Config Isotopic LWS
168. ameters are expressed in ratios as follows N A is the total absorption peak count rate cpm in the spectrum at the energy of a f p p p gy particular nuclide y transition per unit inventory Bq m or concentration Bq g of that nuclide in the soil N N is the angular correction factor of the detector at that energy for a given source No g gy g distribution in the soil N D isthe peak count rate cpm per unit uncollided flux y cm s for a parallel beam of 0 pm p p gamma rays of the same energy that is incident normal to the detector face The cm units refer to area of the detector crystal D A isthe total uncollided flux y cm s at that energy arriving at the detector per unit inventory or concentration of the nuclide in the soil Information Needed This method of estimating calibration factors for use in evaluating in situ requires that information about the detector being used and the assumed profile distribution s for radionuclides of interest be supplied This is done in the Settings Configurations dialogs This information is specific to implementation of Beck s method 237 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual e Detector Efficiency expressed as e Detector Orientation up or down crystal length L Detector Aspect Ratio calculated by 5 crystal diameter D Assumed Deposition Profile Parameter a p value s NOTE a p is assume
169. and buffer Change vertical scale so that spectrum peaks are smaller Change vertical scale so that spectrum peaks are larger Narrow the horizontal scale Widen the horizontal scale Reset both horizontal and vertical scaling to view complete spectrum Zoom out Zoom in Center expanded display on cursor Switch to logarithmic vertical scale Switch to auto vertical scale Mark the peak region around the cursor as an ROI Clear the ROL Shift the compare spectrum upwards Shift the compare spectrum downwards Start acquisition in selected Detector Stop acquisition in selected Detector Clear data in selected Detector Copy data in the selected Detector to the buffer Switch between displaying selected Detector and buffer Decrease amplifier fine gain by smallest increment where supported Decrease amplifier fine gain by several increments Increase amplifier fine gain by smallest increment Increase amplifier fine gain by several increments Capture screen to Windows Clipboard 6 KEYBOARD FUNCTIONS If the horizontal scale is expanded when the marker reaches the edge of the spectrum window the next key press past the edge shifts the window to the next block of channels in that direction such that the marker is now in the center of the display 6 2 2 Next ROI Shift gt gt lt Shift gt The Shift gt gt or Shift gt move the marker to the beginning of the next higher channel ROL or the
170. and the message is printed out The maximum number of half lives can be changed from 12 to another value in B30winds ini Section A 1 3 Twelve half lives corresponds to a decay factor of about 4000 209 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 4 6 2 Peaked Background Correction The Peaked Background Correction PBC is used in Container Surface Mode to correct for the presence of a nuclide in the background spectrum that also occurs in the sample If the nuclide is not of interest in the analysis results there is no need to make this correction The correction subtracts peak counts in the background spectrum from the peak counts in the sample The PBC values in the PBC table are the counts per second at each library energy These values are subtracted from the counts per second values of the sample spectrum before the above corrections The PBC value is added to the background and the new error is calculated by multiplying the percent error by the ratio of the uncorrected area to the corrected area This method improves on older PBC methods because the peak count rates are stored in the PBC table for each energy in the spectrum and not the average rate for a nuclide This removes the dependence on the efficiency calibration in the PBC table yielding more accurate results because the nuclides in the background are not in the same geometry as the sample meaning that the efficiency calibration is not the one to be used The subt
171. ans R radius of the detector cm d distance from the calibration point source to the detector cm full energy peak efficiency of the detector at distance d n number of gamma rays detected at the full energy peak from the source N number of gamma rays emitted at the full energy peak from the source full energy peak intrinsic efficiency 221 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Note that in order to compute the intrinsic efficiency the diameter of the detector crystal is needed A working detector has a dead layer of germanium and an aluminum end cap to house the detector Attenuation by the can and dead layer of germanium must be taken into account for realistic detector characterization See Fig 182 Now the intrinsic peak efficiency for a realistic detector can be determined as shown in Eqn 98 dead layer of Ge X Al endcap Detector HERI Figure 182 HPGe Detector with a Dead Layer of Germanium and Aluminum Endcap Qe th 96 C e Hala 97 E 4T P SS 5 98 T CCo s i2 l attenuation correction factor for the aluminum end cap linear attenuation coefficient for the aluminum end cap cm aluminum end cap thickness cm attenuation correction factor for the dead layer of germanium linear attenuation coefficient for germanium cm thickness of the germanium dead layer cm full energy peak intrinsic efficiency for the front of the detector POE AE
172. are 206 4 5 2 3 Method 3 Suppress MDA Output 00 00000 206 4 5 2 4 Method 4 KTA Rule AAA SAA 206 4 5 2 5 Method 5 Japan 2 Sigma Limit 0 0 20 00 0 ea ee 206 4 5 2 6 Method 6 Japan 3 Sigma Limit 0 0 2 0 00 0c 206 4 5 2 7 Method 7 Currie Limits oca ties 207 4 5 2 8 Method 8 RISO MDA ubiera 207 4 5 2 9 Method 9 JAsD OR TEC Sab ds 207 4 5 2 10 Method 10 Peak Area sees Sb PLA APER GA lle 207 4 5 2 11 Method 11 Air Monitor GIMRAD also called DIN 25 482 Method er i hee a os ue tuts ee rd 207 4 5 2 12 Method 12 Regulatory Guide 4 16 o ooooo 208 4 5 2 13 Method 13 Counting Lab USA lesus 208 4 5 2 14 Method 14 Erkennungsgrenze Detection Limit DIN 25 482 5 208 4 5 2 15 Method 15 Nachweisgrenze DIN 25 482 5 208 4 5 2 16 Method 16 EDF France ooooooooooononmm oros 209 4 5 2 17 Method 17 NUREG 0472 vier ex ee Sic e Ex EXE RES 209 2 5 3 Peak Area dle o we wie e RECEN diea bond aed Rb glen we Dude oe we 209 COPECO TOLLS ad IS A A ea ah is 209 4 0 1 Decay COIeCDOD heen ais S e p P ae a ina 209 4 6 2 Peaked Background Correction 0000 cece eee eens 210 Reported Uca A A wo aus at 210 4 7 1 Total Uncertainty Estrato 59 yas ek oe PSS tN OS raw eh Se yh ee ERS ERES 210 ix ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 4 7 2 Counting Uncertainty Estimate va iS HRS EN CERE EE 211 4 7
173. are the same Detector Name which could cause confusion when designating the Detector s to be used in the Configuration dialogs refer to Fig 81 page 114 5 5 Quality Assurance Example This section discusses how to set up QA for a new detector in ISOTOPIC then perform background and check source measurements for the detector L 274 From the detector droplist on the Toolbar select the MCB with the new detector This MCB will now be displayed in the active spectrum window We will assume that our check source was calibrated at 1 0 uCi of Co activity and 2 0 uCi of Cs activity on June 27 2000 The total expected activity measured today and decay corrected back to the calibration date is 3 0 uCi We will count the source in the same position for 10 minutes each day to verify that the detector efficiency and calibration have not changed It is unlikely that the actual detector efficiency has changed but the calibration file might have changed or electronic noise might be interfering with the spectrum collection We will count background for 120 seconds to verify that the detector is not contaminated If the detector were contaminated with the same isotopes as in the QA source the QA activity would also be incorrect Use the ISOTOPIC Library Editor on the Library menu to prepare a QA library containing only Co and Cs and save it the library as QA 1ib Select Acquire QA Settings to display the Quality Assurance Settings dial
174. as 8 2 0 Activity range factor The multiplier used in the test to determine if the secondary gamma lines should be included in the activity average for the nuclide T T Perform activity range test F means to include all peaks in activity average except those marked not in average which means it ignores the range test T T Print 0 area peaks F suppresses the printing of peaks with zero area which are normally printed in ISOENV32 T T Print 0 activity isotopes F suppresses the printing of library energies in the peak table for those nuclides with zero activity 0 0 Min step background energy Sets the lower limit for the use of stepped background for multiplets It is normally set to zero energy T T Do fraction test on all peaks F disables the fraction limit test F T Use all narrow peaks in act If T the narrow peak flag is not used to reject peaks from the activity calculation T T Print 0 act peaks in nuclide table F suppresses printing in the nuclide table of nuclides not found The normal case for ISOWAN32 is to print all nuclides in the library T T Use peak cutoff F ignores the peak sensitivity cutoff and uses all peaks for activity calculation 2 F Second MDA type T Calculate Specifies a second MDA type to be calculated and stored in the uro file It is transferred to the database by Report Writer but is not printed on the normal ISOTOPIC report 319 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervi
175. as shown in Fig 13 3 1 1 Settings The File Settings dialog Fig 14 allows you to specify the directories for all the major file types used by ISOTOPIC including libraries calibrations reports and spectra To change the path Location of a particular File Type click on the desired file type to highlight it then click on Modify This will open a standard file recall dialog Choose a new path and click on Open Settings Recall Save Bs Print Compare Exit About Isotopic Figure 13 File Menu When all path changes have been completed click on OK to use them or Cancel to retain the previous settings The Start Up directory can be File Settings changed if you wish to move the u f irectories entire NUser directory to another location such as a different drive or pum re a folder under My Documents C User Y Context Files CAU seriCxt5204 Spectra CAU ser ROI Files C User The Context Files cxt contain Libraries CAUse detector and analysis information Reports C User Table Files CAU sers that should not be edited generally Sample Types C User Calibrations C User reserved for factory use The Spectra directory contains the Modify spectrum files and their corresponding analysis and report files SPC An1 SPE CHN RPT and HTML Figure 14 File Type Locations The ROI Files directory contains the files ROT for the ROI presets 28 3
176. ase must be re created in the new database Attenuation Coefficient Wizard New material Enter the name of the new material IF a chemical Formula is entered the Wizard will parse it to create a list of elements used in calculating the coefficients Use upper and lower case when entering the elements IF your material is a mixture whose composition by weight is known do not enter the chemical formula Name Molybdenum I Chemical Formula Cancel lt Back Next gt Figure 98 Enter the Element Name but No Chemical Formula 133 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Click on Next to go to the Size page Fig 99 Attenuation Coefficient Wizard Size For a new element enter both the atomic weight of the element and the density of the material For compounds or mixed matrices enter only the compound matrix density and use the default atomic weight Density 10 28 g cc Weight 42 au Cancel lt Back Next gt Finish Figure 99 Enter the Density and Atomic Number Enter the Density and Weight At this point click on Finish rather than continuing through the wizard the remaining screens of which are not used when adding a new element The wizard will return you to the main Attenuation Materials screen which will display the new entry you have created Fig 100 To complete the table of energies and mass attenuation coefficients click on Edit and follow the instructions in Section 3 5 5 1
177. ave this capability Allow MCB Settings Modifications is to allow the operator to use the MCB Properties dialogs to make changes to the MCB Under normal circumstances this is not needed The operator still has control over the high voltage detector bias and the presets even if this permission is unmarked 3 7 3 Change Password The Supervisor program can be protected by a password so that it will not operate if the correct password is not entered If no password is set the dialog will not be displayed When you select this command the dialog shown in 2 x Fig 147 opens Enter the password twice to confirm OO the correct entry Verification Cancel Password for Isotopic Supervisor NOTE There is no master password If you lose the password contact your ORTEC repre sentative or the Global Service Center for assistance Figure 147 Supervisor Password Entry 3 7 4 Lock Unlock Detectors This facility will protect a Detector from destructive access e g Start Stop Clear by any program on the PC or network While any program can view the data and read the contents on any Detector in the system locked or unlocked the contents of a locked Detector cannot be changed without knowing the password NOTE There is no master password If you lose the password contact your ORTEC representative or the Global Service Center for assistance in unlocking the detector If the Detector is currently un
178. bel Co 60 Count Time 1000 00 Seconds IV Clear Data Before Start Distance 30 00 cm coca to Figure 46 Create a New Efficiency Calibration To view or change the contents of the library click on the adjacent Edit button This will open the ISOTOPIC Library Editor which is discussed in Section 3 6 3 page 155 77 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Enter the Source Label The description you enter here will be used immediately before acquisition to tell you which source to put on the detector To use the spectrum currently in the MCB unmark the Clear Data Before Start box This is useful if the same source is used for both energy and efficiency calibration If the Count Time for the energy calibration spectrum is not long enough for the efficiency calibration you can enter a longer efficiency calibration count time and unmark the Clear Data box Data collection will then continue for the additional time NOTE If at the end of acquisition not enough counts have accumulated for a good efficiency calibration you can acquire additional data by moving Back through the wizard to this screen increasing the Count Time leaving the Clear Data Before Start box unmarked and starting the additional acquisition The acquisition must be long enough to accumulate well formed peaks with low counting uncertainty Finally enter the detector to source Distance in cm NOTE If you enter a Distance of zero ISOTOPIC
179. bel to include the name of Insert Eu 152 Paste hoe the cut nuclide This is illustrated for K in Fig 117 Nuclide Cut K 40 Rearranging a PBC List Figure 117 Cut Nuclide is DS Ready to Paste Nuclides can be rearranged in the Pac file list by cutting and pasting them into a different location To move a nuclide to a new position in the list highlight the nuclide to be moved Cut it from the list locate the nuclide immediately below the desired new position and click once on that nuclide to highlight it then click on the Paste button which will be labeled with the name of the Cut nuclide The Cut nuclide will be inserted in the space above the highlighted nuclide Several nuclides can be cut at one time from the list then pasted back into the list into a different order Cut nuclides remain queued up for pasting last one first according to the nuclide name on the Paste button To move a nuclide to the end of the PBC list Cut the nuclide from the list highlight the end entry and click on the Paste button Peak Editing When a nuclide is selected in the working sc file the right half of the Edit PBC dialog shows the peak list Note the column headers Rank Energy and C P S To sort the peak list by a particular parameter in the list click on the appropriate header To edit a peak either double click on the peak in the right hand list or click once on it then click on the Edit button This will
180. ble change as performed with the and lt gt keys If true single channel motions are required the display must be expanded as described above In addition to changing the scaling of the spectrum the colors of the various spectrum features e g background spectrum ROIs can be changed using the Display menu 2 2 The Toolbar The row of buttons below the Menu Bar provides convenient shortcuts to some of the most common ISOTOPIC menu functions S The Recall button retrieves an existing spectrum file This is the equivalent of selecting File Recall from the menu E Save copies the currently displayed spectrum to disk It duplicates the menu function File Save As 16 2 DISPLAY FEATURES e Start Acquisition starts data collection in the active Detector This duplicates Acquire Start and lt Alt 1 gt Name Stop Acquisition stops data collection in the active Detector This duplicates Acquire Stop and lt Alt 2 gt E p Clear Spectrum clears the Detector or file spectrum in the active window This duplicates Acquire Clear and Alt 3 gt ES Mark ROI automatically marks an ROI in the active spectrum at the marker position according to the criteria in Section 3 8 2 This duplicates lt Insert gt MK Clear ROI removes the ROI mark from the channels of the peak currently selected with the marker This duplicates ROI Clear and Delete The next section of the Toolbar Fig 3 contains the buttons
181. ble clicking on a library peak will cause the spectrum cursor to jump to the channel corresponding to that energy If the calibration as it now stands is not sufficiently accurate the channel corresponding to that energy could be off by a channel or two If this is not the correct peak channel move the cursor to the correct channel click once on the library peak and press Enter To exit the calibration function click on the Energy Calibration Sidebar Close button This will close the calibration function and the new calibration will be held in memory available for 81 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual subsequent spectra gathered on this Detector To save the calibration to disk select Calibrate Save Calibration Other Sidebar Control Menu Functions The remaining items on the sidebar control menu are Move Close Restore Clear Table and Destroy Destroy clears all energy calibration values Restore reinstates the internal energy calibration table to the values stored when the calibration function was entered Clear table erases all the values in the table but retains the function energy and FWHM to be used when the next values are entered In this way a recalibration can be done without manual entry of any points Close exits the Energy calibration function and saves the current calibration as the working calibration 3 3 2 6 Editing the Efficiency Calibration From the Finish Calibration Wizard scre
182. boratory Radiochemistry Lab region in energy Figure 225 Summary of Nuclides in Sample The total activity is the scaled sum of the decay corrected activity if present or the time of count activity The MDA values are not included in the total 288 6 KEYBOARD FUNCTIONS This chapter describes the ISOTOPIC accelerator keys 6 1 Introduction Table 7 provides a quick reference to all of the ISOTOPIC keyboard and keypad functions which are discussed in more detail in the remainder of the chapter The accelerators operate only in the active window The Title Bar must be highlighted with the active title bar color as set up in Windows Control Panel In addition the cursor must be in the active spectrum window Similar to other Windows applications the focus can be switched between ISOTOPIC and other applications by clicking on the Windows Taskbar pressing lt Alt Tab gt or if the inactive window is visible pointing with the mouse at some spot in the inactive window and clicking The multi key functions such as lt Alt 1 gt or lt Shift gt gt are executed by holding down the first key e g Alt Shift or lt Ctrl gt while pressing the key that follows the sign in the brackets then releasing both keys simultaneously Functions that use the keypad keys begin with the word Keypad e g Keypad lt 5 gt As usual for any Windows application the menus are accessed by clicking on them with the
183. but you still must click on OK When you archive a particular ISOTOPIC database we strongly recommend you move not only the mDB database file but all of the analysis spectrum bitmap and reporting files related to the records in that database Subsequently these should all be stored in the same folder or in the same relationship relative folder structure as when they were originally acquired Otherwise the Recall File and Recall Configuration and File s commands might not be able to correctly recall all the necessary information and existing Container Surface Mode HTML reports might not show the embedded spectrum and fine tuning plot images 3 7 1 2 Select Database This function Fig 142 lets you select a Select Access Database File new target database for use in both the Look in ES User gt es E Supervisor and Operator programs Note Clean database 6 srs60xxxdaugh Mdb that the configuration attenuation and Cacxts20 Y srs6Dxxxecal Mdb y f Y cvDemo Mdb Y srs4275 1417 Mdb collimator records are included in the amp cvQa32 Mdb amp srsa275ecal Mdb database and can be different for each 5 Libo Mdb S OrtecDB mdb database 3 7 1 3 Purge Scans File name E i Database y This function displays the analysis records ooo n A in the ISOTOPIC database as shown in Figure 142 Select a Database Fig 143 All of the scans in the database are displayed by scan ID Also shown is the spectrum filen
184. can be made from the background spectrum analysis results UFO file In this process the background count rates are extracted from the analysis results file and inserted in a PBC file To do this open the control menu and click on Show Background Analysis This will open a standard file open dialog Select the correct uro file and click on Open The list of nuclides in the analysis will be displayed to the left of the PBC Table see Fig 115 If no peaks are shown none were in the analysis file possibly because they were all outside the energy analysis range 143 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Adding Nuclides There are two Insert buttons at the bottom of the PBC nuclide list Insert which is for manually specifying the nuclide and the button below it which will be labeled with the name of the nuclide selected in the analysis results list when no nuclide is selected this button is labeled Insert Copy GyDemo UFO 7 x Editing Pbctable pbc i 2l x Creation 10 13 93 1 09 40 PM Bal31 Edition 11 13 97 4 42 18 PM Peaks Rank Enerq CP 496 30 0 10427 123 80 0 17319 133 60 0 34533 216 10 0 15341 373 20 0 06330 486 50 1 44098 co Cn amp Co N Se E dit Cut Insert Figure 115 The List of Analysis Nuclides left and the PBC Table right To automatically add an analysis nuclide to the PBC list go to the analysis results list and click once on the nuclide of
185. ciency curve as described in Section 3 3 2 6 Simply click on Cancel to close the Calibration Wizard If you entered this dialog while working within the Calibration Wizard you will be returned to the setup screen for the efficiency calibration so you can continue with the process go to Section 3 3 2 3 Manual Efficiency Calibration To perform a completely manual calibration 1 Use File Recall to open any spectrum file with an adequate energy calibration you can also use an MCB window if you wish This will normally be the spc file for the most recent calibration which will also retrieve the FWHM calibration ISOTOPIC includes several suitable demonstration spectra such as GvDemo SPC 2 Select Calibrate Calibration Wizard This will display the opening screen see Fig 37 3 Click on Keep Current for both the energy and efficiency calibrations then click on Next 4 The Finish Calibration Dialog will open see Fig 49 on page 80 Click on the Edit Efficiency button This will open the Efficiency Calibration Sidebar Efficiency Table and Efficiency Graph as shown in Fig 44 5 On the Efficiency Calibration Sidebar click on the icon in the upper left of the title bar to open the control menu as illustrated in Fig 45 then select Destroy The Efficiency Graph 75 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual and Table windows will close but the spectrum buffer window and Efficiency Calibration Sidebar wil
186. ckground plus a Gaussian peak shape The five parameters are peak amplitude peak centroid and a quadratic background function The initial values and uncertainties are taken from the spectrum The fit is iterated until the reduced chi square for the fit changes by less than 1 from the previous iteration up to a maximum of 10 iterations Most cases will converge in 3 to 4 iterations If the fit fails the peak values are set to the total summation values If the fit converges the background and peak area are calculated from the fit values 4 1 3 Example Peak Area 4 1 3 1 Total Summation Method Again refer to Figs 167 and 168 and Table 4 to calculate the background for this peak Substituting in the above formulas yields Background area A 2311 2276 1 2 29 432 and Net area 18143 432 17711 30 4 1 3 2 Directed Fit Method A section of a spectrum with a negative peak is shown in Fig 171 The raw data values and the generated fit are shown In this case the background at the low energy end of the peak is 1170 counts per channel and on the high end is 1173 counts per channel This gives a total background of 35145 counts and the net peak of 133 counts 186 4 ANALYSIS METHODS ial i d Fitted Peak and Background Figure 171 Example of Directed Fit Since these values are derived from a fitting process it is difficult to redo the calculations manually 4 1 4 Peak Uncertainty The counting s
187. close geometry analysis can be used to measure items close to the detector while the far field approximation can be used to measure items with larger detector to collimator distances The close geometry calculation includes detector characterization information and is generally considered more accurate than far field analysis You should validate the best method for your application See Table 9 Table 9 Analysis Selection QEDOverride Flag Change to 2 to use the far field analysis method at all distances greater than QEDDetectorSourceDistance UseMonteCarloCalculation PRA Reserved QEDDetectorSourceDistance cm 1000 Distance from the detector face above which the far field method will be implemented For example If you wanted to use close geometry at a standoff distance of 20 cm or less and the far field method at standoff distance greater than 20 cm set QEDO verride flag to 2 and the QEDDetectorSourceDistance to 20 Analysis can be accelerated by reducing the number of voxels used to follow the gamma ray path to the detector This might be necessary if the spectrum has a large number of peaks or if the computer speed is 1 GHz Table 10 Voxel D Default Comment ContainerHeightSegments Container is divided into of segments of height for both box and cylinder ContainerAngularSegments ME MH MM Me Cylinder container pie shaped segments ContainerLengthSegments UE Segment number length for a box Att
188. come the working library and PBC files respectively The ROIs saved in an noz file are read and the regions set To drag and drop open ISOTOPIC and Windows Explorer and display both together on the screen Locate a file in Explorer such as GvbpEMo ROI Now click and hold the left mouse button move the mouse along with the file ghost to the ISOTOPIC window and release the mouse button The Rot file will be read and the regions set 2 6 Associated Files When ISOTOPIC is installed it registers the spectrum files in Windows so they can be opened from Windows Explorer by double clicking on the filename The spectrum files are displayed in GVPlot These files are marked with a spectrum icon ffr in the Explorer display The EFT and ENT files are also registered and have an ORTEC icon zz They open in Windows Notepad 22 2 DISPLAY FEATURES 2 7 Editing Many of the text entry fields in the ISOTOPIC dialogs support the Windows Undo editing functions on the right mouse button menu Use these functions to copy Cut text from field to field with ease as well as from program to program Position LM the mouse pointer in the text field and click the right mouse button to open the Paste menu shown in Fig 12 Select a function from the menu with the left mouse Delete button Select Al Figure 12 Right Mouse Button Menu for Dialogs 23 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 24 3 MENU COMMANDS
189. correct calculation of the peak background near peak multiplets and for determination of the peak centroids for deconvolution of multiplets not in the library The stepped background test compares the background above the peak area to the background of the peak area see Background for Multiplets Section 4 2 1 The peak search method is based on the method proposed by Mariscotti In this method it is assumed that the spectrum C n is continuous and the background is independent of channel number in the vicinity of a peak This implies that the second derivative is zero for background regions and non zero in the peak regions In order to reduce the effect of statistical fluctuations the smoothed second difference is used see Fig 172 191 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Second Difference Spectrum Figure 172 Second Difference The second difference can be represented as 2j C n Y kC n j i 35 i 0 where k the smoothed second difference weighting functions 2j 1 the smoothing width The peaks are located where the second derivative varies significantly from zero A typical gamma ray spectrum is shown in Fig 173 This gamma ray spectrum is far from the ideal spectrum of a well formed peak on a smooth background Shown are seven features that can be distinguished and accounted for in the peak detection algorithm 1 The full energy photopeak that results from the complete capture of a
190. ctrum File Name Add Descriptions in Spectrum File None C Sample C Detector Auto Load UFO When this feature is turned on a checkmark is E DK displayed beside the command recalling a spectrum file also recalls the corresponding uFo file if it shares the same filename and drive folder location as the spectrum file Note that if the analysis captured in the uFo file covers only part of the spectrum that portion of the spectrum rather than the entire spectrum will initially be displayed in the Expanded Spectrum View Figure 236 Compose the Plot Title 7 1 3 4 ROI The ROI menu Fig 237 works in conjunction with the Mark ROI ROL and Clear Active ROI commands on the right mouse button menu Of Section 7 1 4 Modify Active ROI Clear Clear All Modify Active ROVOff ISI This enables the Modify Active ROI mode which lets you use the MEME arrow keys lt gt and lt gt to add more channels to the currently active EOD The ROI click inside the ROI to activate it Pressing the left arrow shifts the low energy boundary of the ROI to the left and pressing the right arrow shifts the high energy side to the right this shift might take a moment to occur As the you adjust the size of the ROI the ROI boundary and ROI Bars if currently displayed see Section 7 1 4 8 shifts and the Marker Information Line updates accordingly When you select Off the left right arrow keys return
191. ctrum View Either the ZDT LTC or ERR label appears in the Full Spectrum View This function is duplicated by lt F3 gt For more detailed information on ZDT mode see Section 3 2 8 4 3 2 8 MCB Properties ORTEC CONNECTIONS 32 applications use a uniform data acquisition setup dialog called Properties In ISOTOPIC the Properties dialog opens when you select the Acquire MCB Properties command The Detector most often used with ISOTPIC is the digiDART its hardware parameter setup dialogs are described here ISOTOPIC will operate with any ORTEC CONNECTIONS MCB To see the Properties dialogs for our other CONNECTIONS compliant MCBs see the ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual Depending on the currently selected MCB the Properties dialog displays several tabs of hardware controls including ADC setup parameters acquisition presets high voltage controls amplifier gain adjustments gain and zero stabilizers pole zero and other shaping controls and access to the InSight Virtual Oscilloscope In addition the Status tab for certain MCBs monitors conditions such as detector status charge remaining on batteries and the number of spectra collected in remote mode Find your Detector s setup section here or in the MCB Properties Manual move from tab to tab and set your hardware parameters then click on Close Note that as you enter characters in the data entry fields the characters will be underlined until you move to
192. ctrum window are printed Use the Print dialog Fig 17 to print the output or save it in a disk file click on Print to file to mark it Click on Properties to change print options such as paper orientation and resolution The data are formatted at seven channels per line with the channel number on the left 30 3 MENU COMMANDS Printer Name R amp D HP LaserJet P2015 Series POL6 y Properties i Status Ready Type HP LaserJet P2015 Series PCL 6 Where Bldg 4 R amp D Comment Print to file OK Cancel Figure 17 Print Spectrum 3 1 5 Compare This function displays a spectrum from disk Buffer pad 1 m1 An1 bkgarea a Spc along with the active spectrum so the two can be visually compared When you select Compare a standard file recall dialog box opens When you select the desired spectrum file the active spectrum window shows both spectra as illustrated in Fig 18 Note that the spectra in this illustration are displayed in Fill All mode in which all of the area under the peaks is filled with a color different from the back ground see Display Preferences Fill All Section 3 9 8 1 For instruments that support ZDT mode both spectra live time corrected LTC or uncertainty ERR and ZDT are compared Normal refers to LTC or ERR Corrected refers to ZDT Use lt F3 gt to switch between Normal and Corrected for both spectra that is to show Normal Normal or Corrected Correc
193. cy button at the top of the dialog and the calculated efficiency will be entered in the field beside the button If this value is acceptable click on OK to save the input and efficiency values and leave the worksheet The graphs and tables will now be displayed Select the next peak and repeat the process The Date and Time will default to the previously entered values but the Nuclide Half Life and Activity must be entered for each energy As each peak above the minimum Efficiency Calculation Worksheet Lx needed is entered the table and B graph will update and new fits will Calculate Efficiency be made The fitting mode can be changed at any time to see how Assay from Certificate Date Date 6 7 91 9 37 33 AM the various functions model the xi iod m Peak Measured from Spectrum Spe mE CPS 127 63 data Note that for a quadratic fit fco commos t E a linear fit is made for one or two je M Activit ars Half Life 1925 1801 Days points and a quadratic fit is not i i Uncertainty 5 0000 Gammas 100d 9 9982E 0 done until three points are entered For a polynomial fit no fit is made until five points are entered From Library IV Co 60 Figure 53 Efficiency Calculation Worksheet The knee energy is changed by clicking on the Knee button in the calibration sidebar This will open the Knee dialog Fig 54 which displays the energy value for the knee T
194. d NOTE This command does not erase the spectra from the Detector 3 2 6 1 The Detective s MCA Mode Conversion Gain Setting Affects Downloaded and Moved Spectrum Size Spectra acquired on the standalone Detective always contain 8192 channels of data However when you switch the Detective to MCA Mode and connect to a PC the conversion gain can be set from 512 to 16384 channels If the conversion gain is set at other than 8192 channels be sure to set it back to 8192 before downloading or moving spectra from the Detective Otherwise the resulting spectra as saved on the PC will contain the same number of channels as the current conversion gain setting Thus if the conversion gain is set at 1024 channels when the Acquire Download Spectra command is issued the spectra saved on the PC will be missing the data from channels 1024 through 8191 Similarly if you Move a spectrum when the conversion gain is 1024 only the first 1024 channels of data will be displayed in the buffer window 34 3 MENU COMMANDS 3 2 7 ZDT Display Select This command is active only when the current Detector supports ZDT mode for instance DSPEC series instruments and is operating in one of the zero dead time ZDT modes The ZDT mode is selected on the ADC tab under Acquire MCB Properties When the instrument is in a ZDT mode two spectra are collected this selects which spectrum to display The spectrum is labeled in the upper right corner of the Full Spe
195. d N i 1 12 126 No a p c Substituting we find N E Heus ore 127 No 2 a p 0 3 Rounding to the nearest hundredth we get Ne 1 10 128 No a p 0 3 4 14 1 3 Calculation of Peak Count Rate Per Unit Uncollided Flux N is energy dependent and is obtained by counting a gamma emitting point source placed one meter from the face of the detector Beck has shown that when experimentally determined and plotted as a function of energy in a log log plot the data points for N within the energy range of 200 keV to 3 MeV make a reasonable straight line fit possible Therefore any energy in this range conforms well to the following equation 244 4 ANALYSIS METHODS No In a bInE 129 o where E the energy of the gamma line of interest in MeV and a and b are detector dependent constants By standardizing the manufacturer s quoted efficiency as a reference point Beck determined the following relationships a 2 689 0 4996 In e 0 0969 In e 130 and b 1 315 0 02044 e 0 00012 e 131 where is the manufacturer s measured efficiency 96 of the Ge detector relative to a 3 x 3 in Nal TI detector For example given Detector efficiency 30 E 2 5 MeV a 2 689 0 4996 In 30 0 0969 In 30 5 5092 b 1 315 0 02044 30 0 00012 30 0 8098 Upon substitution we find N n 5 5092 0 8098 In 2 5 132 No In 4 7672 133
196. d CPS Acceptance Limit Low Background CPS Excursion Warning Level High Background CPS Excursion Warning Level Max Background CPS Acceptance Limit Min Total Activity Acceptance Limit Low Total Activity Excursion Warning Level High Total Activity Excursion Warning Level Max Total Activity Acceptance Limit Min Average Peak Shift Acceptance Limit Low Average Peak Shift Warning Level High Average Peak Shift Warning Level Max Average Peak Shift Acceptance Limit Min Average FWHM Ratio Acceptance Limit Low Average FWHM Ratio Warning Level High Average FWHM Ratio Warning Level Max Average FWHM Ratio Acceptance Limit Min Average FWTM Ratio Acceptance Limit Low Average FWTM Ratio Warning Level High Average FWTM Ratio Warning Level Max Average FWTM Ratio Acceptance Limit User name last entered on the Analysis tab under Settings Configurations at start of latest measurement C 2 2 Application Information Table One of these tables for entire database one record for ISOTOPIC Field Name ModelNumber SerialNumber AppName AppVersion Laboratory SOL Data Type SQL LONG SQL CHAR 32 SQL CHAR 16 SQL CHAR SQL CHAR 64 Description Product Model No i e 66 Product Serial No Application Name i e ISOTOPIC Version Revision i e 2 22 or greater Laboratory name entered under ISOTOPIC system dialog C 2 3 M d Measurements Table s Where d is the detector number in decimal from the Detector
197. d QA File Sequence number entered in Fig 215 u have now completed a OA setup and system verification and have stored the results in the OA database 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 5 6 Creating the QA Database Figure 217 shows the first wizard screen Mark the second radio button User Data Source Applies to this machine only Click on Next The second wizard screen is shown in Fig 218 Leave the highlight on the first entry Microsoft Access Driver mcb then click on Next Create New Data Source Select a type of data source C File Data Source Machine independent eid C System Data Source Applies to this machine only Selecting File Data Source creates a file based data source which is shareable between all users with access to the database Bact Cancel Figure 217 First QA Database Wizard Screen Create New Data Source Select a driver for which you want to set up a data source Name Version Microsoft Access Driver I mdb 3 50 360200 Microsc Microsoft dBase Driver dbf 3 50 360200 Microsc Microsoft Excel Driver xls 3 50 360200 Microsc Microsoft FoxPro Driver dbf 3 50 360200 Microsc Microsoft Text Driver txt csv 3 50 360200 Microsc SQL Server 2 65 0213 Microsc gt Advanced lt Back Cancel Figure 218 Second QA Database Wizard Screen 277 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Figure 219 sh
198. d by the Vertical Auto Scale button on the Toolbar 296 6 KEYBOARD FUNCTIONS 6 5 3 Center Keypad lt 5 gt Keypad lt 5 gt forces the marker to the center of the screen by shifting the spectrum without moving the marker from its current channel This is duplicated by the Center button on the Toolbar For more information see Section 3 9 6 6 5 4 Zoom In Zoom Out Keypad lt gt lt gt Keypad lt gt adjusts the scale of both axes in the Expanded Spectrum View so the peaks appear larger while Keypad lt gt does the opposite making the peaks look smaller The scale value for both axes is always shown on the Toolbar These functions are duplicated by the Zoom In Zoom Out Toolbar buttons and the Zoom In and Zoom Out commands on the Display menu see Sections 3 9 4 and 3 9 5 respectively 6 5 5 Fine Gain Keypad lt Alt gt lt Alt gt These accelerators step the internal amplifier up or down by one increment of fine gain on the selected Detector 1f 1t has a software controlled amplifier The new fine gain setting 1s shown on the Supplemental Information Line at the bottom of the screen If the gain stabilizer is active the display of the histogram data might not change The fine gain can also be set on the Amplifier under Acquire MCB Properties Section 3 2 8 with Keypad lt Shift Alt gt Shift Alt gt and with keyboard Alt gt lt Alt gt and Shift Alt gt lt Shift Alt gt
199. d fit negative peak areas option is available V V More sensitive in finding small and or misshapen peaks Y Displays all possible library nuclide matches and calculated activity for all Y 250 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE CAUTION Running the MCB Configuration program can affect the continuity of your QA measurements in ISOTOPIC Be sure to read Section 5 4 5 1 Introduction The accuracy and reproducibility of results of a data acquisition system should be verified on a periodic basis Quality Assurance QA in ISOTOPIC supplies a means for doing this in accordance with ANSI N13 30 and N42 14 The detector shield background detector efficiency peak shape and peak drift can be tracked with warning and acceptance limits The latter use a check source These results are stored in the ISOTOPIC database GvQa32 mdb and can be displayed and charted The database can be accessed with commercially available database products including Microsoft Access Determine ahead of time which tests are important in deciding when the system should be shut down for maintenance All of the tests provide important information but a change of system response in a particular test does not necessarily indicate that a particular detector or the data acquired with it cannot be used for reporting The information stored in the database for each detector includes e Total Activity The sum of the decay corrected activities of the nuclides measured in the so
200. d from a voxel may be partially absorbed and a small fraction will completely penetrate the collimator Consider the effect of activity from a voxel of the item being measured projected on the each pixel of the detector surface The tiny surface of area of a pixel will be reduced if the activity interacts with the collimator The amount of attenuation of those gamma rays that hit the collimator is determined by the path length through the collimator and the linear attenuation coefficient of the material The angle of incidence 0 and detector recess within the collimator are parameters needed to compute the amount of material the gamma ray will penetrate see Eqns 104 and 105 l Dcos 104 a e Hil 105 Dm T Mz Il e where A effective unshadowed detector area of a pixel from the activity of voxel cm D detector recess cm 0 angle of incidence for the gamma rays emitted from voxel a area of a pixel on the detector cm u linear attenuation coefficient of the collimator material cm l length of the collimator material the gamma ray passed through from voxel cm Figure 186 Detector Interaction with Collimator 226 4 ANALYSIS METHODS The effective detector area projected by the activity emitted from a voxel A is shown below gt Ai A E 106 aveu m m R A 107 A where A fraction of a detector surface that is unshadowed from activity emitted from 1 voxel m
201. d in c NUser as part of the ISOTOPIC sample files We suggest you use it as a starting point for the analysis of your QA measurements and modify it as needed according to the following instructions Figure 206 shows the Analysis Options dialog which has tabs for entering Sample System Decay Report Analysis and Corrections parameters The fields on this set of screens define the spectrum part of the ISOTOPIC analysis settings For a multi detector system the settings e g MDA type should be consistent for all detectors The calibrations and peak background corrections are unique for each detector but other settings should be the same for all detectors 263 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual To create an SDF file complete all screens of the dialog then return to the Sample tab Click on the Save As button in the upper right of the dialog this will open a standard file save dialog Enter the path if necessary and new filename then click on Save to return to the Sample tab Click on OK to close the Analysis Options dialog If you wish you can Browse to recall an existing SDF file modify one or more settings and save the modified settings as a new spr file or overwrite the existing one NOTE Although this dialog has multiple tabs any changes to the current set of working parameters for the selected Detector will not take effect until you click on OK To retain the current working parameters click
202. d in the Operator program with the File Recall Reports command If you do not enable this feature and select a template a message box will open in Operator when the Recall Reports command is issued To use a Crystal Reports template mark the User Defined Template checkbox and Browse to locate the report template which must exist before you can select it You cannot type characters directly into the field 128 To print the report when the analysis is finished mark the Print on completion checkbox If you wish to print multiple copies they can be printed as sets by marking the Collated box If you mark Prompt before print a dialog will open when the report is ready and the operator can choose whether or not to print The operator can also print the HTML Container Surface Mode or ASCII Soil Mode report in addition to or instead of the one specified in this dialog ISOTOPIC supplies you with three example Crystal Reports templates which are installed in c NUser StandardIso v1 rpt for individual detector reports in Container Surface Mode 3 MENU COMMANDS Report Properties Print on completion Iv Number of Copies r Iv User Defined Template Name Standardlso v1 Path Ic User Standardlso_ 1 rpt Browse Cancel Figure 93 Crystal Reports Options for the Operator Program StandardIsoAve v1 rpt for the averaged Container Surface Mode report in multi detector sy
203. d to be 0 reflecting uniform distribution for all natural emitters a p is assumed to be infinite reflecting surface only distribution for fallout on undisturbed soil Beck s method is implemented within M 1 by calculating values for each of the calibration parameters N P N Ny and A and solving for A in Eq 119 This process is repeated for each energy line of all the nuclides identified by the gamma analysis software Calculation of the Angular Correction Factor Helfer and Miller provide four tables which summarize results for finding the Angular Correction Factor N N for energies ranging from 0 3 MeV to 2 5 MeV and L D ratios ranging from 0 5 to 1 3 Tables shown for the Angular Correction Factor reflect data for both upward and downward facing detectors Values for N N have been calculated for the two limiting cases for a p i e where a p 0 the case for uniform distribution and where a p the case for planar surface source distribution Usually the preferred orientation of the germanium detector is facing down The two tables given below provide N N values for the limiting cases where a p 0 and o p for a downward facing detector Calibration Factors for Field Ge Detectors I K Helfer and K M Miller Table 1 Angular Correction Factor V N Downward Facing Detector Uniform Source Distribution a p 0 Energy MeV os os or os os roi i2 oa os os oss oss oor
204. d to represent the changes made 38 3 MENU COMMANDS The Rise Time value is for both the rise and fall times thus changing the rise time has the effect of spreading or narrowing the quasi trapezoid symmetrically The Flattop controls adjust the top of the quasi trapezoid The Width adjusts the extent of the flattop from 0 3 to 2 4 us The Tilt adjustment varies the flatness of this section slightly The Tilt can be positive or negative Choosing a positive value results in a flattop that slopes downward choosing a negative value gives an upward slope Alternatively the optimize feature on the Amplifier tab can set the tilt value automatically This automatic value is normally the best for resolution but it can be changed on this dialog and in the InSight mode to accommodate particular throughput resolution tradeoffs The optimize feature also automatically adjusts the pole zero setting The dead time per pulse is 3 x Rise Time 2 x Flattop Width In the Pole Zero section the Start button performs a pole zero at the specified rise time and other shaping values Unlike the optimize feature 1t performs a pole zero for only the one rise time The pole zero Stop button aborts the pole zero and is normally not used When the settings are correct Close the Properties dialog and prepare to acquire data Once data acquisition is underway the advanced user might wish to return to MCB Properties and click on the Insight secti
205. dd a new material that is composed entirely of materials already in the database Select Enter coefficients to enter the material and data by hand Calculate cens Cancel lt Back Next gt Figure 97 Choose the Method for Adding a New Material 132 3 MENU COMMANDS As noted in Section 3 5 5 1 make certain the mu values are entered without coherent scattering e To add a new element click on Enter coefficients then Next and go to the New Element discussion on page 133 Be careful to use the correct values e To build a new material from entries already in the database click on Calculate Coefficients then Next and go to the New Compound discussion on page 134 New Element Figure 98 shows the New Material page Enter the Name of the element but do not enter a Chemical Formula In this example we are creating an entry for molybdenum IMPORTANT The name must not duplicate an existing material name be sure to check the list of existing entries before creating a new one If a duplicate entry is accidentally created ISOTOPIC will not allow you to populate the mass attenuation coefficients table for the duplicate or use either the original or duplicate entry To regain full access to the attenuation database functions in such cases we recommend you create a new database with Services Database Management Create Database Section 3 7 1 1 Any user defined elements or materials in your current datab
206. de gamma emission it is possible to solve for Act Beep 1000 A 139 A where Act activity of the nuclude per surface area Bq M R peak count rate cps Y y ray yield branching ratio for the nuclide y dis 1000 cm M conversion 4 14 2 Critical Level Counts Calculation The critical level or detection decision level counts are calculated as follows CL 2 33 y BKGVAR 140 248 4 ANALYSIS METHODS where CL Critical level counts BKGVAR Variance in the background The background variance is calculated by the spectrum analysis part Use the B30winds ini file Section A 1 3 to select the proper method 4 15 Analysis Engines Container Surface Mode analyses are performed with our ISOWAN32 analysis engine Soil Mode analysis uses the ISOENV32 engine Following is a basic summary of the process used by each See also the Analysis Setup Suggestions for Container Mode on page 106 4 15 1 ISOWAN32 ISOWAN32 performs a library based peak search of the spectrum The energy analysis assumes that all library energies exist in the spectrum so it tries to fit a peak at every location The Peak Cutoff value specified on the Analysis page of the Container Configuration Wizard is compared to the 1 sigma counting uncertainty for each peak to determine if that energy will be used for further analysis With a large Peak Cutoff value greater than 40 this engine can find false peaks This engine does a good job of f
207. described in the following paragraphs is used If the fit type is not polynomial the calibration uncertainty is calculated as o 0 forE gt E c knee o 6 forE lt E Cc nee where c and o are defined as follows If the energy E gt E ge EIA E EAA E Of j N 1 If E lt E N 1 216 MG T 3G AU Y M 0 N 77 78 79 80 4 ANALYSIS METHODS where e the measured efficiency at energy E f the calculated efficiency at E from Eq 63 Ene the efficiency knee energy N is the number of efficiency points above the knee energy and N is the number of efficiency points below the knee energy Both N and N must be greater than 1 If a or o is zero the default uncertainty of 1 5 is used If the fit type is polynomial the calibration uncertainty is calculated as 0 0 81 For polynomial fits E is always ignored Sometimes the efficiency pairs might be missing from the calibration file but the fit parameters and fit type are stored in the file In these cases the c or o value is used 4 7 8 Geometry Correction Uncertainty Estimate c 0 015 82 where o o Variance of geometry error estimate A practical error estimate is 1 5 1 sigma 4 7 9 Uniformly Distributed Uncertainty Estimate Gui E np ut inj y 83 where ls uncertainty estimate for a uniformly distributed uncertainty estimate Input user input for full range 96 217
208. detector as new with zero previous QA measurements and with potentially incorrect QA settings If you have to re run the MCB Configuration program and if doing so changes any of the ID numbers or Descriptions you must manually edit the ID numbers and Descriptions for all of the ISOTOPIC Detectors on the Master Detector List for your PC We recommend that you keep a list of the ID and Description for each MCB on your system Note spelling spacing and uppercase lowercase these details will be necessary when recreating the Description text string Let us use the following example to illus trate how to restore your ID numbers and Descriptions Suppose you are using two MCBs for your ISOTOPIC measurements and in your original MCB Config uration you configured them as 1 ISOCART 2 DIGIDART 2 and 4 ISOCART 1 DIGIDART 1 This is depicted in Fig 212 The numerical prefixes 1 and 4 are the IDs and the text strings that follow are the Descriptions Suppose we add one new MCB to the system and remove two We must then manually run MCB Configuration to add the new instrument to the Master Detector List After running the MCB Configuration program we find that our two digiDARTs originally assigned IDs of 1 and 4 have been renumbered with IDs of 2 and 3 respectively 271 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Configure Instruments Version 6 01 Number amp Description Close ISOCART 2 DIGIDART 2 STATION 1 DSJR 008 Cancel
209. dialog shown in Fig 111 123 00 99 00000 Insert sol Figure 111 PBC Table Editing Dialog 142 3 MENU COMMANDS Figure 112 shows the dialog control menu click on the title E bar icon to open it It contains several of the commands Move a X Close Alt F4 necessary to create and edit PBC files Show Background Analysis New Sort Manually Creating a New PBC Table eae eee Save PBC table As Open the control menu and click on New This will clear the Edit window so nuclides can be entered manually Figure 112 Edit PBC Dialog Control Menu Click on the Insert button to open the PBC Nuclide dialog Fig 113 Enter the nuclide name exactly as it appears in the library Click on OK to add the nuclide Now in the right hand peak portion of the dialog click on Insert to open the PBC Peak dialog Fig 114 Enter the energy of the gamma ray and the counts per second of the background peak The energy must be the same as the library value Peak energies in the PBC Table and not in the library for this nuclide will not be corrected and peak energies in the library and not in the PBC Table for this nuclide will not be corrected Click on OK to add the nuclide PBC Peak HE Name k 40 Nuclide Co 60 Cancel 1173 00 keV 100 CPS Cancel Figure 113 Edit or PS AO a aad Figure 114 Edit PBC Peak Name Values Automatically Creating a PBC Table A PBC file
210. digiDART ISOCARTO1 00004 digiDART ISOCARTO1 SHIMSKI MCB 138 00201 digiIDART ISOCARTO2 GY Detector 2 92 Spectrum Master ORS ORSIMP4 MCB 1 Input 2 ORSIMP4 MCB 1 Input 3 ORSIMP4 MCB 1 Input 4 EDWARDS2 MCB 129 00201 digiDART ISOCARTO2 00301 RANDTFRANK MCB 512 RANDTFRANK MCB 513 I Add gt Remove lt 3 MENU COMMANDS Lo E Cancel l Fd New Figure 152 Detector List Editor Dialog When Detector selection is complete click on OK to save your selections to disk and record them in the ISOTOPIC database Do not close the dialog by pressing the Esc key or clicking on the X box These Detectors will be used by ISOTOPIC until changed on this screen or until the next time te MCB Configuration program is run NOTE Before running the MCB Configuration program be sure to read the cautions in Section 5 4 concerning MCB Configuration and its effect on QA and container configuration Note also that if you remove an MCB from your system any configurations that use that instrument must be assigned another MCB 3 8 ROI An ROI region of interest is a way to denote channels or groups of channels in the spectrum as having special meaning An ROI can be used to mark peak areas for the printout or to mark a peak to stop acquisition when that peak reaches a preset value Channels marked as ROI channels are displayed in a different color than the unmarked channels The ROI menu commands F
211. digiDART as well as the data Acquisition Start Time and Sample description Note that creating an entry in the Sample field is the only way to add a sample description to a spectrum file created in Supervisor The Access field shows whether the Detector is currently locked with a password see Section 3 7 3 Read Write indicates that the Detector is unlocked Read Only means it is locked Status Figure 29 shows the Status tab Twenty one values are monitored at all times Use the droplists to select any six parameters to be displayed simultaneously on the Status tab normally these would be the six that are most important to you The values you select can be changed at any time so you can view each of them as needed Two types of values are presented OK or ERR and numeric value The state of health SOH are all OK or ERR If the state is OK the parameter stayed within the set limits during the spec trum acquisition If the parameter varied from the nominal value by 3 MENU COMMANDS Properties x Amplifier Amplifier2 ADC Stabilizer HighVoltage Field Data About Status Presets MDA Preset Nuclide Report digiDART s n 241 Sample Calibration source 1714 Acquisition Start Time Access 11 17 51 Tuesday January 09 2001 Read Write Firmware Revision Serial Number Acquisition Mode DDAR 002 P23 PHA Figure 28 The digiDART About Tab Properties for digiDART on middle ISO CART
212. disable a preset enter a value of zero Suggest Region If all of the presets are disabled data N us acquisition will continue until cl manually stopped EM Figure 30 The digiDART Presets Tab When more than one preset is enabled set to a non zero value the first condition met during the acquisition causes the Detector to stop This can be useful when samples of widely varying activity are analyzed and the general activity is not known before counting For example the Live Time preset can be set so that sufficient counts can be obtained for proper calculation of the activity in the sample with the least activity But if the sample contains a large amount of this or another nuclide the dead time could be high resulting in a long counting time for the sample If both the ROI Peak preset and the Live Time preset are set the low level samples will be counted to the desired fixed live time while the very active samples will be counted for the ROI peak count In this circumstance the ROI Peak preset can be viewed as a safety valve The values of all presets for the currently selected Detector are shown on the Status Sidebar These values do not change as new values are entered on the Presets tab the changes take place when the Properties dialog is closed Enter the Real Time and Live Time presets in units of seconds and fractions of a second These values are stored internally with a resolution of 20 milliseconds ms since the Detect
213. e U activity and the 1001 keV gamma ray is used to determine the U activity 4 13 Limitations on Container Analysis The program cannot quantify gamma ray emitting nuclides if the gamma rays do not exit the sample and are not detected Some gamma rays may reach infinite thickness in a moderately heavy matrix However if some gamma rays do not reach infinite thickness the proper correction factors can be applied to these gamma rays and will also apply to the lower energy gamma rays that have exceeded infinite thickness If the item contains uranium of different U enrichments the program cannot differentiate among the enrichments Sometimes one gamma ray emitting nuclide will be located within the measured item where there is a high matrix attenuation and another nuclide will be located where there is a minimum matrix attenuation The plot will reveal gamma ray peak area arrays with different slopes The program is easy to use but decisions must be made within the program as to which nuclide should be used to define the overall sample attenuation Generally the best decision is to report conservatively high values e g select the nuclide that will give the highest attenuation correction for the matrix Detector efficiency edge corrections have not been implemented in this version Samples should be measured at distances greater than 30 cm 12 in to minimize this limitation It should be noted that both energy regions used for enrichmen
214. e 1f an appropriate peak is available at the location of the marker data on the peak activity are displayed on the Marker Information Line These functions are duplicated by the Library indexing buttons on the Status Sidebar 6 2 5 First Last Channel lt Home gt lt End gt These keys move the marker to the first or last channel of the spectrum 6 2 6 Jump Sixteenth Screen Width lt PageDown gt lt PageUp gt lt PageDown gt and lt PageUp gt jump the marker position to the left to lower channel numbers or right to higher channel numbers respectively 1 16 of the window width regardless of the horizontal scale The status of the ROT bit is not altered when the marker is moved with these keys The marker channel contents and Marker Information Line are continuously updated as the 291 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual marker jumps so when the jump is complete the marker information is up to date for the current channel 6 2 7 Insert ROI Insert or Keypad lt Ins gt These keys mark an ROI in the spectrum at the marker position in one of two ways 1 If the spectrum is calibrated the region is centered on the marker with a width of three times the calibrated FWHM There does not need to be a peak at the marker position 2 Ifthe spectrum is not calibrated the region is centered on the peak if any located within two channels of the marker and is as wide as the peak If the peak search fails or
215. e contains the default entry LIB no library is currently selected Select the desired disk and filename and click on Open This library becomes the working library The ISOTOPIC analysis requires the LIB format Use the Edit command to write the library file in this format 3 6 3 Edit Use this command to create a new library file or change the contents of an existing library file Select the Isotopic Editor or Nuclide Navigator 1f NuclideNavigator III is installed The ISOTOPIC library editor is discussed here the NuclideNavigator editor is described in the NuclideNavigator III user manual GENERAL SUGGESTIONS ON LIBRARY ENTRIES Inall cases make certain that the most intense clean no interferences likely gamma ray for a particular nuclide is referenced first in your library The next three most intense gamma rays should be listed next in the library 155 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual e Do not clutter your library with too many nuclides and gamma rays The search engines will not be very effective in this situation Use only the nuclides and gamma rays that are likely to be present e If using the supplied Libo or Lib1 master library it might be helpful to delete all X rays from the list of gamma rays for each nuclide The energy Auto calibrate feature works better if the library includes no X rays See also the sidebars entitled ANALYSIS SETUP SUGGESTIONS FOR CONTAINER
216. e horizontal scale value is always shown on the Toolbar 6 4 7 Select Detector lt Ctrl F1 gt through lt Ctrl F12 gt These keys display the spectrum for the specified Detector n where n 1 to 12 corresponding to lt Ctrl Fn gt in the order that the Detectors are defined in the Detector pick list see Fig 5 The selected Detector name or the buffer is shown on the Toolbar These keys duplicate the function of the Detector pick list on the Toolbar and the Detector dialog under the Display menu An error message box will appear if the selected Detector is invalid In systems with more than 12 Detectors use Display Detector or the droplist on the Toolbar 6 4 8 Show Full View lt Alt F7 gt This key will force the Expanded Spectrum View for the active spectrum to be the full spectrum width This is duplicated by the Display Show Full View 6 5 Keypad Keys 6 5 1 Log Linear Keypad lt gt Keypad lt gt toggles the active spectrum window between logarithmic and linear vertical display This is duplicated by the Log Toolbar button and Display Logarithmic Section 3 9 1 The vertical scale can be controlled with the Zoom In Zoom Out Toolbar buttons Keypad lt gt lt gt the lt 1 gt and lt gt keys and lt F7 F8 gt 6 5 2 Auto Manual Keypad lt gt Keypad lt gt switches the spectrum window between automatic and manual vertical full scale see the discussion in Section 3 9 2 This is duplicate
217. e 167 Example Peak Background Calculation UNIDENTIFIED PEAK SUMMARY PEAK CENTROID BACKGROUND NET AREA INTENSITY UNCERT FWHM SUSPECTED CHANNEL ENERGY COUNTS COUNTS CTS SEC 1 SIGMA keV NUCLIDE 2292 16 569 78 432 17711 59 04 8 1 734 Bi 207 Figure 168 Peak Results for Previous Peak 182 4 ANALYSIS METHODS Table 4 Spectrum and Five Point Smooth 2317 10 11 2318 14 11 2319 12 10 Channel Spectrum 5 pt smooth e s ei ES ha o o 2270 17 13 8 2271 14 14 6 2272 14 13 2 2273 14 12 2 2274 7o 12 4 2275 12 12 8 2276 15 11 8 2277 16 13 6 2278 9 13 2 2279 16 14 4 2280 10 17 6 2281 21 21 2 2282 32 29 8 2283 27 54 2 2284 59 97 4 2285 132 185 6 2286 237 349 6 2287 473 614 0 2288 847 967 4 2289 1381 1386 6 2290 1899 1772 6 2291 2333 2084 2 2292 2403 2204 8 2293 2405 2128 0 2294 1984 1850 6 2295 1515 1497 0 2296 946 1077 6 2297 635 718 4 2298 308 429 2 2299 188 248 2 2300 69 126 0 2301 41 66 4 2302 24 31 0 2303 10 20 0 2304 11 14 6 2305 14 12 6 2306 14 14 0 2307 14 15 0 2308 17 13 8 2309 16 13 8 2310 8 13 8 2311 14 12 2 2312 14 13 4 2313 9 13 4 2314 22 12 8 2315 8 12 0 2316 11 13 0 0 2 0 183 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Figure 169 shows an example of the differences among the four methods for determining the background PEAK CENTROID BACKGROUND NET AREA INTENSITY UNCERT FWHM CHANNEL ENERGY COUNTS COUNTS CTS SEC 1 SIGMA kev Elda
218. e File Editor Editing New Kel ZH 1 1320E 001 2000 3 1 82 00 00 2 Update Delete Clear All Save As Library Group Assay From Certificate Jeu 52 121 78 keV y Select from Lib Activity f1 1320E 001 uci y Isotope Ea 52 Halflife D avs 4 6387E 003 Uncertainty 6 2000 Energy E 21 78 Gammas 100d 2 3240E 001 Date 2 82 12 00 00 PM M d yy h mm ss tt Fit Type Above None y Below None y Knee 10 00 keV DK Cancel Figure 43 New Line Added 74 3 MENU COMMANDS 8 Repeat this process until all desired gamma rays in the source certificate have been added 9 Note the Fit Type section at the bottom of the editor dialog Most calibration data are fit best with a Polynomial Alternately set a Knee at a location where there is little change in the slope 300 400 keV for p type detectors or 150 keV for n type and select a Quadratic fit above and below the knee 10 When the process is complete click on Save As to open a file save dialog It is important to save this file for future calibrations We recommend that you assign a filename that includes the certificate number 11 Click on OK to close the Certificate File Editor If you entered this dialog from the main Supervisor screen Step 1 of this procedure the Finish Calibration Wizard screen Fig 49 will be displayed so that you can observe and or edit the effi
219. e Start Auto optimize button uses these features to automatically choose the best pole zero and flattop tilt settings Pole zero is not performed for Transistor Reset preamplifiers As with any system the digiDART should be optimized any time the detector is replaced or if the flattop width is changed For optimization to take place the digiDART must be processing pulses The detector should be connected in its final configuration before optimizing is started There should be a radioactive source near the detector so that the count rate causes a dead time of 5 Dead time is displayed on the digiDART front panel and on the Status Sidebar during data acquisition Select either the Resistive Feedback or Transistor Reset option and click on Start Auto The optimize command is sent to the digiDART at this time and if the digiDART is able to start the operation a series of short beeps sounds to indicate that optimization is in progress When optimizing is complete the beeping stops During optimization pole zeroes are performed for several rise time values and the digiDART is cycled through all the rise time values for the determination of the optimum tilt values As all of the values for all the combinations are maintained in the digiDART the optimize function does not need to be repeated for each possible rise time The optimization can take from 1 to 10 minutes depending on count rate The optimization should be repeated if the flattop width
220. e data points will be displayed at the full scale value These keys duplicate the function of the lt F6 gt lt F3 gt keys 292 6 KEYBOARD FUNCTIONS 6 2 10 Compare Vertical Separation lt Shift t gt lt Shift gt In Compare mode the Shift t gt or Shift 1 keys decrease or increase the vertical separation between the two spectra Each successive key press will increase or decrease the separation by moving the spectrum read from disk The spectrum from disk can be moved below the first spectrum if it has fewer counts 6 2 11 Zoom In Zoom Out Keypad lt gt lt gt Keypad lt gt increases the scale of both axes in the Expanded Spectrum View so the peaks appear larger while Keypad lt gt does the opposite making the peaks look smaller The scale value for both axes is always shown on the Toolbar These functions are duplicated by the Zoom In Zoom Out buttons on the Toolbar and Zoom In and Zoom Out under the Display menu See Section 2 1 for a more detailed discussion 6 2 12 Fine Gain lt Alt gt lt Alt gt These accelerators step the internal amplifier up or down by one increment of fine gain on the selected Detector if it has a software controlled amplifier The new fine gain setting is shown on the Supplemental Information Line at the bottom of the screen If the gain stabilizer is active the display of the histogram data might not change The fine gain can also be set with Acquire MCB Propert
221. e factor reflects the correction factor if the activity is located in the outside half of the cylinder Thus the geometry uncertainty would be less For point source measurements assume that the measurement distance between the detector face and the activity cannot be determined more accurately than cm CF CF ceometry 4 w 5 100 90 CF Dit 1 CF So pe lt lt AP 91 Dist Dist CF Ls meas 92 Dist where CF Correction factor with the adjusted distance CF Correction factor for the modeled distance For models with volumes this comparison would be made for each voxel Dist distance from the face of the collimator detector recess to the surface of the point source cm Dist distance from the face of the detector to the point source used for calibration cm The geometry uncertainty is CF CE DES E SA geometry C F 100 93 220 4 ANALYSIS METHODS 4 11 Analysis Algorithms 4 11 1 Characterizing the Detector Intrinsic Efficiency The algorithms take advantage of detector characterization Initially full energy peak intrinsic efficiency is needed for the detector used to make the analysis To obtain that information you must perform a point source calibration at a fixed distance from the face of the detector See Fig 181 and Eqn 95 Figure 181 Intrinsic Efficiency d Q zrli 94 Jd R 95 z where Q subtended solid angle radi
222. eaks switch page 318 is turned on If accept all peaks is on all are accepted If accept low peaks is on the peak is further tested If the peak area is less than 200 counts it is accepted If the peak area is between 200 and 300 counts and the background is less than half the peak area the peak is accepted If the peak area is over 300 it is rejected 4 2 Locating Multiplets Any region that contains more than one peak including library and non library peaks passing the sensitivity test in a region that is 3 3 times the FWHM width will be deconvoluted If a peak in the region is a library peak and is not the first peak in the library for this nuclide the first in 195 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual library order peak in the energy analysis range for this nuclide must have a positive net area and a defined centroid for this peak to be included in the deconvolution unless the first library peak is also in this multiplet region If however the peak was located by the peak finder it may be included in the deconvolution as an unknown peak The areas of disqualified peaks are set to zero If the library energies are less than 10 eV apart only the lowest energy peak is included in the deconvolution The peak areas for the other peaks within 10 eV are set to zero The conflicting peaks are marked as energy conflicting peaks This message appears on the report and the individual peaks are labeled in the comment f
223. ect the total time for the data collection not just the additional time It the preset is less than the actual time no new data will be added to the existing spectrum e Mark the Save Spectrum on Completion checkbox to save the spectrum after the analysis Prepare the detector remove all sources and click on OK to start data collection At the end of the count the spectrum will be analyzed and the PBC file created as described in the preceding section As noted there you can change the filename as necessary to make it more descriptive 141 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 3 5 6 2 Select PBC Use this command to open a standard file 21x open dialog Fig 110 and select a new Lookin Sisctopic EY working internal PBC file If a PBC file intet is HomeOO04 Pbc a is already loaded its name will be displayed in the File name field otherwise the default PBC will be shown Select the desired file and click on Open a I5000007 Pbc File name 1s000001 Pbc Files oftype Pec Files y Cancel a Figure 110 Select PBC File 3 5 6 3 Edit PBC This function is used to manually Editing Pbctable pbc 2 x create a new PBC file from a spectrum Creation 10 13 93 1 08 40 PM Ca46 Edition 11 13 97 4 42 18PM p Peaks previously analyzed or to change the contents of an existing PBC file To create a PBC file click on Edit PBC Bal31 to open the Editing
224. ed Calibrated FWHM at this energy FWHM SQL_REAL Actual FWHM FWTM SQL_REAL Actual FWTM Area SQL_REAL Net counts in peak Background SQL_REAL Background counts 330 ANE das 327 peak Cease e pug eee ERE RUM 149 EI Ga tit eru Prise yeh a Jonas ETE TCR E 61 327 peak o 25 duet eS e dre dis 191 CEB coil cts eye ee vieiun are at Prine aches 93 202 327 PEANALYSIS oes tue hating eek eee ee es 2 7 9 Papi 328 resid als aue tss Leto te oe Prior REM 148 IND dais 90 328 SED ooo oer pesi US eR Rp ta 313 HEME ps rd AMY area xc 112 323 Analysis engine is eoe RERO DES ns 249 DB coach DE t Este 154 327 DOA ys rs tee seed oleae E ETC lay eed 269 Mi ae as 118 ISOENY 32 oidos 249 MDB rare oe trie wet Gey eel M ERELSUbREN 328 ISOWANS2 sidad 249 Pri SEE CR ERES 138 Sel Sarees tsetse etn ada 313 A bep SETTE eee 125 Archived datas si Lea e SCORSA 2 7 162 ROL ater dre pa ER EE Een 327 Associated files oe esas EC ER PS ERO 22 RET A b ERE ETEDSE 267 328 Attenuation A rie rae ore Rasy acta at Pe ge ela 263 327 databilse riada 129 SPO alan 61 93 327 mass attenuation coefficients 130 230 se are entre PEE 328 Automatic vertical scale 17 172 Eom 327 B30WIN TXT Accelerator keys lecitina 289 SED adas 313 quick reference table 290 B3OWINDSJINI 5 os RRRDEN 313 316 Acceptance thresholds QA 257 Background ACQUIS MENU ia ses 32 example na 182 Acquisition presets Tor multiplets ose ete whee trench bee
225. ed MCBs and you have not restored the Description to its original string of characters including spacing and case as discussed above the next time the Operator program is started the Configure Detector dialog Fig 214 will indicate a mismatch in the database and will ask the operator to choose one of three ways to resolve the disparity e Overwrite the MCB description currently in the database with the new MCB Description Create a new MCB record in the database e Skip the new detector neither overwriting the existing detector record nor creating a new one Configure Detector X New Detector Found 004 Front ISOCART Detector In Database 004 FrontISOCART Overwrite the detector record selected above C Create a new detector record in the database C Skip this new detector Figure 214 New Detector Found We strongly recommend that users choose Skip You can then re run MCB Configuration and correctly re enter the originally assigned ID and Description This is will ensure that your existing QA setup and container configurations function properly If you do not plan to use ISOTOPIC s QA features you can choose either Skip or Overwrite 273 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual NOTE In almost all cases but perhaps particularly if you are using our QA program you should not use the Create a new detector record option Doing so could create two entries in the database that sh
226. ed drives ISOTOPIC will control and display up to eight Detectors simultaneously either local or networked ISOTOPIC is intended to be used in field applications so the portable digiDART is the MCB most often used ISOTOPIC correctly displays and stores a mixture of different sizes However the MCBs can be any mixture of the following types of units properly installed and hardware configured DSPEC series instruments digiBASE DSP Scint digiDART Models 916A 917 918A 919 920 921 926 919E 920E 921E 92X 92X II NOMAD Plus NOMAD microBASE MicroNOMAD OCT TE PC TRUMP MicroACE DART MatchMaker M CA MiniMCA 166 and other new modules 6 1 INTRODUCTION of spectra Several ISOTOPIC windows can be open in the program at one time displaying Detectors buffers spectrum files from disk and data analyses 1 5 Before Using ISOTOPIC Operator Before you can begin making measurements in ISOTOPIC Operator the following tasks must be performed The MCB and detector hardware must be properly connected powered on and adjusted Refer to the installation chapter in the Getting Started guide the hardware manual for your MCB and the user materials accompanying the detector The correct library for the nuclides of interest must be created in ISOTOPIC Supervisor or the accompanying Nuclide Library Editor program In Supervisor the detectors must be energy and efficiency calibrated with the approp
227. ed in the MCB A specific calibration from a CLB file can be used to override the calibration currently stored in the MCB To select a file mark the Use File box and enter or browse for the filename 3 5 3 2 Acquisition The Acquisition tab is shown in Fig 85 The Live Time Preset and Real Time Preset are entered here If no presets are entered spectrum acquisition will continue until manually stopped To clear the data before each Bl soil Gamma Analysis Parameter Setup Ja start operation mark the Clear EA Ms Before Start box This is the Soil Setup File C User LWSHO1_070626 m1 OK normal case This clear flag is Field ID D amp D Site xY2 Cancel also on the Operator display so ion it can be changed in the field Real Time Preset 3600 Iv Clear Before Start The Soil Density and Air Live Time Preset D Density can be changed from the normal values in the fields here These are used to calcu late the attenuation of the gamma rays in air and in the eee DIN senis soil The soil density is used in the depth profile with the alpha rho values Soil Density 16 g cm 3 3 5 3 3 Analysis f Figure 85 Soil Mode Acquisition Parameters The Analysis tab is shown in Fig 86 See Section 4 14 1 2 page 237 for information on the alpha rho calculation and creating and editing alpha rho files See also Section 3 5 3 6 which contains instructions on determining an accurate a p value Click
228. ee ee eee 110 REPO AO erectae A eee Dn elo eod s tt 112 3 5 24 2 ADELE C LORS d Hon a o na kin Oy Bia Eder ad awe a Aaa Salers 113 Field of View Detector Standoff 2008 115 3 3 2 E A A Ae Ewen ae teas f 117 Soil Mode Configurations sva ons nieuw ewe A A S guts 117 2o D Detector aitor eos 118 DOE EML Efficiency cana 119 AA A E EE A s 119 di JXGUUISIDOD 25 uo e DN rese ae EE RE 120 3 95 99 ANALYSIS ear O E 120 39 9d REPO A AA adit ad a Satin 123 3 5 3 5 Menu Commands for the Soil Setup Dialog 124 A AN EM 124 A phar BO oso aes ve da EV DA TORRES MP EN UR DRE UNE 124 Prunt PableS eo tri eee eG PE OPENS REIP OD RE ER 127 3 5 3 6 Helpful Hints for Establishing a p Values Le 127 CE STARE DOL Grin load di a 128 AMENA IAS A GR iu Oe ce ot T NA 129 3 5 5 1 Editing an Existing Material 0 leere 130 3 5 5 2 Deleting a Material es eo eta sov rt eco dere e id ol e das 131 3 5 5 3 Adding New Entries to the Attenuation Database 131 New Elements tcs ibi es 133 New Compound from Existing Database Entries 134 Peak Background COtrreclOn eu ti e rr SER S 138 9 930 15 Create PBC is A ARA de 138 From an Archived Spectrum File o o ooo ooooo o 139 From a Live Spectrum ina 140 AR o CA O 142 sO A ard ae eee ae RII GM yee ah hee ans 142 Manually Creating a New PBC Table 143 Automatically Creating a
229. efore entering the calibration process choose Library Select File from the menu and open a library file that contains the nuclides in the calibration source Next choose Library Select Peak to show the list of peaks in the library in energy order Now select Calibrate Energy When the table and graph appear move the table down so the Library List is not covered see Fig 64 Rather than manually entering the peak energy in the Energy Calibration Sidebar E field click once on the peak energy in the Library List to automatically fill the field 90 3 MENU COMMANDS Isotopic Supervisor Isotopic Mode Library List 2 x Ele Acquire Calbrate Calculate Analpze Library Services Window Library ER Lib cg 2 s A jeleu T Auclide Energy Percent Ralf L 4 iCo 60 9000 ERE 99 XH Y 88 1836 01 99 3500 E Re ae ol A Energy Graph ol xl Calibr 7 x 2815 Energy Channel 7241 06 E 1173 2371 keV Table 11 Energies Channel Delete Energy Buffer GyDemo Spc MIXED GAMMA MARINELLI ON ENDCAP OF P40268A Recall Save No FWHM Cal Auto Calibrate Marker 7 241 1 173 39 keV 42 328 Cnts FWHM 1 757803 Library Co 60 Cobalt at 1173 24 5156 70 Bq 1 Nuclide Peaks O Unknown Peaks Figure 64 Speeding Up the Energy Calibration with a Library For a spectrum with an energy calibration double clicking on a library peak will cause the spectrum cursor to jump
230. eld with IsotopicPeaks Isotopic Results IsotopicResultsID Number of the last set of results linked to IsotopicPeaks IsoPeaks IsoActivity Final results of activity linked to IsotopicResultsID Spectra Spcfile Name of the file used to collect the data 321 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 1 Open a new database using your version of Access In this example the new database is named Buffer mdb because it acts as a buffer between the ISOTOPIC Access 97 format database and your version of Access 2 Link the four tables listed in Table 12 such that the new Buf fer mdb database contains these four tables 3 Develop a Select query that includes these four tables Link as shown in Fig 245 Use the fields identified in the table as part of the query Be sure make the following adjustments to the query Using the Criteria cell in the query exclude the value Unknown from the nuclide field Order IsotopicResultsID as descending so the most recent set of results will be displayed first You want only one set of records so set the Top zip Values droplist to 1 as shown in Fig 244 Jll 5 1 4 Change the query property value Unique Values Figure 244 Set Top Values List to to Yes so that duplicate entries are excluded epe Show all fields New Table Table Wizard Import Table This wizard creates tables in the current database that are linked to tables in an external file
231. elect it then click on the Edit button This opens the edit dialog shown in Fig 95 Make changes as needed using the mouse and or arrow keys to move between fields IMPORTANT Mu u values must be entered without coherent scattering Attenuation Materials Add I Edit Delete Refresh Close Date Chemical Formula Atomic Weight Density Log X axis Energy LinearCoefficient MassCoefficient gt 10 0 117 38 3 17 2 36 16 8 9 14 5 54 2 51 1 38 0 498 0 271 0 144 0 106 2000 4000 6000 8000 0 0887 Energy keV Attenuation Coefficient Figure 94 Attenuation Materials Dialog To return to the main Attenuation Materials dialog without saving the new values click on Cancel 130 3 MENU COMMANDS To save the modified values in the database go to the Name list and select any but the entry you have just edited This will return you to the main Attenuation Materials dialog Re select your newly modified entry to display its table and graph 3 5 5 2 Deleting a Material To completely remove a material from the database select it from the Name droplist then click on Delete and confirm the deletion Note that there is no undo for this operation However should you accidentally delete a needed item you can re create 1t quickly and easily as described in the next section Attenuation Materials Pb Cancel Date 2 25 2002 5 00 0
232. en click on the Edit Efficiency button This will open the Efficiency Calibration Sidebar Efficiency Table and Efficiency Graph Expand the spectrum horizontally to show the peaks completely Fig 44 The next step is to destroy the current calibration To do this open the Calibration Sidebar and click on the control menu icon then choose Destroy Once you have destroyed the efficiency calibration the system is no longer energy calibrated Because there is as yet no efficiency calibration no graphs or tables are shown Choose a spectrum peak listed in the source data sheet Use the Full Spectrum View Fig 51 to approximately locate the peak or use the Library List and the Expanded Spectrum View to put the marker on the center of the peak This selects the peak The peak area and count rate are calculated in the same manner as in the analysis program Figure 51 Select Peak in Full Spectrum View Any point in the Efficiency Table can be deleted by selecting the point then clicking on the Delete Entry button in the Table section of the sidebar Any point in the table can be modified 82 3 MENU COMMANDS by selecting it and clicking on Calc When the worksheet opens the previously entered values will be shown These values can be changed and a new efficiency generated by clicking on Calculate Efficiency To retain the changes click on OK to discard them click on Cancel Isotopic Supervisor Isotopic Mode BEI Eg
233. end of the preceding ROI respectively of the displayed spectrum These functions are duplicated by the ROI indexing buttons on the Status Sidebar 6 2 3 Next Peak lt Ctrl gt gt lt Ctrl gt The lt Ctrl gt gt and lt Ctrl gt keys perform a peak search on the spectrum in the higher or lower channel direction respectively and move the marker to the first peak found If no peak is found the program displays the No More Peaks message and the marker does not move If the spectrum is energy calibrated and the library loaded the system displays the best match from the library within two FWHMs of the peak centroid If there is no match within this range the No Close Library Match message is displayed These functions are duplicated by the Peak indexing buttons on the Status Sidebar 6 2 4 Next Library Entry lt Alt gt gt lt Alt gt These keys move forward or backward through the nuclide library to the next closest library entry Each button press advances to the next library entry and moves the marker to the corresponding energy Also instead of indexing from a previously identified peak the marker can be positioned anywhere in the spectrum and these keys used to locate the entries closest in energy to that point If a warning beep sounds it means that all library entries have been exhausted in that direction or that the spectrum is not properly calibrated for reaching the energy with the marker In any cas
234. ensions according to the definitions in the figure at the top of the dialog Some shapes do not use all of the available dimensions on the dialog the unused dimensions are gray Outer Container Filter Page Click on the Outer Container Filter tab Fig 75 This allows you to characterize the outer container or a filter or absorber inserted between the detector and the container The Material list here contains the same entries as the list on the Inner Container tab The dimensions are calculated from the inner container dimensions For containers enter the wall and lid thickness for filters enter the filter thickness for both the wall and lid thicknesses 104 Isotopic Settings Container lid Thickness Cortainer Wall p Es Thickness Depth Length Units Weight Units Container Shape po E Cin kg C bb Outer Container V Material a Wall Thickness g cm Density 702 gcc Lid Thickness y cm Cancel lt Back Next gt Figure 75 Outer Container Tab Container Page 3 MENU COMMANDS Matrix Page Figure 76 shows the Matrix tab The matrix is the material in the container enclosing the radioactive substances The matrix density and attenuation corrections are usually the dominant source of corrections for gamma ray attenuation Isotopic Settings Container lid Thickness Cortainer Wall Thickness Depth Length Units Weight Units Container Shape po E T kg cm in G ati Total Weigh
235. ent report The spectrum name is printed on the next line MDA Type This allows the selection of the type of MDA calculation to be used as the method of calculating the MDA to be on the QA report The MDA is a measure of how small an activity could be present and not be detected by the analysis Many factors affect the MDA which is reported in units of activity such as becquerels The calibration geometry backgrounds system and source induced detector resolution and particular Container Surface Analysis Options Sample System Decay Report Analysis Corrections Laboratory name ORTEC PEAK SEARCH SENSITIVITY Most Least ENN es o0 9 MDA Type Nureg 4 16 Method Library Match Width 0 5000 Base activity units FWHM keV Bq Kg C aCi Kg Scale factors to reported activity Bq Multiplier 1 0000E 000 Quantity label Kq Divisor 1 0000E 000 E Cancel Help Activity label Figure 207 System Tab 265 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual nuclide all seriously affect the MDA reported Section 4 5 provides explanations of the different MDA formulas used by ISOTOPIC The PEAK SEARCH SENSITIVITY sets the sensitivity for the peak search Before a suspected peak is accepted the magnitude of the second difference must be greater than the weighted error of the channel counts The PEAK SEARCH SENSITIVITY is a multiplicative factor used in error wei
236. enuation coefficient for the matrix d is the matrix density and is the matrix thickness inner container correction factor for the i voxel calculated as amp where u is the mass attenuation coefficient for the inner container d is the inner container density and l is the inner container thickness outer container correction factor for the i voxel calculated as e where y is the mass attenuation coefficient for the outer container d is the outer container density and is the outer container thickness number of voxels 4 11 3 Collimator Correction When a collimator is present only a fraction of the activity within the item being measured will interact with the collimator Of the fraction of the voxels that have activity that interacts with the detector only a fraction of the detector will be shadowed from the activity See Fig 185 Shadowed activity Figure 185 Collimator Correction Factor In addition some of the activity will penetrate the collimator but most of the activity that interacts with the collimator will be attenuated 225 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual In order to compute the area of the detector that is shadowed the surface area of the detector must be divided small area called pixels Each pixel will either be completely shadowed by the collimator partially shielded by the collimator or not shadowed at all Partially shielded means some of the gamma ray emitte
237. enuationDirectionSeg Ex Segments used to compute attenuation in one mean free path ContainerRadialSegments 10 Number of pixels used for cylinder segment Number of pixels used for cylinder segment MaxPenetrationDepth NN Maximum penetration depth in mean free path units 315 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Note that accuracy could be reduced with fewer voxels however the reduction not be significant and the benefits of a speedup in analysis might override the slight decrease in accuracy Reducing the layers of attenuation AttenuationDirectionSeg or the MaxPenetrationDepth will likely have the greatest acceleration effect Generally the nonhomogeneity of the sample dominates the analysis error Table 11 Uncertainty Estimates MatrixMuRhoUncertPct 10 Uncertainty for the combination of mass attenuation coefficients and effective density MinContainerUncPct Uncertainty of minimum container uncertainty to report NOTE The MatrixMuRhoUncertPct value will have a major effect on the overall measurement uncertainty A 1 3 B30WINDS INI The B30WINDS INI file contains initial or default values for the analysis engine It is read by the engine before the spectrum file is read The contents are shown below The filename can be specified on the command line If the specified file cannot be found in the default directory as defined by Windows the AMESSAGE directory on the default drive is searched If it i
238. erated about each peak used for the QA measurements If you mark the Peak Records in Database checkbox a new table will be generated in the QAGV32 mdb database that contains extra information about each peak computed in the measurement A new table is generated for each measurement and is labeled to correspond to the QA measurement number For each spectrum used to collect QA data a set of spectrum and report files are generated The file names begin with the QA File Prefix characters and are incremented starting with the QA File Sequence number 5 2 1 1 Establishing QA Settings Click on Settings to open the Quality Assurance Settings dialog shown in Fig 191 This dialog contains three main data entry areas e BACKGROUND Acquisition time and Count Rate Limits SAMPLE Type Analysis Settings File SAMPLE Analysis Parameter Limits Several preliminary steps must be taken to determine the QA settings 1 Backgrounds must be counted to determine whether the detector is contaminated Usually a live time of 200 300 seconds is sufficient Note that background count rates are established by summing all the counts of the spectrum and dividing by the live time Peaked backgrounds used for spectrum analyses are not established here 2 Samples must be counted for total activity to obtain expected values since total activity is detector and QA source dependent When deciding on the nuclides in your QA library do not select nuclides with shor
239. ergy The efficiency of the detector system is the relation between the number of gamma rays emitted from the source to the number of gamma rays collected in the full energy peak The HPGe detector system efficiency includes effects from the detector itself the detector source geometry the materials surrounding the detector and absorption in the source material or matrix Fig 35 EXTENDED SOURCE ABSORBING ut ESCAPE OF ONE K X RAY COMPTON SCATTERING PHOTON Container Analysis For container analysis the only efficiency calibration needed is for a point source in front of the detector The efficiencies for the different containers geo metries are calculated from this efficiency NS d and the appropriate model END CAP ANNIHILATION Soil Analysis The soil analysis uses the RADIATION COMPTON efficiency model included in the methods in SCATTERING PHOTON COLD FINGER the DOE EML report Figure 35 Detector with Extended Source 63 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual You can energy recalibrate to account for gain changes without having to repeat the efficiency calibration P type germanium detectors such as the ORTEC GEM Series have a maximum efficiency at about 150 keV for n type detectors such as the GMX Series it is about 100 keV For detectors above about 50 relative efficiency these values will be somewhat higher Fig 36 For both types these maxima depend
240. ertainty in the adjusted gross area and the weighted error of the adjusted background The background uncertainty is weighted by the ratio of the adjusted peak width to the number of channels used to calculate the adjusted background Therefore net peak area uncertainty is given by 96 3 MENU COMMANDS 23 where Aag the adjusted gross area A the net area B the background area l the ROI low limit h the ROI high limit The peak centroid is calculated by fitting a second order polynomial of the form a b channel c channel to the natural logarithm of the net channel contents The coefficients of this polynomial are then used to calculate the true peak offset value as follows TruePeak offset b 2c 24 After the true peak offset is calculated it is added to the left boundary channel of the peak ROI to yield the peak centroid value After finding the centroid for a peak the true counts in the peak centroid channel must be calculated This is done by using the a b and c coefficients from the peak centroid calculation and the true peak value in the following equation TruePeakCounts centroid e rue eak b TruePeak a 25 After calculating the true peak counts it is divided by 2 to get the FWHM value and also by the X value designated in the Calculation Settings dialog Section 3 4 1 to get the target values for calculating FW 1 X M After finding the target value for FWHM channels conta
241. ervisor Analysis for Windows Isotopic Supervisor Model ISOPLUS B32 ISOTOPIC It provides software version A information that will be useful should UMCBI Kemel Version 6 10 Connections 32 Version 6 10 you need customer support Isotopic Supervisor provides advanced Multi Channel Analyzer capabilities and supports DSPEC ADCAM series and SPECTRUM MASTER hardware DSPEC ADCAM and SPECTRUM MASTER are trademarks of Advanced Measurement If your PC is connected to the Internet Technology Inc click on the Visit ORTEC On Line This product is licensed to Preferred Customer button to browse the ORTEC website ice which includes application notes tech Copyright 2007 Advanced Measurement Technology Inc All Rights Reserved nical papers information on training courses product information and access to our Global Service Center Figure 20 About ISOTOPIC 3 2 Acquire The Acquire menu is shown in Fig 21 Access to the various functions depends on whether the active spectrum is a Detector or buffer Download Spectra is only available for the digiDART and DART ZDT Display Select is only valid for instruments that support ZDT mode NOTE In some cases a Detector option will be inactive because it is disabled for the current Detector while it might still be valid for some other Detector in the system or for this Detector under different conditions 32 3 MENU COMMANDS 3 2 1 Start This initiates data collec
242. es Uranium Plutonium Tab Use this tab Fig 79 to set the parameters for calculating the uranium and plutonium enrichment The Uranium and Plutonium Isotopic Weight Fractions can be entered or determined from the spectrum If you choose Use Entered Value you must enter all the weight fractions and an uncertainty value before moving to the next wizard page The values should sum to 1 An example would be a smear which has a diameter but no depth 110 3 MENU COMMANDS In most uranium samples U is the most easily analyzed isotope The other uranium isotopes can be computed from the U determination if the weight fractions are known In this case mark Use Entered Value and enter the weight fractions Values for all isotopes will be computed based on their corresponding weight fractions If you do not know the weight fractions select Determined from Spectrum The final results will then reflect activity determined from the gamma rays for each isotope If no gamma rays are detected for a particular uranium isotope it will not be reported in this mode Similarly in most plutonium samples Pu is the most easily measured isotope and the other plutonium isotopes can be computed from the Pu determination if the weight fractions are known Isotopic Settings Analysis Number of Detector s 1 Live Time Preset sec 5000 Ask For Detector Position Adjustments on Start E Uranium Plutonium Uranium Isotopic Weigh
243. es can be controlled from a single screen even across a network Remote PC workstations can control analyze and view the data being gathered in the counting room Regulatory compliance is easy with ISOTOPIC The software s quality assurance QA features monitor system performance and store the results in a Microsoft Access format database All hardware and analysis parameters are saved with the spectral data to ensure traceability ISOTOPIC s extensive menus and toolbar give control of all aspects of data acquisition and analysis including calibration library editing computer controlled hardware setup and analysis parameter setup as well as numerous onscreen data manipulation comparison and analysis tools 1 4 PC and Operating System Requirements ISOTOPIC v4 1 requires a PC running under Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional or XP Professional Service Pack 2 We recommend at least 100 megabytes of disk space Spectrum analysis will go more quickly if you have a 2 GHz processor or faster NOTE This software has been designed for users with full Windows Administrator access It is possible that limiting user privileges could cause conflicts For PCs with a memory mapped MCB interface no other interface can use memory mapped into page D of the PC memory map see the accompanying ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS Hardware Property Dialogs Manual Part No 931001 Data can be saved to or retrieved from any number of removable or fix
244. et for each sample measurement The Soil Mode user interface allows operators to capture two levels of site and sample information The top level information is entered in this dialog in the Field ID field Typically this refers to the top level identifier for the project for instance the overall project or facility name Additionally the Operator interface has a Grid ID field in which the operator can enter a sampling grid number or other sample ID description The Field ID entered here is prepended to the filename for the SPC An1 UFO and RPT files generated during measurements in the Operator program 3 5 3 1 Detector This tab Fig 84 describes the germanium detector and the energy and efficiency calibrations currently stored in the MCB Click on the droplist and choose the Detector to be used Next select either the DOE EML Efficiency detector calibration method or use the efficiency calibration from an existing calibration File The DOE EML Efficiency method is very simple The advantage of the Use File alternate method is that you get increased accuracy at energies below 200 keV The gamma attenuation by the BH Soil Gamma Analysis Parameter Setup aax Fie Alpha Rho Print Tables Soil Setup File C User LWWSHO1_070626 m1 OK Field ID D amp D Site XYZ Cancel 001 MCB 130 y Efficiency Calculation DOE EML Efficiency Detector Eff 5n DetectorHeight 100 cm Crystal Len
245. eut dis cr Sada 293 6 2 13 Fine Gain Large Move usas oa gone ER aha ed ak Ue HERA rede dads 293 02 142 Screen Capture 2459 os exe tu E RON ESO IN EN e hae p tee eus 203 6 3 Keyboard Number Combinations 2 20 00 cece lees 294 eS UATE eee A II AGE ee Er re epa qa aet tut Oe 294 O32 SOP nese had brea Ada biie 294 o CIO usu edet b SERRA abdo ata tate ud ira ui ASE 204 6 3 4 Copy to Buffer 3355s od h arate e vs nes taste ed ep ER etie ara 294 6 3 5 Detection BUI ers da tada da 294 00 0 Narrower Wider an E A tee abe ES A A E 295 OA Function Ke ys lt i2 ty Jecnegee ro RR EIA whee Se ee he hadegs geen ees woke eG 295 Od OW cto use OG A eae ON 295 642 ZDT NOEL bara EAS dee iet Oi Dike aro Eod eee 295 64 3 LOT COMPAS to e CAI pra RU RD die uua 295 644 Detector Buller ia losers ie bas bee waisted ats daa 295 6 4 5 Talle hortet merreni tests Scene desks ae Pts ERU A ae Ee 296 OO Narrower WAGE ovs cue Oe A oed Banos ER Oe ede 296 6 4 7 Select Detector nua nuke weds oad ead RE ee d kom EEO RR de CORRES 296 0 15 Show F l View anos eee barge abd Xa ent A aes deas 296 0 15 Keypad Keys winrar e cet ened ok eee Care do A aD 296 O AEOSILIBGdE m ars te cy EA DER que Sans UE S A 296 65 2 Ato MANU E aeuo a bie Rae e EE 296 6 3 9 Centen in Y de Se eke he Be Erit A A ake IEA 297 6 5 4 Zoom In Zoom Outs cis a a ata aa 297 OI Fine Gain ote nna ERA a CMR LORS SERS 297 TABLE OF CONTENTS T EME CU Ss SNA E SAS EAS RSS AAA b eas 299
246. f containers and soils and the underlying spectrum analysis The container and soil portion of the analysis use the same spectrum analysis methods 4 1 Calculation Details for Peaks For all library peaks in the analysis energy range the program attempts to calculate the net peak area and centroid of a peak at that channel At this step in the analysis each peak is considered to be a singlet A singlet is a single isolated peak that is it is far enough away from other peaks in the spectrum so that the spectrum has background on both sides of the peak does not overlap another peak The steps are to calculate the background then the net area then the centroid 4 1 1 Background Calculation Methods The background method is one of these types automatic 5 point average 3 point average and 1 point minimum selected on the Analysis page of the Container Surface Mode and Soil Mode configuration dialogs The normal selection for Container or Soil analysis is 3 point for 8K spectra and 5 point for 16K spectra This will reduce the peak area variation due to counting uncertainty in these low count spectra 4 1 1 1 Automatic For the first pass the peak centroid is the library energy Fig 165 To calculate the first pass background on the low energy side of the peak the 5 point average of the channel contents is calculated for the region from the peak centroid channel to the channel which is 6 times the library match width normally 0 5 t
247. factors and allowing the analyst to compute the dominant attenuation correction factor Next the smaller attenuation factors can be fine tuned for good results 4 11 5 Fine Tuning the Plot The fine tuning plot allows you to adjust the attenuation properties of the item being measured to simulate the material with which the gamma ray actually interacts After correcting for attenuation detector efficiency and yield if the activities computed from several gamma rays emitted by a particular nuclide are the same diff is small for all points you have additional assurance the model is correct A high energy intense gamma ray from each nuclide is normally selected using the library as a reference gamma ray Its activity peak area corrected for yield efficiency and attenuation becomes a reference activity The activities computed from other gamma rays of the same nuclide are plotted as a percent difference of activities compared to the reference activity vs energy as shown in Fig 187 A value of 100 indicates that the gamma ray at that energy was not found Note that if there were no gamma ray attenuation due to container matrix or self attenuation the activities would be much closer The scatter around the axis is due to inadequacies of the peak fitting program inaccurate yields counting statistics and uncertainty in detector efficiency A sample containing several nuclides would appear as shown in Fig 188 Each nuclide ha
248. fication of a particular nuclide in a spectrum the number of located peaks is compared to the number of possible peaks This value gives more weight to the more intense peaks It is expressed as n y Branching Ratio Fraction l 39 m Branching Ratio p 1 where Branching Ratio is the yield for the peak for the given nuclide is the sum over the located peaks and p is the sum over the possible peaks This fraction is between 100 for all peaks located and 0 for no peaks located This value is compared to a limit value entered on the Analysis tab under Settings Configurations for Soil Mode Section 3 5 3 3 to determine whether the nuclide peaks are present in sufficient measure to say the nuclide is present The fraction limit test is passed if the fraction is above the selected value To disable the fraction limit test enter a limit of zero on the Analysis tab 4 4 Nuclide Activity Based On Peak Area The nuclide activity is calculated for all peaks in the library whose energy is between the energy limits selected for the analysis in range For the Container Surface or Soil report the activity is calculated as described above There are several methods of determining if a nuclide is present or not and if MDA should be reported The nuclide is reported as present if all of the following are true 1 The first in range peak of the nuclide in the library is present in the spectrum and the counting uncertainty is be
249. for drums or filled pipes thick disks Box Use for HEPA filters or other rectangular shaped or square shaped objects Lined cylinders Use for contaminated piping Point source in a container Use for points sources in a cylinder or heavily shielded hot sources where the activity has a small volume and there are three containers e g lead steel and concrete used to reduce the shielding Disk or spill Use for thin circular shaped activity point sources floor spills of a relatively small diameter Large areas of contaminated ground diameter gt 10 m are best analyzed in the Soil Mode see Section 3 5 3 Determine the container thickness For nested containers 1f several have the same material and density you can sum the thicknesses and enter the result as the thickness of a single container Estimate the density of the matrix for the waste stream The matrix density is a major contributor to the item attenuation correction If possible each item of the waste stream should be weighed to improve the matrix density determination The weight can only be entered in the Operator program Select the units of measure for Length and Weight to be used in the Container report in Operator ISOTOPIC can use both SI metric units and U S customary inches pounds units It allows you to mix and match units according to the preference of your facility Regardless of the units selected all densities are in g cc NO
250. for the current database Example Drum 1234 Iso00567 Spc For each sample ISOTOPIC creates an activity plot bitmap and a spectrum histogram bitmap which are incorporated into the HTML format report The filenames for these respectively end in Activity and Spectrum For multi detector configurations ISOTOPIC Operator generates an HTML report for each individual detector and a report in which the results from all detectors are averaged or weighted as specified for the configuration The filename for this averaged report ends in Ave 1 INTRODUCTION 1 6 1 1 Reanalysis When you reanalyze a Container Surface Mode scan data set a new suite of spectrum analysis and report files are created the original files are not overwritten Filenames are structured as follows Container ID Buf nnnnn where Container ID is entered on the upper section of the ISOTOPIC Operator screen Buf identifies these as files generated using a buffer window and nnnnn is a numerical suffix reflecting the number of reanalyses performed in a buffer window for the current database 1 6 2 Soil Mode The Soil Mode setup dialog includes analysis acquisition detector calibration and report settings which can be saved as standalone m1 files rather than configurations saved in a database for later reuse The files generated for each sample include SPC An1 UFO and RPT files Additional information is captured in the database for each measuremen
251. form type binary format Alternate name for spectrum files used for analysis when the sPc name is already in use same format as SPC ROT channel pairs created by the ROI Save File function binary format BitMaP Windows bitmap Spectrum Bmp is the spectrum histogram picture Activity Bmp is the fine tune plot picture Miscellaneous Files CaLibration full energy efficiency calibration Inform style binary format LIBrary nuclide library Inform style binary format UnFormatted Output analysis results Inform style binary format 327 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual EFT EFficiency Table used for efficiency Calibrate Recall Calibration function and created with the Save button on the Efficiency Calibration Sidebar formatted ASCII text also lines that do not begin with numeric values are ignored ENT ENergy Table used for energy Calibrate Recall Calibration function and created with the Save button on the Energy Calibration Sidebar formatted ASCII text also lines that do not begin with numeric values are ignored RPT RePorT output of analysis engine ASCII text Also file extension for Crystal Reports templates HTML HyperText Markup Language web browser markup language Output format for Operator program reports TXT TeXT general ASCII text files used by File Print PBC Peak
252. from the peak To turn off hover mode select Show Hover Window again to remove the checkmark 7 1 4 11 Sum Spectrum This sums the gross counts in the area selected with the rubber rectangle or if you have not selected an area the gross counts in the entire spectrum The results are displayed on the status line and indicate the span of channels summed 7 1 4 12 Print Graph This command prints performs a quick print of the contents of the Expanded Spectrum Window using the currently selected printer and print settings these will be either the default printer and print settings for this PC or the printer and settings used most recently during this GVPlot session To change printers and or print properties use the Print command on the File menu page 303 7 1 4 13 Properties This opens the Graph Properties dialog which is discussed in Section 7 1 3 3 310 7 UTILITIES 7 1 5 Command Line Interface The GVPlot command line interface supports options available in the interactive mode as shown below GvPlot lt spectrum gt U lt ufofile gt R lt roifile gt S lt setfile gt P where lt spectrum gt Specifies the spectral data file SPC An1 or CHN The extension must be included U lt ufofile gt Specifies the uFo file The extension must be included R lt roifile gt Specifies the RoT file The extension must be included S lt setfile gt Specifies the settings file The extension must be
253. g the Rise Time in Digital MCBs To achieve the best results for your application when using a digital spectrometer such as a DSPEC series instrument or digiDART we recommend that you set the rise time of the pulses being processed by the digital filter to the minimum value for the resolution needed The pulse rise time and also fall time is based on the time required for each pulse to reach its peak value This peaking time is about twice that indicated by the conventional time constants displayed on the front panel of commercial analog amplifiers For example germanium detectors are often specified at a 6 us time constant this setting is equivalent to 12 us peaking rise time in our digital spectrometers Up to some value of rise time one can expect improved resolution with increasing rise time there will however be a tradeoff in maximum throughput to memory Figure 33 illustrates an example of this tradeoff ORTEC digital spectrometers operate well above the peak of the throughput curve Operating there allows these instruments to handle an even higher rate of incoming counts but with less data into memory and therefore longer counting time to the same detection limit It is possible to move the peak of the curve to the right more counts to memory with higher input count rate by reducing the pulse rise and fall time thereby trading off resolution for maximum count rate Table 2 is a guide to choosing a count rate that will e
254. ges A 1 1 ISOWAN32 and ISOENV32 The ISOWAN32 and ISOENV32 analysis engines analyze a complete spectrum These programs are run by ISOTOPIC and can also be run by other programs These analysis programs read the command line to control the analysis The command line shown here for ISOWAN32 only is ISOWAN32 file SPC DEBUG file INI file spc This is the spectrum filename and it must be the first argument For a complete analysis it must contain all the analysis parameters and calibrations The output files are the input file name with the extension of uFo for the binary output and the extension of RPT for the text output DEBUG This optional parameter controls the output of debugging information on the ISOWAN32 Window ISOTOPIC sets this parameter when ISOTOPIC is run in debug mode This produces considerable output and significantly slows the execution It must be the second or third argument 313 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual file INI This optional file is the INI file such as B30WINDS INI for controlling the analysis It overrides the normal default file If the file cannot be found or read the default file name is used If the default file cannot be found or read the internal options are used By selecting different INT files for different spectra different analyses can be produced A 1 2 isoQED ini The isoQED ini initialization file contains information necessary to develop detector cha
255. ghting The sensitivity can be set at any integer value from 1 to 5 with 1 the most sensitive that is 1 finds the most peaks A value of 1 will find small peaks but will also find many false peaks A value of 5 will locate all the large peaks but might miss some of the smaller peaks If too high some small peaks will be missed In the interactive mode many regions will be deconvoluted unnecessarily if the value is too sensitive The parabolic background method is disabled for energies above 200 keV if the sensitivity is set to 1 In the Library section Match Width sets the maximum amount by which a peak centroid can deviate from the nearest library peak energy and still be associated with that library peak The value entered is multiplied by the FWHM at the peak energy to get the width used If the value is too small some spectrum peaks will be misidentified due to statistical variation in the centroid and if it is too large some library peaks will be incorrectly identified A value of 0 5 is the factory default If the Match Width is set to a value other than 0 5 the value will be printed on the QA sample measurement report The Fraction Limit is one of the parameters used to determine the presence or absence of a nuclide The sum of the emission probabilities of the peaks in the spectrum identified with the nuclide is divided by the sum of the emission probabilities of all peaks of the nuclide in the energy range being analyzed
256. he Library buttons on the Status Sidebar f Peak f The Peak buttons move the marker up and down through all the peaks in the spectrum This includes non zero area library peaks and unknown peaks above the peak search sensitivity cutoff Unknown i The Unknown buttons move the marker up and down through the unknown peaks that satisfy the sensitivity cutoff in energy order skipping over any library peaks f Mutiplet Y The Multiplet buttons move up and down through the multiplet or deconvoluted regions in the spectrum The multiplet up button goes to the first lowest energy peak of the next higher multiplet Similarly the multiplet down button goes to the last highest energy peak of the next lower multiplet To look at individual peaks in the multiplet use the Peak Energy or Unknown buttons The ROI Peak and Library buttons on the Status Sidebar are also active Marking the Show Residuals checkbox adds a line beneath the spectrum that displays the difference between the actual spectrum and the calculated spectrum based on the analysis and the calibration peak shape An example is shown in Fig 122 Analysis Results Table Figure 120 shows the Analysis Results Table window The table records can be sorted by any parameter e g energy area nuclide FWHM by clicking on the desired column header Figure 122 Spectrum Residuals Display arrow The Analysis Sidebar control menu is shown in Fig 123 click the
257. he calibration stored in the A AAA MCB or in the spectrum the current working calibration The wizard will skip this calibration step However if review of the _ Cancel He calibration shows a problem you can repeat the process with new options using the Edit buttons on the final wizard dialog Figure 37 Calibration Wizard Opening Screen Create New This choice means that the calibration selected energy and or efficiency will be replaced by the results of the subsequent steps All of the peak calculations use the Settings Configurations values This is to ensure that the calibration and analysis calculations are the same Be sure to check the settings 68 3 MENU COMMANDS before starting the wizard There are several important analysis settings If spectrum has high dead time there will also be a significant amount of random summing The correction for random summing is applied in the calibration calculations The Random Summing factor is discussed in Section 4 7 4 and entered on the Sample tab under Settings Configurations The starting channel of the Analysis Region should be set above the low level cutoff The peak cutoff sensitivity used in the calibration is the smaller of the following 10 or the value entered in Settings Configurations The peak search level is either 4 or the value selected in Settings Configurations whichever is larger Read From File This means that the calibration will be read
258. he height of the peak The result is then smoothed with a smoothing function equal to the resolution of the detector at this energy This background is calculated after the deconvolution and if the stepped background is needed the net spectrum is recalculated and the deconvolution is repeated Total of Steps Background Steps Background Slope Across Peak Area COUNTS X 1000 Background Based On Slope Above Peak Area 460 480 420 440 CHANNEL NUMBER Figure 176 Stepped Background A real spectrum with stepped background is shown in Fig 177 The two components of the doublet are of equal size 197 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 315 Left Side of Right Peak Right Side of Left Peak Multiplet Sum Lyi i I i 7 i T uo sl PA di ay A d Steps Right Peak Left Peak Centroid Centroid Figure 177 Stepped Background 4 2 3 Parabolic Background In some cases like that shown in Fig 178 the straight line background can be significantly above the actual spectrum This can occur if the peaks are on the low energy side of a rapidly rising background In this case 1f these two conditions are met the parabolic background is calculated 1 The background on the low energy side of the multiplet is less than the background on the high energy side 2 At least 3 contiguous points in the lower 75 of the multiplet region are less than the
259. herefore assumed to be representing a planar source distribution 242 4 ANALYSIS METHODS For example assume Detector orientation down E 2 5 MeV L D 1 3 a p 1 Since a p gt 0 5 assume a p The corresponding value for N N is 1 12 Applying the polynomial fit used by the software for the same conditions the following coefficients would be selected d 1 43966 Solving this polynomial would yield a N N value of 1 1186 which rounds off to 1 12 Example 3 For the case where a p is within the range described by 0 1 lt a p lt 0 5 the M 1 software calculates a value for N N that represents the median value of N N for a p 0 and N N for a p N N The terms x a p 0 and x a p are determined as described in Cases 1 and 2 0 0 respectively For example assume Detector orientation down E 2 5 MeV L D 1 3 a p 0 3 Since a p gt 0 1 and o p gt 0 5 NV N will be represented as the median of the two special cases previously outlined i e where the source is uniformly distributed a p 0 and where the source is a planar distribution a p 243 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Values for N N for these special conditions have been calculated in Cases 1 and 2 From those cases which assume the same conditions given above except for the value of a p we see that Ny 1 07 125 No a p 0 an
260. ialog Fig 82 The calculation is based on the Crystal Diameter Collimator depth and inner diameter and Length Units for the current configuration First choose the Parameter to Calculate When you select Standoff the FOV field becomes active and the lower left button label reads Calculate FOV Enter the detector s FOV and click on the Calculate button The result is the effective detector diameter facing the sample Use it to find the optimum detector standoff the use of which will reduce measurement uncertainty The new FOV is displayed both in the FOV field and just below the stone wall on the diagram Field of View Det Standoff cm Configuration Collimator Detector Standoff 30 cm Depth Recess 20 00 cm Crystal Diameter mm Inner Diameter 7 00 cm Field of View FO 5 cm Parameter to Calculate Length Units C Standoff e FOV Figure 82 Calculate the FOV or Standoff When you select FOV the Detector Standoff field becomes active and the lower left button reads Calculate Standoff Enter the standoff distance and click on the Calculate button The result is the detector to item distance at which there is no attenuation caused by the collimator If you position the detector closer to the item being measured than the FOV would recommend the uncertainly will increase The new standoff is displayed in the Standoff field and above the detector in the diagram 116 3 MENU COMMANDS Click on Exit to return
261. ibrary peaks Only peaks that satisfy the sensi tivity cutoff are shown Note that the Library Peak and Unknown buttons select different groups of peaks The Multiplet buttons move up and down through the multiplet or deconvoluted regions in the spectrum The next time you click on the multiplet up button the marker goes to the first lowest energy peak of the next higher multiplet The next down button goes to the last highest energy peak of the next lower multiplet To look at 3 MENU COMMANDS Analysis kJ Xx m Donsccccososooncncecasoarocencccenoso L8 nE Add Delete N cide ifi Energy 4 Peak amp Unknown A1 amp Multiplet 41 individual peaks in the multiplet use the Peak Energy or Unknown buttons Figure 126 Analysis Display Controls To add a peak to the analysis library position the marker at the desired location and click on Add This adds a temporary nuclide to the library assigned the name Analyze in the results table with a peak at this energy A new analysis is performed and the new results are displayed More peaks can be added as needed To delete a peak click on the peak energy in the Analysis Results List The marker will jump to this channel in the spectrum Click on Delete A new analysis is performed and the new results are displayed Shift keV 0 00 The energy calibration for all the peaks in the spectrum can be shifted with the Shift keV field and slide bar
262. ield of the nuclide peak matrix All peaks found by the peak search routine and not in the library are included in the deconvolution regardless of the sensitivity setting unless all the deconvolution candidates are unknown peaks with uncertainty greater than the sensitivity setting in which case the region is ignored 4 2 1 Background for Multiplets The background for peak multiplets is calculated in an analogous manner to singlets with the exception that the width of the region is from 1 5 times the FWHM below the lowest peak to 1 5 times the FWHM above the highest peak Fig 175 Ww tl Low Energy Region High Energy Region Background pe Background COUNTS X 10 682 2700 26 CHANNEL NUMBER Figure 175 Background for Multiplets 196 4 ANALYSIS METHODS 4 2 2 Stepped Background If the slope of the background across the peak area is less than the slope of the background above higher in energy the peak area that is if the background under the peaks is declining faster than the background above the peak area is declining a step is inserted in the background for each positive area peak Fig 176 The total height of the steps is equal to the difference between the background below the peak area and the value of the background above the peak region projected backward to the background point at the low end of the multiplet The size of the step inserted at each peak centroid is proportional to t
263. ies Section 3 2 8 Shift Alt gt lt Shift Alt gt on the keyboard and Keypad lt Alt gt lt Alt gt 6 2 13 Fine Gain Large Move Shift Alt gt lt Shift Alt gt lt Shift Alt gt and lt Shift Alt gt step the internal amplifier of the selected Detector if it has a software controlled amplifier up or down by a large increment of fine gain If the gain stabilizer is active the display of the histogram data might not change The fine gain can also be set using Acquire MCB Properties Section 3 2 8 lt Alt gt lt Alt gt on the keyboard and Keypad lt Alt gt Alt gt 6 2 14 Screen Capture lt PrintScreen gt The lt PrintScreen gt key captures the entire monitor display to the Windows Clipboard where it is available for use in other applications such as word processors Windows Paint etc Some older keyboards require lt Alt PrintScreen gt or lt Shift PrintScreen gt A typical usage would be to set up the display as desired for the snapshot then press lt PrintScreen gt Start the desired graphics or word processing application Copy the image from 293 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual the Clipboard with lt Ctrl V gt or Edit Paste refer to the documentation for the graphics or word processing program See the FullShot manual for other screen capture and screen printing methods 6 3 Keyboard Number Combinations NOTE Only
264. ig 153 are available for both buffer and Detector windows See Section 2 3 3 for ROI opera tions performed with the mouse ROI e off F2 or Alt O Mark F2 or Alt M UnMark F2 or Alt U Mark Peak Insert Clear Delete Clear All Save File Recall File Figure 153 ROI Menu 169 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 3 8 1 Off Mark UnMark No function within ISOTOPIC v4 x To mark ROIs use the rubber rectangle and right mouse button menu Section 3 11 Mark Peak discussed below or the lt F2 gt key Section 6 4 1 3 8 2 Mark Peak This function marks an ROI in the spectrum at the marker position in one of two ways 1 If the spectrum is calibrated the region is centered on the marker with a width of three times the calibrated FWHM There does not need to be a peak at the marker position 2 Ifthe spectrum is not calibrated the region is centered on the peak located within two channels of the marker and as wide as the peak If the peak search fails or if the peak is not well formed no ROI is marked There is no limit on the size of a peak or ROI therefore in some uncalibrated spectra the algorithm could mark large ROIs ROIs can also be marked this way with the ROI Ins button on the Status Sidebar the Mark ROI button on the Toolbar Keypad lt Ins gt and Insert See also Mark ROI on the right mouse button menu Section 3 11 8 3 8 3 Clear This clears the ROI bits of all RO
265. igher throughput with somewhat worse resolution Increasing the rise time to a large value can increase worsen the resolution due to the increase in the signal noise included in the peak signal Use the up down arrows to adjust the Rise Time within the range of 0 2 Field Data About Status Presets MDA Preset Nuclide Report to 23 0 After all the controls have Amplifier Amplifier2 apc Stabilizer HighVoltage been adjusted return to the Amplifier ES TES g Ise Ime atop tab and click on Start Auto The E manfoso most recent settings are saved in the digiDART firmware even when the Ti 0 03906 Y power is turned off Pole Zero m InSight Start Stop For the more advanced user the InSight mode gives a direct view of all the parameters and the controls to adjust them interactively while collecting live data To access the InSight mode go to the InSight section on the Amplifier 2 tab and click on Start The InSight mode is discussed in more detail in the MCB Properties Manual Figure 23 The digiDART Amplifier 2 Tab Note that the Amplifier 2 tab graphically presents a modeled shape This is not a sampled waveform of the actual pulse shape only a model based on the current parameters The modeled shape is nominally a quasi trapezoid whose sides and top might be adjusted by the controls in this dialog While a particular control is being adjusted the model is update
266. ight mouse button menu Section 7 1 4 2 lo Zoom Out increases the horizontal full scale of the Expanded Spectrum Window so the peaks appear reduced in size You can also access this command from the right mouse button menu Section 7 1 4 3 KA Center forces the marker to the center of the screen by shifting the spectrum without moving the marker from its current channel po Baseline Zoom sets and keeps the baseline of the Expanded Spectrum Window at zero counts in Linear scale mode and 1 0E 0 counts in Logarithmic scale mode When Baseline Zoom is off the baseline can be offset to a higher value This is useful to show small peaks on a high background 7 1 3 Menu Commands 7 1 3 1 File Figure 229 shows the File menu Use these commands to select the Eie spectrum analysis and ROIs to be displayed recall or save GVPlot Recall Spectrum settings files and print the spectrum Recall ROls Recall UFO File Use the Recall Spectrum command Fig 230 to open a spectrum Recall Settings file When the Show Description checkbox at the bottom of the Save Settings As dialog is marked you can click on each spectrum filename and see mu Chl P its sample description spectrum format and number of channels as an aid in selecting the correct file Exit Figure 229 The File Menu The recalled spectrum will be displayed using the most recently ES selected graph color symbol and axis scaling settings
267. ight move the peak in the spectrum and because it ensures that the maximum range is available for the stabilization process The Suggest button is used to set the peak center and peak width of the peak area used by the stabilizer Before selecting this command the ROI must be marked and the marker put in the region to be used When operating the peak will be centered in the ROI After the region has been recorded the stabilization is turned on If the stabilization is turned on when this command is executed the old stabilization region is replaced by the new peak defined by the marker and stabilization continues using the new peak 53 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual The Zero Stabilizer Enabled checkbox enables or disables the zero stabilization It can only be turned on after the Suggest button has been used to select a working peak 3 2 8 4 ZDT Zero Dead Time Mode An extended live time clock increases the collection time real time of the acquisition to correct for input pulse train losses incurred during acquisition due to system dead time This corrected time value known as the live time is then used to determine the net peak count rates necessary to determine nuclide activities As an example consider the case where the spectrometry amplifier and ADC are 60 dead during the acquisition the elapsed real time will be Live Time Real Time 0 60 Live Time x 100 100 Dead Time If the
268. igure 184 Activity of a Point Source Interacting with the Top and Side Surfaces of a Detector Once the efficiencies of both the front and side of the detector are determined the activity of the point source can be computed as shown in Eqn 101 CR Az Act uM 101 a TENET owe where Act reported activity Bq the solid angle subtended on the top surface of the detector radians the solid angle subtended on the side surface of the detector radians attenuation through the side of the end cap and cup holding the detector attenuation through the side dead layer of Ge constant involving the yield branching ratio decay corrections and unit conversion factors y emitted Bq N A AAD D II When computing the activity of a item the volume must be subdivided into small voxels each of which must be corrected for matrix and container corrections The activity of a voxel Act is shown in Egn 102 CR V 47 e 0 0 6 0 R Vk Act 102 224 4 ANALYSIS METHODS Note that for a box the volume of each voxel is the same However for a cylinder or other items the voxel volumes might not be the same and the activity must be weighted accordingly where item OON n 3i 103 activity of item being measured Bq volume of the item cm volume of the i voxel cm matrix correction for the i voxel calculated as e where 4 is the mass att
269. ile or a File on disk If the Internal box is not checked a filename must be entered The working file is the one most recently loaded with Settings Peak Background Correction Select PBC See Section 3 5 6 2 for details _ Cancel Hep Figure 211 Corrections Tab Peaked Background Correction 5 4 Caution Running the MCB Configuration Program Can Affect Container Configurations and QA In ISOTOPIC Detector identification 1s based on the instrument ID number and text Description assigned to the MCB by the MCB Configuration program The ID number and Description string are assigned when MCB Configuration polls the local PC and network for attached ORTEC MCBs and then builds a Master Detector List of the instruments found The configuration program presents the list to you for approval Before clicking on the Close button to finalize the MCB Configuration process you can either accept the default IDs and descriptions or modify them we recommend that you assign a meaningful detector description There are two ways in which these two pieces of information are tied to data processing in ISOTOPIC Therefore it is important that these properties be preserved when you re run the MCB Configuration program to update your detector list whenever 1 a new instrument has been added to your PC and or network 2 an MCB has been removed or 3 an already configured instrument has been moved to another PC or port 270 5 QUALITY ASS
270. imes and real times are not altered by any strip operation The peak uncertainty see Section 4 Analysis Methods will not include the stripped areas and might not represent the true uncertainty 3 5 Settings Figure 72 shows the Settings menu commands for detector and analysis setup and spectrum analysis Results can be displayed in Configurations Crystal Reports both graphic and text form The Attenuation command is only ES active in Container Surface Mode Pas BachcandiConadiod NOTE Before using the Configurations command open eee the Mode submenu and choose between Container Mode E Surface and Soil Modes so the proper series of Figure 72 Analyze Menu Configurations dialogs will be displayed Use Container Surface Mode for spills or other small floor areas where the Soil Mode is not appropriate If the Configurations command is gray inactive activate the command by choosing a Detector from the droplist on the Toolbar The spectrum analysis tools on the Diagnosis submenu Section 3 5 7 allow you to work with the analysis results uro files created with the Operator program In the interactive analysis mode peaks can be added deleted or shifted in energy These commands can be performed on data in the active spectrum buffer when the Detector is not acquiring data Interactive in Viewed Area is disabled gray for display widths above 4096 channels Display Analysis Results shows the results f
271. imes the calculated FWHM from the calibration below the centroid The 5 point average data at a given point is the sum of the data from two channels below the point to two channels above the point divided by 5 This is the same as smoothing the data with a smoothing width of 5 and coefficients of 0 2 for all points The background value is the minimum value of the moving 5 point average and the background channel number is the center channel of the 5 If the minimum average value is within one sigma counting statistics of the actual channel value at the assigned channel point this 5 point average is the low energy background value for this peak If the average value is not within one sigma of the actual data a 3 point average is used instead of the 5 point average to calculate a new minimum value This 3 point average minimum value is compared with the actual data at the assigned channel and is accepted if it is within 1 sigma of the actual data If the 3 point average also fails this test the data value at the assigned channel is used for the background 179 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 10 x COUNTS 2 765 777 790 CHANNEL NUMBER 75 Figure 165 Background Calculation The same process is repeated for the high energy side of the peak to calculate the background value above the peak The background under the peak is the straight line between these two values The net peak area and background are
272. iminators are under computer control The Lower Level Discriminator sets the level of Properties x Field Data About Status Presets MDA Preset Nuclide Report Amplifier Ampliier2 ADC Stabilizer HighVoltage ij Gate Conversion Gain IREZ E38 Lower Level Disc 50 Off Y z Upper Level Disc 16383 Real Time Live Time 304 92 295 40 Count Rate 901 Figure 24 The digiDART ADC Tab the lowest amplitude pulse that will be stored This level establishes a lower level cutoff by channel number for ADC conversions Setting that level above random noise increases useful throughput because the MCB is not unproductively occupied processing noise pulses The Upper Level Discriminator sets the level of the highest amplitude pulse that will be stored This level establishes an upper level cutoff by channel number for ADC conversions Stabilizer The digiDART has both a gain stabilizer and a zero stabilizer Gain and zero stabilization are discussed in detail in Section 3 2 8 2 The Stabilizer tab Fig 25 shows the current values for the stabilizers The value in each Adjustment section shows how much adjustment is currently applied The Initialize buttons set the adjustment to 0 If the value approaches 90 or above the amplifier gain should be adjusted so the stabilizer can continue to function when the adjustment value reaches 100 the stabilizer cannot make 40 Properties x Field
273. included P Print the plot to the PC s Windows default printer and exit automatically Used mainly in File Export 7 2 StdDist Spectra from GammaVision 32 and other ORTEC CONNECTIONS programs can be analyzed in ISOTOPIC if the point source calibration has been made on the detector The calibration can be performed in GammaVision but GammaVision does not store the distance between the source and the detector in the spectrum file It is stored in the file by ISOTOPIC see Fig 46 page 77 To add the distance to one or more SPC AN1 Or CLB files use the program StdDist exe located in c Program Files Isotopic41 or the directory in which ISOTOPIC was installed When you start StdDist exe the Isotopic Calibration Distance dialog Fig 242 opens To select the files to be modified click on Add This opens a standard file open dialog To select more than one file use lt Ctrl Left Click gt and lt Shift Left Click gt then click on OK The files will be displayed as shown in the figure To remove a file click to highlight it then click on Remove To remove all files from the list click on Clear 311 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual When the list of files is complete enter the Calibration source to detector distance in cm and click on Apply If a file that you wish to modify already contains a source to detector distance ISOTOPIC will dis play a warning message before overwriting the o
274. inding weak peaks that correspond to the library peaks 4 15 2 ISOENV32 ISOENV32 does a preliminary Mariscotti peak search of the spectrum and removes library nuclides for which sufficient energy peaks were not found A library based peak search is then performed using the reduced library A Directed Fit can also be used to generate negative peak areas to meet environmental reporting requirements Standard reports have a Summary of Peaks in Range section that displays potential library matches and associated activity concentration for each peak found during analysis This analysis engine works especially well with misshapen peaks and peaks with counts slightly higher than background Like the ISOWANG32 analysis engine the Peak Cutoff value is used to reduce false peaks Table 6 compares the two analysis engines M A Mariscotti A Method for Automatic Identification of Peaks in the Presence of Background and its Application to Spectrum Analysis Nuclear Instruments and Methods 50 309 320 1967 249 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Table 6 Feature Summary of ISOTOPIC Analysis Engines peaks found Feature ISOWAN3 ISOENV32 2 Uses an initial Mariscotti peak search 4 Uses an initial library based peak search V Removes nuclides from library not found in a preliminary peak search V Reports MDA for removed nuclides Y Utilizes gain shift corrections 4 Directe
275. ining net counts that bracket the target value on the low and high energy sides of the centroid are located and the low and high FWHM channels are determined using linear interpolation The FWHM is then calculated by subtracting the interpolated low energy channel from the interpolated high energy channel The same process is employed for calculating FW 1 X M for any specified X 3 4 3 Sum The Sum function performs its calculation in one of three ways depending on the position of the marker 97 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 1 If the marker is not in an ROI and a box is not defined the sum of the data channels of the Detector is shown on the display The complete channel width e g 1 to 16384 is summed 2 If the marker is not in an ROI and a box is defined the sum of the data channels in the box is shown on the display 3 If the marker is in an ROI the sum of the data channels in the ROI is shown on the display This is the same as the gross counts in the Peak Info display but can be used on wider ROIs 3 4 4 Smooth The Smooth function transforms the data in the buffer spectrum according to a five point area preserving binomial smoothing algorithm That is the existing data is replaced channel by channel with the averaged or smoothed data as follows S O 40 _ 60 40 O 16 26 where S the smoothed data in channel i O the original data in channel i 3 4 5 S
276. interest This will activate the gray Insert Copy button at the bottom of the PBC list and change its label to Insert plus the name of the nuclide Now in the PBC list click on the nuclide immediately below the desired insertion position then click on Insert nuclide name This will insert the nuclide and display the energies and backgrounds for its peaks in the analysis Double clicking on a nuclide in the analysis results list will insert it into the PBC list immediately above the highlighted PBC list nuclide To manually add a nuclide to the PBC list locate the nuclide immediately below the desired insertion position and click once to highlight it Next click on the manual Insert button to open the dialog shown in Fig 113 then follow the manual nuclide and peak insertion instructions that begin on page 143 144 3 MENU COMMANDS The entire analysis nuclide list can be copied to the PBC list by GvDemo UFO KEA opening the analysis list control menu Fig 116 and selecting Move Copy All to PBC Close ARIES Copy All to PBC To change the name of a nuclide on the PBC list double click on it Figure 116 Analysis to open the PBC Nuclide dialog Fig 113 Results List Control Menu To remove a nuclide from the PBC list click on the nuclide i then on Cut This will remove the nuclide from the list In Insert Cut addition it will activate the gray Paste button at the bottom ica Lm of the PBC list and change its la
277. ion 7 1 4 1 Figure 235 Draw Multiplet Modes If the spectrum is calibrated the Horizontal axis can be displayed in either Energy units or Channel numbers If the spectrum is not calibrated the horizontal axis is shown in channels and cannot be changed You can plot all or part of a spectrum by turning Auto X Range respectively on or off Turning Auto X Range off activates the x axis range fields that allow you to let the plot limits in either channels or keV select units from the droplist The plot limits are independent of the x axis units of measure This means that you can if you wish choose to display the x axis in Energy units then select the portion of the spectrum to be displayed as a range of channel numbers In order to easily compare spectra the energy can be set to values below the first channel in the spectrum In this case the data below channel 0 are plotted as 0 NOTE Manually setting the range for one axis disables zooming for that axis only If both axis ranges are manually fixed all zooming is disabled 305 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Title Text This dialog Fig 236 allows you to compose a title to Plot Options E3 be displayed at the top of the spectrum plot In addition you can choose whether or not to display the Real and Live Time Spectrum File Name and the sample or Detector description Title Additional Text RealandLive Time Spe
278. ion code in this example G52w2 01 analysis date and page number The input report code represents the user entered requests and the status on the program s ability to fulfill these requests The number is decoded into binary with the following bit usage 1 True if the spectrum is energy calibrated 2 True if the spectrum is efficiency calibrated 3 True if the library is a valid gamma ray library 4 True if the isotopic abundance will be reported 5 True if the isotopic matrix will be reported 6 True if the peak energy matrix will be reported 8 True if the PBC has been used 12 True if the directed fit has been enabled These flags represent the analysis performed This can be different than the analysis requested For example if the library could not be found this bit would be turned off Also the isotopic abundance and isotopic matrix output bits would be off and the peak energy matrix output bit would be turned on On this report the code 63 which is binary 0000 0011 1111 read digit numbers from right to left means that the spectrum is 1 energy calibrated 2 efficiency calibrated 3 valid library found 4 isotopic abundance is reported 5 isotope matrix is reported and 6 peak energy matrix is reported Normally this code just confirms that the proper analysis was performed In the case where the output report does not appear to be the correct form this code can help locate the difficulty 279 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISO
279. ional Engineering and Environmental Laboratory INEEL Typical data collection and analysis time for one point is 60 minutes 1 3 The ISOPLUS B32 Software ISOTOPIC is designed to analyze one spectrum or multiple spectra generated by any ORTEC CONNECTIONS 32 MCB for a single container ISOTOPIC can analyze the spectrum currently in the MCB memory or spectrum files on disk in any of several file formats including the advanced and archivable spc format both integer spc and real spc In addition ISOTOPIC allows you to directly read and write spectral data files in the ASCII spPz file format For more information on the contents of ORTEC spectrum files see the ORTEC Software File Structure Manual for DOS and Windows Systems Part No 753800 hereinafter called the File Structure Manual Attenuation and coefficients for common materials and situations are included in the ISOTOPIC attenuation database You can easily add other materials to the database as needed 7 K Helfer and K M Miller Calibration Factors for Ge Detectors Used for Field Spectrometry Health Physics Vol 55 No 1 pp 15 29 1988 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual The MCB hardware setup energy calibration and efficiency calibration baseline are performed in the Supervisor program The radionuclide identification and net count results are then processed within ISOTOPIC according to the EML method or the K 25 DOE method All sample analys
280. ions Date Is Active 208 liter drum 5 11 2007 2 08 00 PM B 25 Box 6 6 2007 9 49 33 AM Pu Capsule Config 5 17 2007 3 46 08 PM Point source in 4 container 5 17 2007 3 46 10 PM Water Filter 6 6 2007 4 27 32 PM Point Source 6 6 2007 4 27 42 PM LWS Config 5 22 2007 3 59 08 PM LWS Config02 5 17 2007 5 08 06 PM Dptions e Figure 144 Choose Which Configurations Will Be Available in the Container Wizard To activate or inactivate a configuration click to highlight it then click on Toggle Active To activate or inactivate more than one configuration at a time use Shift Left click to highlight a contiguous block of configurations or Ctrl Left click gt to highlight several discrete configurations then click on Toggle Active To close the dialog click Exit Figure 145 shows the correspondence between active configurations marked Yes in the Manage Configurations dialog and the choices available on the Configurations list in the Configuration Wizard 165 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Manage configurations 4 208 liter drum 5 11 2007 2 08 00 PM Yes 6 B 25 Box 6 6 2007 9 49 33 AM Yes EN 7 Pu Capsule Config 5 17 2007 3 46 08 PM No ASD 8 Point source in a container 5 17 2007 3 46 10 PM Yes 3 Water Filter 5 17 2007 3 46 12 PM No bie 10 Point Source 5 4 2007 11 05 22 AM No 11 LWS Config 5 22 2007 3 59 08 PM Yes 12 LWS Config02 5 17 2007 5 08 06 PM Yes Xn Edit Configurations B 25 Box
281. ions as is or Edit them at any time to suit your measurement configuration You can also create as many New configurations as desired The Start from existing configuration feature allows you to use an existing active configuration as a template for your new configuration NOTE Once a configuration has been created in the currently selected ISOTOPIC database it can be edited but not deleted The Manage Configurations feature under Services Database Management Section 3 7 1 4 allows you to mark old configurations as inactive which removes them from the wizard s Configurations and Start from existing configuration droplists In addition you can create a new database containing only the four default configurations see Section 3 7 1 1 101 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Select an existing configuration or mark the New radio button and enter a new Configuration name If you wish choose an existing configuration as a template All of the settings from the existing configuration will be copied to the new configuration Modify them as needed Click on Next 3 5 2 2 Container Page Use the Container page Fig 74 to characterize the item to be counted CONTAINER SETUP SUGGESTIONS e Model the activity rather than the container Note that usually but not always the activity takes the shape of the inner container The following shapes are available from the Container shape droplist Cylinder use
282. is changed The effect of optimization on the pulse can be seen in the InSight mode on the Amplifier 2 tab Note however that if the settings were close to proper adjustment before starting optimization the pulse shape might not change enough to be seen The most visible effect of incorrect settings is high or low side peak tailing or poor resolution For small changes in the settings the change in the shape of the spectrum peaks might be too small to see Patent number 5 872 363 Patent number 5 821 533 37 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Amplifier 2 Figure 23 shows the Amplifier 2 tab which accesses the advanced digiDART shaping controls includ ing the InSight Virtual Oscilloscope mode Note that InSight mode is help ful for timing and other diagnostic work but is generally not useful for simple spectroscopy applications It is explained in detail in the MCB Properties Manual The many choices of Rise Time allow a precise control in the tradeoff between resolution and throughput The value of the rise time parameter in the digiDART is roughly equivalent to twice the integration time set on a conventional analog spectroscopy amplifier Thus a digiDART value of 12 us corresponds to 6 us in a conventional amplifier Starting with the nominal value of 12 us increase the rise time for better resolution for expected lower count rates or when unusually high count rates are anticipated reduce the rise time for h
283. is used to select the local and networked Detectors Locked Detector that will be available to ISOTOPIC on this PC Other appli cations e g GammaVision AlphaVision MAESTRO on the same PC can have their own lists In this way the different Detectors on the network can be segregated by function or type Figure 152 shows the Detector List Editor dialog On the left is the Master Detector List of all Detectors on the system both local and connected via network This is created by the MCB Configuration program see the MCB Properties Manual The default descriptions are derived from the hardware and can be changed by running the MCB Configuration program manually The ISOTOPIC installation program initially sets the available Detector list identical to the master list The Master Detector List including the Detector descriptions is the same for all ORTEC programs e g ISOTOPIC MAESTRO GammaVision running on all PCs connected to the workgroup To add a Detector to the ISO Pick List for this PC click on the name in the Master list then click on Add To add all the Detectors on the Master Detector List click on All To remove a Detector from this local pick list click on the name in the ISO Pick List and click on Remove To remove all the Detectors click on New 168 Detector List Editor Master Detector List ISO Pick List 00001 DSJR D4 00001 DSJR 047 edited DSJ2 EP6 00002 DSJ2 EP6 DSJ2 EP 00003 DSJ2 EP
284. isor User s Manual You Select the QA spr file in the SAMPLE Type Analysis Settings File section The expected value of the activity of the sample is 1 1E 5 Bq 3 0 uCi Scale this up and down by 10 for Low High and 20 for Minimum Maximum into activity fields These values are shown in the SAMPLE Analysis Parameter Limits section in Fig 215 are now ready to collect data for the QA background followed by the QA check source measurements 9 10 11 12 Yo 276 Select Acquire QA Measure Background to start the background process You will be prompted to remove all the sources from the detector and click on OK Start The background spectrum will be collected and summed and stored in the QA database GvQa32 Mdb If any limits were exceeded a warning message will be displayed Select Acquire QA Measure Sample to start the sample process You will be prompted to place the QA source in the proper place on the detector and click on OK Start The sample spectrum will be collected and analyzed and the results stored in the QA database If any limits were exceeded a warning message will be displayed Note the Lock Acquire on Violation checkbox in the QA settings dialog If this box is marked and a limit is exceeded ISOTOPIC will display a QA warning each time you try to use the detector until the QA problem is corrected The background and sample spectra will automatically be stored according to the QA File Prefix an
285. ition and select OK Figure 39 Position the Source for Energy Calibration If the currently active window is a buffer or MCB that already contains a spectrum and in the case of the MCB if the Clear Data box is unmarked the existing spectrum will be used for the calibration ISOTOPIC will pause for a few seconds then notify you that acquisition is complete and ask if you wish to save the spectrum file If you answer Yes a file save dialog will open so you can assign a location and filename NOTE If at the end of acquisition not enough counts have accumulated for a good energy calibration you can acquire additional data by moving Back through the wizard to this 70 3 MENU COMMANDS screen increasing the Count Time and unmarking the Clear Data Before Start box then starting the additional acquisition When spectrum collection is complete or the buffer is used the energy and FWHM calibration will be performed If successful the wizard will go to the next step which will depend on your initial choices in the opening dialog On the Finish Calibration Wizard screen Fig 49 you will have the opportunity to review and 1f necessary edit the resulting energy calibration by clicking on the Edit Energy button If the energy calibration process detects a severe error an error message is displayed Click on OK to acknowledge the error The calibration process will stop at this point If the energy calibration process de
286. ity zl Most C1 C2 3 C4 C5 Leas c User gvdemo lib Peak Evaluation Match Width 0 5 FWHM keV Peak Cutoff 5 50 Directed Fit J Background Points MDA Type C Auto C i 3 ORTEC Traditional v Activity and Quantity Units Scale Factors to Reported Activity Base Activity Units Activity label Multiplier BajKg ucitka 8q Quantity Label Kg Divisor 1 Additional Error Decay Correction Systematic g Random g Decay Date and Time Results from Multiple Detectors Analysis Range E Start 20 ch Stop 16000 ch Cancel lt Back Next gt Figure 77 Analysis Tab Analysis Page used in error weighting The sensitivity can be set at any integer value from 1 to 5 with 1 the most sensitive that is 1 finds the most peaks A value of 1 will find small peaks but will also find many false peaks A value of 5 will locate all the large peaks but may miss some of the smaller peaks If too high some small peaks will be missed In the interactive mode many regions will be deconvoluted unnecessarily if the value is too sensitive The parabolic background method is disabled for energies above 200 keV if the sensitivity is set to 1 In the Peak Evaluation section the Peak Cutoff limits the unknown peak list to peaks with 1 sigma uncertainty below this value Mark the Directed Fit box if you wish to allow for negative peak areas in low level spectra Directed fit is described in Section
287. ium attenuation from these X rays but an approximation can be made from the 98 185 keV activity ratio The uranium attenuation is approximated be adding a uranium wt into the matrix The program gives an estimate when these X rays are present but the best effect is determined from the fine tuned interactive screen in the Operator program There is no corresponding method for plutonium self attenuation determination 4 11 6 Uncertainty Estimate The overall uncertainty is given by be c E go 109 voxel avg s O overall where o the systematic uncertainty assumed to be fixed at 10 Ox the peak fit uncertainty from the peak analysis Section 4 1 4 Oxe the uncertainty in modeling a voxel as a point source given as O 100 CF CF voxel edge OF 110 where CF is the correction factor to convert peak count rate to activity calculated for a point source in the center of a voxel at the center of the container see the discussion on calculating point source correction factors beginning with Eqn 102 on page 224 and CF is the correction factor for a point source at the far corner of the voxel 231 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Owe the weighted averaged uncertainty over all voxels given by avg L V Ds Dy DO 111 avg n gt V Dy Di D l where V volume of the i voxel cm D matrix correction for the i voxel D inner
288. ive residuals See the discussion on page 307 Marker Information Line beneath the spectrum shows the Marker channel marker energy and channel contents The ROI section shows the boundaries of the ROI in energy for calibrated spectra or channels for uncalibrated spectra the number of counts in the ROI and other information see the discussion associated with Fig 240 on page 309 Status Bar below the Marker Information Line displays program status information such as warning messages You can display or hide the status bar from the View menu 2 The Toolbar The row of buttons below the Menu Bar provides convenient shortcuts to some of the most common GVPlot commands The Recall button retrieves an existing spectrum file This is the equivalent of selecting File Recall Spectrum from the menu E Print sends the current spectrum immediately to the default Windows printer without Log opening the standard Print dialog If you wish to switch to another printer or adjust the default print properties use the File Print command Section 7 1 3 1 Vertical Log Lin Scale switches between logarithmic and linear scaling When switching from logarithmic to linear it uses the previous linear scale setting 301 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Zoom In decreases the horizontal full scale of the Expanded Spectrum Window so the peaks appear magnified You can also access this command from the r
289. k Insert Library Nuclide zix Nuclide Name I Half Life o Days Uncertainty 0 0000 Nuclide Flags Thermal Neutron Activation T Fast Neutron Activation F Fission Product I Naturally Occurring Isotope N Photon Reaction P Charged Particle Reaction C No MDA Calculation M Activity Not in Total 8 Cancel Figure 133 Insert a Nuclide into a Library 3 6 3 3 Editing Library List Nuclides To edit the information about a nuclide in the working library Click on the nuclide to highlight it The Edit button in the upper right Edit Cd 109 of Fig 130 will change to Edit plus the name of the nuclide as shown in Figure 134 Figure 134 Ready to Edit this Nuclide Click on Edit nuclide This will open the Edit Library Nuclide dialog Fig 135 The Nuclide Name Half Life Uncertainty and Nuclide Flags will already be listed The Uncertainty is a single number that represents the uncertainty 2 sigma or 9596 confidence level in the values entered for this nuclide It is added in quadrature to form the total uncertainty on the final report The Uncertainty value should be taken from the nuclear data sheet for this nuclide The default is zero but 2 is a realistic number The first six Nuclide Flags are used to show how the nuclide was produced For example Thermal Neutron Activation T indicates that this nuclide is produced when the pare
290. kness to obtain a better result The ISOTOPIC method is based on using models for attenuation and geometry to extend the point source efficiency calibration to the actual geometry of the container The results are thus based on the measured efficiency of the detector using NIST traceable sources This in field calibration allows the use of any germanium detector Complete details are given in Section The soil analysis also referred to herein as the M 1 method implements the one meter in situ analysis methods developed by EML NYC It follows the methods described in In Situ Gamma Ray Spectrometry in the Environment ICRU Report and complies with the requirements of In situ photon spectrometry system using a germanium detector for measuring discrete radionuclides in the environment IEC 209 FDIS Beck H L et al In Situ Ge Li and Nal Tl Gamma Ray Spectrometry U S Department of Energy Environmental Measurements Laboratory HASL 258 September 1972 International Commission on Radiation Units and Measurements Gamma Ray Spectrometry in the Environment ICRU Report 53 ICRU Maryland December 1994 International Electrotechnical Commission In situ photon spectrometry using a germanium detector for measuring discrete radionuclides in the environment IEC 209 FDIS May 1992 4 1 INTRODUCTION This method has been extended to include large detectors It does provide for specific nuclide distributions based on
291. l data of the nth channel C n the second difference at the nth channel 194 4 ANALYSIS METHODS The peak centroid is calculated using the weighted channel sum method as follows h Y iG i P s 38 i i where P peak centroid in channels C net contents of channel i i channel number l peak low limit h peak high limit Once a peak is located it is recorded and the peak search starts again two channels later After a peak has been located if it is not in the library the peak background net area and uncertainty are calculated in the same manner as library peaks If the peak uncertainty is less than the sensitivity threshold level entered the peak is added to the list of unknowns If the peak is within the deconvolution width approximately 3 3 times the FWHM of a library peak then the peak is marked on the output list The unknown peaks are included in a deconvolution when they are close enough to affect the peak area calculation If a peak is located in the spectrum and the library peak is a subsidiary peak where the major peak has not been found the peak will be maintained in the unknown list 4 1 8 Narrow Peaks The peak width is compared to the calibration width at the half and tenth maximum If the peak is too wide or too narrow it is marked to show this in the Operator report If the peak is too narrow it is not used in the abundance calculation unless the accept low peaks or accept all p
292. l remain open 6 Inthe upper Efficiency section of the Efficiency Calibration Sidebar enter the Efficiency in the top field and the corresponding peak energy in the at keV field then click on Enter The Efficiency table will reopen displaying your entry Note that if you have specified a knee on the sidebar that entry will be displayed in the Efficiency Table 7 To enter the next peak energy and efficiency click the cursor anywhere in the spectrum window so that no entries in the Efficiency Table window are highlighted then repeat Step 6 until you have entered all energies and efficiencies of interest Isotopic Supervisor Container Surface Mode Efficiency Table File Acquire Calibrate Calculate Analyze Library Services ROI Display Window me ez x nas fos a 52 29 9 14 Par Bl Efficiency Table Bl x Efficiency 6 8928E 002 at fi 65 8500 keV Delete Entry 0 07818 Recall Save Efficiency Mode 0 Above 3 Energy keV Polynomial y Below None Kree mor A DRTEC 4 42 28 AM Mon 4 5 04 Marker 1 004 165 93 keV 28 536 Cnts Effic 0 071578 Calibrating Close Sidebar to Finish or ESC to Cancel Figure 44 The Efficiency Calibration Sidebar Table and Graph 76 3 MENU COMMANDS 8 Click on the sidebar s Save button and assign a filename We suggest ere 2 that you include the certificate number as part of the name M
293. lation of the efficiency attenuation and geometry corrections The ISOTOPIC method from work done at the DOE K 25 Site uses a point source standard traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology NIST to calibrate the absolute gamma ray detection efficiency for a high purity germanium detector HPGe Other standards might be necessary to verify the measurement analysis system The ISOTOPIC Supervisor program provides complete control over all adjustments in the spectrum analysis container matrix and other counting details The supervisor models the container configurations selects the appropriate analysis techniques libraries report parameters and other settings required for proper analysis Work flow in ISOTOPIC Operator is based on decisions made in the Supervisor program The supervisor predefines the initial data collection and analysis configuration Then depending on the flags set during configuration operators can perform interactive analyses or are constrained to a fixed analysis mode In the fixed analysis mode all containers and contents are assumed to be similar so they are all analyzed in the same way The operator simply initiates the measurement sequence and apart from the entry of container identification information all other operations are automatic In the interactive mode after the data have been analyzed the operator can adjust several parameters such as matrix density and container thic
294. ld distance with the value entered here If necessary you can make a copy of the original file and modify the source to detector distance in the copy 312 Isotopic Calibration Distance Calibration source to detector distance C User lsoO00077 4n1 0 00E 00 C User lso0007 Spe 0 00E 00 C User lso00078 4n1 0 00E 00 C User MixE uDO O mm Clb 2 30E 01 C User MixE ul 00mm Clb 2 30E 01 C User MixEu250mm Clb 2 30E 01 Add Remove Clear Figure 242 Add a Source to Detector Distance to a Spectrum Analysis or Calibration File APPENDIX A STARTUP AND ANALYSIS SETUP To start ISOTOPIC Supervisor click on Start on the Windows Taskbar then on Programs Isotopic 41 and Isotopic Supervisor 4 1 see Fig 243 Eg GY Plot Fi MAESTRO 32 E MCB Configuration Fm ORTEC W nuclide Library Editor A er Startup mj Isotopic Operator 4 0 Log Off Shut Down Isotopic Supervisor 4 0 Figure 243 Starting ISOTOPIC Supervisor A 1 Analysis Setup All of the analysis engines have several options that can be specified in a disk file B30WINDS INI and the report output text can be specified in a disk file B3 0WIN TXT These files are loaded by SETUP but if not found or cannot be read the internal defaults are used As Isupplied the files are the same as the internal defaults These files should only be changed after careful consideration of the impact of the chan
295. le that stores calibration records can be used This function operates the same as Calibrate Recall Calibration recalling the efficiency calibration only When lt Back Next gt Cancel Help finished click on Next Please enter the pathname of the efficiency calibration file Path C AUserslLBOTTLE CLB Figure 48 Select the File that Contains the Desired Efficiency Calibration 79 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 3 3 2 4 Reviewing the Calibration Wizard Results The final screen in the calibration wizard is the review screen shown in Fig 49 This shows the plots of the results of all the calibration steps Ignore the TCC fit view in the lower right corner To review and or edit the energy or FWHM calibration click on Edit Energy Section 3 3 2 5 To review or edit the efficiency calibration select Edit Efficiency Section 3 3 2 6 Finish Calibration Wizard CHANNEL SE ie ENERGY ENERGY Edit Energy Save Calibration Edit Efficiency lt Back Finish Cancel Help Figure 49 Review the Calibration Results 3 3 2 5 Editing the Energy Calibration To review or change the energy or FWHM calibration click on Edit Energy This opens the complete energy calibration dialog as explained in Section 3 3 3 page 86 If any changes are made the efficiency calibration should be repeated The efficiency calibration can be corrected by clicking on Edit Efficie
296. lear Spectrum A arr pac ge hot aa 33 COMBINE tests Rh att ENERO ER 174 Command line COV PO bhp eL ease nati ae A 311 Compare spectra c ss verra 31 174 290 Configuration Container Surface Mode 100 SOIL MQE d at eod ate rto e eit 117 Container Surface Mode Lus 1 configuration wizard 100 A ave ee UR ERE wat ied 8 Copy to DUE sai x choca oath pae Geek Gites 33 Correction als o es 263 270 PO tech ee DE ERE asi 270 Count TAES od iex xh aet eure A EY ae 36 38 Database management A its 162 transferring data from ISOTOPIC 321 Dead time uice eR RC ROV ee hee 37 46 decay correction Lx swat tette put hens 200 267 deconvolution 4 21 ez see rete ex 61 284 detector background QA ua os ra 251 database QA s eoe cette ota e th 251 detector table QA cc sce scr RR 328 EA epe ori ait ate etii etate i Rh 167 DICK MISE 428 Kak eh ahve ase LT 14 status sidebar ex slew ace red 15 unlock uice hoot ae aetema e ela 167 Detector sb sed de utet x Rotae 14 digiDART detector state of health SOH 43 Directed dt cr 185 269 Display mode points fill 173 Display menu cue s dex at tote a hwo ts 171 Drag and diop otr nds 22 Edit detector llist as ht arte Roh 168 Efficiency InterpolauVe ic o ace ace enlace tae S eM 66 AGAR e desee x adc ase t ae tod a gx Re a s 66 332 polynomial ei o RR RR 67 QUITA era balines 67 Efficiency calibration
297. ll the photon energy in the detector and is the most well defined feature 2 The Compton edge for the full energy peak 3 The Compton plateau 4 The backscatter peak 192 6 7 DOUBLE ESCAPE BACKSCATTER PEAK PEAK SINGLE ESCAPE COMPTON PEAK SUM PEAK PLATEAU Counts Channel LOW FULL ENERGY PEAK HIGH 0 400 800 1200 1600 2000 2400 2800 Channel Number Figure 173 A Typical Gamma Ray Spectrum 4 ANALYSIS METHODS COMPTON EDGE 4 3200 3600 4000 The pulse pileup or sum peaks from the addition of the peak energies in the detector or electronic processing The single escape peak The double escape peak Not all of these will appear in a given spectrum For example escape peaks cannot occur for photons less than about 1 MeV The shape of the second derivative can be used to reject Compton edges and other non peak structure in the data Fig 174 193 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Second Difference Spectrum Figure 174 Second Difference for a Compton Edge 4 1 7 1 Peak Acceptance Tests The second difference must pass the following tests to be considered a peak C n lt 2 36 2j C n ky In addition the spectrum data at the channel indicated by the second derivative must pass these tests C n G x C nz1 37 where Q a constant proportional to the resolution of the detector k the second difference coefficients C n the channe
298. locked selecting Lock Detector RIES Lock Unlock will open the dialog shown in Owner Fred Bloggs Fig 148 Enter the Owner name Then enter a password in the Password field and re enter it in Password _Lancel_ the Verify field the two entries must agree Click Verity 71 on OK The password is not case sensitive that is upper case and lowercase letters are treated the same Figure 148 Entering Name Password to Lock a Detector 167 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual If the Detector is currently locked selecting Lock Unlock will display the dialog in Fig 149 Enter the correct password to unlock the Detector Unlock Detector 121 x Password Cancel Each time destructive access to a Detector 1s attempted while it is locked the Locked Detector dialog see Fig 150 will ask for the password Figure 149 Unlocking a Detector In addition the owner of the Detector will be Locked Detector AES displayed on the Supplemental Information Line see Fig 151 Password Cancel If the incorrect password is entered in either the Figure 150 Password for Accessing Unlock or Locked Detector dialog the dialog Locked Detector will reappear waiting for the correct password If you do not know the password click on Cancel to Marker 1 452 670 83 keV abort the access attempt 3 7 5 Edit Detector List 2 Figure 151 Name of Person Who This
299. low the peak cutoff 2 All of the peaks marked as key lines are present 3 The fraction limit test is passed If the nuclide is not present the MDA is reported unless the No MDA flag is turned on MDA Method 3 suppresses all MDA output 201 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual The nuclide activity in becquerels or curies based on the peak at energy E is given by Ng Au c m 40 egXEXY where A the activity of nuclide i based on energy E N the net peak area for peak at energy E x the detector efficiency at energy E t the live time y the gammas disintegration for energy E of this nuclide The gammas disintegration value is in the library and the efficiency factor is stored in the CLB record of the spc spectrum file Model corrections are then applied to these values for the reported answers 4 5 MDA The Minimum Detectable Activity MDA is a measure of how little activity could be present but undetected by the analysis There are many factors affecting the MDA which is reported in activity units such as becquerels The calibration geometry the backgrounds system and source induced the detector resolution and the particular nuclide all substantially affect the MDA reported Except for the MDA formula chosen and the sensitivity threshold the MDA is not affected by the analysis software In most instances the MDA value is calculated based on the background value of the peak
300. lp therefore recommend that for simplicity you use ISOWAN32 for Figure 210 Analysis Tab all QA analyses 5 3 5 2 Additional Error The parameters in the Additional Error section are used in the calculation of the total uncertainty Total uncertainty is composed of the systematic and random uncertainties in all of the factors involved in producing the final ISOTOPIC concentration result To account for other uncertainties in the system enter two values Systematic and Random that will be included in the total calculation The Systematic value is added to the total uncertainty as a systematic component the Random is added as a random component 5 3 5 3 Analysis The Peak Cutoff limits the unknown peak list to peaks with 1 sigma uncertainty below this value Library peaks with 1 sigma uncertainty are printed but are not used in the activity calculation Click on Directed Fit to allow for negative peak areas in low level spectra Directed fit is described in Section 4 1 2 2 269 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 5 3 6 Corrections Tab The Corrections tab is shown in Container Surface Analysis Options Fig 211 Sample System Decay Report Analysis Corrections The Peaked Background Correction Section 4 6 2 can be turned On or off and the cor rection file specified The filename of the Pac file to be used for the correction in the spectrum analysis can be the Internal working f
301. lting effective gain is shown at the top of the Gain section The two controls used together cover the entire range of amplification from 0 45 to 100 Input Polarity The Input Polarity radio buttons select the preamplifier input signal polarity for the signal from the detector Normally GEM p type detectors have a positive signal and GMX n type have a negative signal Baseline Restore The Baseline Restore is used to return the baseline of the pulses to the true zero between incoming pulses This improves the resolution by removing low frequency noise such as dc shifts or mains power ac pickup The baseline settings control the time constant of the circuit that returns the baseline to zero There are three fixed choices Auto Fast and Slow The fast setting is used for high count rates the slow for low count rates Auto adjusts the time constant as appropriate for the input count rate The settings auto fast or slow are saved in the Patent number 5 912 825 36 3 MENU COMMANDS digiDART even when the power is off The time constant can be manually set on the InSight display see the discussion in the MCB Properties Manual Preamplifier Type Use the Preamplifier Transistor Reset or Resistive Feedback preamplifier operation The choice will depend on the preamplifier supplied with the germanium detector being used Optimize The digiDART is equipped with both automatic pole zero logic and automatic flattop logic Th
302. luded in the unknown list if they are too far from a library peak so these extra digits might be of use 284 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE The fourth column shows the background under the peak In most cases this is the straight line background but can be the stepped background in a deconvoluted region The fifth column shows the net area which is the gross area minus the background area The area is calculated by the summation method for singlets and by the fitting method for multiplets The next column shows the net area divided by the live time to yield the counts second for the peak The next column shows the counting uncertainty for this net peak area All library peaks are reported even if their error exceeds the input sensitivity cutoff The next column shows the FWHM of the net peak area The last column shows a symbol if the peak is too wide or too narrow as compared to the shape calibration or a different symbol if the peak area was deconvoluted Otherwise it is blank The symbol explanations are printed at the bottom of the list 5 7 4 Library Peak Usage Figure 224 shows the isotope peak matrix or summary of library peak usage You can suppress this part of the report It is also not available if the library is not found or the spectrum is not efficiency calibrated If the library based peak stripping is enabled there is a separate list for the two analysis libraries The library name is printed at the beginning of the list
303. m and Co ORTEC Application Note 55 contains more information and help on starting and running QA for gamma spectroscopy 5 1 1 Using QA Results to Diagnose System Problems A gradual deterioration of the FWHM ya EWHM ratio usually means the detector leakage current has increased 253 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual A sudden deterioration of the FWHM meas FWHM ratio suggest that additional noise has been introduced into the system Commonly this can arise from e A noisy motor introduced into the ac line e REF interference e Electronic failure of a component in the detector preamplifier or MCB Generally these problems will also cause the FWTM ratio check to fail If the FWTM ratios fail but the FWHM ratios are acceptable this could indicate e Incorrect pole zero Neutron or other radiation damage to the detector 5 2 QA Submenu Figure 190 shows the QA submenu under the Acquire menu These Settings commands allow you to accomplish the three major QA functions in Measure Background ISOTOPIC Measure Sample 2l R Status 1 Establishing and entering the settings or ground rules for QA Control Chart Archive Database Figure 190 QA Submenu 2 Measuring background and sample This is performed periodically and it is automatically logged into a database by the program 3 Analyzing the QA database and generating reports This includes ISOTOPIC Status and
304. menu which opens when Show Residuals you right click in the Expanded Spectrum Window oP ca ee caer Mia Plot Relative Residuals 7 1 4 1 Show Residuals Zoom In Zoom Out Marking this menu item activates the Plot Absolute Residuals Undo Zoom In and Plot Relative Residuals modes The Residuals section of the RAR spectrum window item 6 on page 301 displays a comparison of Mark ROI the counts in each channel Actual to the calculated counts for that PEE channel as determined by the peak fitting algorithm Fitted Plot ATA Absolute Residuals displays the difference in each channel in Show a i counts between Actual and Fitted counts Plot Relative Residuals Sum Spectrum displays the difference in each channel in standard deviations abbreviated STD on the screen between Actual and Fitted counts divided by the square root of the Actual counts that is Print Graph Properties f Figure 238 The Actual Fitted y Actual GVPlot Right Mouse Button Menu 307 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual The Properties command is equivalent to Options Graph see Section 7 1 3 3 7 1 4 2 Zoom In Zoom In adjusts the horizontal and vertical scales in the Expanded Spectrum Window to view a smaller portion of the spectrum This command is duplicated by the Zoom In button on the toolbar 7 1 4 3 Zoom Out Zoom Out adjusts the horizontal and vertical scales in the Expanded Spectrum Window to view a larger
305. mpared with the actual data at the center channel This can be useful for isolated peaks with high scatter in the channel by channel data 4 1 1 3 3 Point Average If the 3 point method is chosen the minimum 3 point average channel value is chosen and is not compared with the actual data This is better than the 5 point method for close peaks and better than the minimum value for high scatter 4 1 1 4 1 Point The 1 point method uses the minimum data point in the search width This may not be the same value as the automatic method because the automatic method uses the center channel of the 3 point average as the background point assuming the 5 point and 3 point tests have failed This method has advantages in close peaks with good counting statistics If in doubt about which method should be used use the Auto selection 181 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 4 1 1 5 Example Background An example is shown in Fig 167 with the spectrum printout in Table 4 The report section for this peak is shown in Fig 168 The FWHM for this peak is 6 85 channels The centroid is at channel 2292 16 The background search width is from channel 2271 to 2313 The 5 point averages are shown in Table 4 and the minima are 11 8 at channel 2276 and 12 2 at channel 2311 The background slope is 0 0114 and the offset is 14 4 Spectrum Data ala Background i End 2276 2274 2315 Figur
306. mposition by weight is known do not enter the chemical Formula Chemical Formula o2 Cancel lt Back Next gt N Finish Figure 101 Name of New Material 135 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual You can either enter the Chemical Formula here or construct the material from the database materials in the next dialog The chemical symbols must be entered exactly as stored in the database including uppercase letters Click on Next to continue If the chemical symbol entered is not found in the database ISOTOPIC displays a not found message Fig 102 Before an element can be used it must be entered into the database as described in the New Element discussion on page 133 A Element not found in database Mo Figure 102 Not Found Error Message Click on Next to go to the Size page Fig 103 Attenuation Coefficient Wizard Size For a new element enter both the atomic weight of the element and the density of the material For compounds or mixed matrices enter only the compound matrix density and use the default atomic weight Density gjcc Weight 60 0848 au Cancel lt Back Next gt X Figure 103 Density and Atomic Weight of New Material e Defined chemical formula If you entered a chemical formula on the previous dialog the atomic weight will be displayed as the default value on this screen Click on Next to skip to the Relative Amounts page Fig 105 on page
307. ms suffering from stability problems For an accurately calibrated spectrum this recalibration will have little effect Its effect will be most pronounced on deconvolutions of multiplets this is discussed in Section 4 2 Because of this recalibration feature the analysis results of spectra can change when a library is changed or if the peak sensitivity is changed to a value under 10 see fixed cutoff above Such changes between analyses can result in the recalibration being enabled in one case and disabled in the other case This can result in the analyses being different in several different ways The peak areas and backgrounds can be different because the integration limits for each peak will change slightly This change is usually very small but in a spectrum with very few counts it can be a high percentage of the total peak In a given spectrum some peak areas may change and others may be constant Some peaks may move from the identified list to the unknown list or the reverse because the uncorrected centroid is too far from the library energy for validation In addition an energy difference for all good library peaks is calculated This is the sum of the absolute value of the difference between the peak centroid energy before recalibration and the library energy expressed as a fraction of the FWHM divided by the number of peaks in the sum This yields a number between 0 and 1 for good 3 point or more calibrations with O being 1
308. n energy and efficiency data are saved Figure 66 Recall Calibration 3 3 6 Print Calibration This sends all the calibration data in the working calibration to the display a printer or a disk file If the calibration tables exist they will also be printed 93 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 3 4 Calculate Figure 67 shows the Calculate menu These commands provide useful analytical tools for spectrum manipulation Smooth and Strip are only purr il available in buffer mode Peak Info Sum Smooth 3 4 1 Settings Strip This dialog Fig 68 displays the x factor used by the Peak Info Figure 67 command to calculate full width at 1 x maximum FW 1 x M for oa the ROI peak marked by the marker The background is subtracted before starting the calculation see Section 3 4 2 Enter the factor x an integer from 2 to 99 This number will be retained and used until changed Peak Info always Soa bl prints the FWHM so an x of 2 is not useful y for wt 10 Y 3 4 2 Peak Info This command does one of the following Figure 68 FW 1 x M Dialog If the marker is in an ROI 1 If the spectrum is not calibrated the channel centroid FWHM and FW 1 x M in channels are displayed 2 Ifcalibrated the channel centroid FWHM and FW 1 x M in channels and energy the gross and net area and the library best match and activity are displayed If the marker is not in an
309. n 1s stored in the ISOTOPIC database Soil Mode setup remains as in previous versions of ISOTOPIC Simplified menu design for faster more intuitive data acquisition and analysis setup The Container Surface Mode report is now in HTML file format the format used on the Internet so you can view it in any web browser no text editing program is required The new report is in color so it is easier to read It provides more information automatically reformats onscreen as you resize the browser window and displays bitmap images of the corresponding spectrum and fine tuning plot Additional documentation guides to help you optimize your data acquisition and analysis configurations Configurations can be edited in both the Operator and Supervisor programs for increased convenience and efficiency 1 1 2 Soil Mode Enhancements Simplified menu design for faster more intuitive data acquisition and analysis setup Alternate calibration for increased accuracy This calibration should provide improved results because the detector efficiency is measured instead of derived The same calibration file can be used for both Container Surface Mode and Soil Mode if the calibration is performed at 5 times the detector crystal diameter Additional documentation guides to help you optimize your data acquisition and analysis configurations 1 1 3 Other New Features All v4 x spectrum analysis is performed in ISOTOPIC Operator The Supervisor program
310. n by the sample especially uranium and plutonium For containers larger than 20 liters the matrix attenuation usually dominates If the thickness of the steel were unknown different thicknesses could be selected using the adjustments in the Operator program until a zero slope was obtained Because the mass attenuation factor is higher for the lower energy gamma rays the lower energy gamma rays will have greater correction factors than the higher energy gamma rays The program offers a variety of container materials e g steel glass plastic zircaloy monel copper to determine the container attenuation correction factor The new container thickness is then used to compute new activity 230 4 ANALYSIS METHODS The matrix is assumed to consist of a specific weight fraction uranium or plutonium The mass attenuation coefficients for the matrix are determined accordingly The mean free path through the matrix is seldom known and is determined by selecting a matrix thickness or density and observing the effect on the corrected peak area on the plot screen as with the container thickness Uranium self attenuation can be observed from the fluorescence X rays at 94 66 and 98 44 keV The X rays are emitted from gamma activity mostly from the 185 keV gamma rays emitted from 5U Their activity is proportional to the concentration of uranium and the gamma ray activity present No analytical method is known that can accurately compute the uran
311. n is displayed on the Marker Information Line see item 9 below 9 Status Sidebar on the right side of the screen provides information on the current Detector presets and counting times the time and date and a set of buttons to move easily between peaks ROIs and library entries see Section 2 4 10 Marker Information Line beneath the spectrum showing the marker channel marker energy channel contents and in some modes other details about the marker channel such as the efficiency at this energy 11 Supplementary Information Line below the Marker Information Line used to show library contents the results of certain calculations warning messages or instructions 2 1 Spectrum Displays The Full and Expanded Spectrum Views show respectively a complete histogram of the active spectrum and an expanded view of all or part of the spectrum These two windows are the central features of the ISOTOPIC 32 screen All other windows and most functions relate to the spectrum windows The Full Spectrum View shows the entire data memory of the Detector as defined in the configuration In addition 1t has a marker box showing which portion of the spectrum is displayed in the Expanded Spectrum View The Expanded Spectrum View contains a reverse color marker line at the horizontal position of the pixel representing the marker channel This marker can be moved with the mouse pointer as described in Section 2 3 1 and with the lt gt lt gt
312. n queued up for pasting last one first Each relocated nuclide will retain its energy and counts sec values but will be assigned a Rank number according to its new position Click on the peak just below the desired insertion point in the peak list then click on Paste 3 6 3 4 Saving or Canceling Changes and Closing To save this modified LIB file and use it as the working file click on the control menu then Save Library As Either use the current filename which will overwrite the previous values or assign a new filename then click on Save ISOTOPIC will assign the default LIB extension To exit the edit session click on the control menu then Close To abandon any changes and restore the LIB file to its condition before editing click on the control menu then Close A dialog will open asking if the changes should be saved select No 3 6 4 List List Library Peaks 21 x The List function Fig 138 prints m a list of the library ordered either by Name HP Lasema gt __Bropeties Nuclide or Energy to either the printer Gate DAAA AA eee or a disk file Type HP LaserJet 4 Where Srad printerhp4 Comment Print to file Order by Nuclide C Energy Cancel Figure 138 Print Library to Printer or File 161 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 3 7 Services The Services menu Fig 139 contains several functions and utilities Database Management gt Operator Permissions
313. n the three possible ZDT modes Table 1 ZDT Modes Mode Uncorrected ZDT Corrected ZDT Error Spectrum Spectrum Spectrum Off ZDT Disabled Yes No No NORM_CORR ZDT LTC Mode Yes Yes No CORR ERR ZDT ERR Mode No Yes Yes When the counting rate is essentially constant during the time required to acquire the spectrum the standard mode ZDT Off is the preferred mode only the uncorrected spectrum is collected and stored in the spectrum file But if the counting rate varies significantly during the measurement time the standard mode will not yield the proper dead time corrected counting rate This can be most easily understood by noting that the uncorrected mode compensates for dead time losses by extending the real counting time Hence a sample containing both a short lived high activity isotope and a long lifetime lower activity isotope will experience very high dead time losses during the first few seconds of the measurement as the short lifetime isotope decays rapidly This high dead time will cause the counting time to be extended after the short lived isotope has decayed to zero activity and the system will count the low activity isotope for the extra time Consequently the average activity of the short lived isotope will be underestimated If you anticipate significantly varying counting rates during the time taken to acquire the spectrum the CORR ERR ZDT mode should be used The CORR ERR mode corrects for dead time losses over min
314. ncy see Section 3 3 2 6 on page 82 Alternatively calibration can be changed by clicking on Back to return to previous wizard screens Click on Back to return to the efficiency dialog then Back again to return to the energy dialog NOTE If you wish to recalibrate based on the spectrum currently in the MCB be sure to unmark the Clear Data Before Start checkbox 80 3 MENU COMMANDS When the table and graph appear move the table down so the Library List is not covered see Fig 50 Rather than manually entering the peak energy in the Energy Calibration Sidebar E field click once on the peak energy in the Library List to automatically fill the field sotopic Supervisor Isotopic Mode Library List 2 x Bile Acquire Calibrate Calculate Analyze Library Services Window Library ESL Lib cg e z tos A 2 2 e Huclide Energy Percent Halt LA 0 0323 0 0347 0 0104 0 0055 Co 60 1173 24 me 0011 88 1836 01 99 3500 EFEN 00137 puc EDIDI pc Ecc a AE 2915 Energy Channel 7241 06 E 1173 2371 keV Table 11 Energies Channel Delete Energy Buffer GvDemo Spc MIXED GAMMA MARINELLI ON ENDCAP OF P402684 No FWHM Cal Auto Calibrate Marker 7 241 1 173 39 keV 42 328 Cnts FWHM 1 757803 Library Co 60 Cobalt at 1173 24 5156 70 Bq 1 Nuclide Peaks 0 Unknown Peaks Figure 50 Editing the Energy Calibration For a spectrum with an energy calibration dou
315. nel Example PBC Iso00032 ISOCART 01 7 8 2007 Spc You can change the filename as necessary to make it even more descriptive From a Live Spectrum e Select Create PBC to open the dialog shown in Fig 109 e Browse for the Analysis Library This will normally be a library of background nuclides e Enter the Real or Live Time Preset The count rate in background situations is normally low so either preset can be used e The Acquire new Data and Clear Data on Start options are used to control data acquisition in the MCB To clear the MCB and collect a new spectrum for the preset time mark both the Acquire and Clear checkboxes 140 3 MENU COMMANDS Create Background Files Remove all sources verify parameters and select OK to begin data collection Analysis Library c User T est Files Pu Lib Browse Real Time Preset 5000 Seconds Live Time Preset Seconds Acquire new Data V Clear Data on Start IV Save Spectrum on Completion IV Cancel Figure 109 Creating a PBC File from Live Spectral Data Ifthe MCB contains a good spectrum and no more data is needed unmark both the Acquire and Clear checkboxes This will ignore the counting presets and read the spectrum in the MCB To add more count time to a spectrum in MCB memory mark the Acquire box and unmark the Clear box Adjust the counting preset s to the original count time plus the additional count time i e the preset value will refl
316. nels as part of peak area method A counts Backgrounds computed in this manner are used in Method 13 below B The sum of the counts on the high energy portion of the peak and the low energy portion of the peak The boundary of the peak is established as described for A The number of high energy background channels is equal to half the peak width The number of low energy channels is equal to half of the peak width counts Backgrounds computed in this manner are used in Methods 14 and 15 below 204 4 ANALYSIS METHODS 4 5 1 3 Computing MDA The MDA methods are computed from count rates CR aa To convert CR aa to activity a conversion factor is used that contains detector efficiency yield and activity correction factor information MDA conv Act rep where MDA conversion factor to convert a MDA count rate to an activity Parameters included in the conversion factor include detector efficiency gamma ray yield decay and other peak corrections If the yield of a gamma ray was 100 and there were no corrections this value would be the detector efficiency cps Bq All activity corrections will be included in the MDA term CR reported peak count rate in the Identified Peak Summary report cps Act reported activity of the gamma ray in the Library of Peak Usage report Bq CR mda MDA MDA oon where MDA reported MDA value for the specified gamma ray Bq CR MDA count rate fo
317. ns for the type of fit used to describe the efficiency energy relationship 1 Interpolative fit 2 Linear fit of the natural logarithm of the efficiency to the natural logarithm of the energy 3 Quadratic fit of the natural logarithm of the efficiency to the natural logarithm of the energy 4 Six order Polynomial fit of the natural logarithm of the efficiency to the energy Options 1 2 and 3 can be selected separately for two separate energy regions Either of the two regions can be left uncalibrated by not including any points in the region but the analysis will report zero intensity in the library peak output for peaks in the uncalibrated region If both regions are calibrated the above the knee energy region is fitted first and the calculated efficiency at the knee is included as a data point in the below the knee fit This means that only one point need be below the knee but two points are the minimum above the knee for a calibration to be done D finition de Criteres de Qualit Pour I Essai des Logiciels Utilis s en Spectrom trie Gamma Rapport CAE R 5347 1986 65 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Option 4 fits the entire energy range with one function and is best suited to p type detectors Option 5 fits the entire energy range with different functions over three energy regions and can be used for p or n type detectors The result of the efficiency calibration calculation is one or two se
318. nsure that the most efficient operation of your digital spectrometer over the range of anticipated input count rates for your application that is at or below the throughput peak while achieving the best resolution obtainable from the detector consistent with that requirement Enter the rise time that best matches your dynamic range of count rate note that the available rise time settings will vary by instrument this chart is a general guide only eo o I Throughput cps thousands E 22 1 5 9 15 20 30 50 75 95 105 120 130 140 Count Rate kcps Figure 33 An Example of the Tradeoff Between Throughput and Count Rate 59 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual The longest rise time shown in the table is 12 us even though some digital instruments can be set for rise times as long as 23 us If throughput is not an issue because all samples are low rate increasing the rise time beyond 12 us might achieve a small improvement in resolution For planar detectors such as ORTEC s GLP Si Li IGLET and IGLET X Series operating at longer rise times frequently gives improved resolution Table 2 Rise Time Selection Guide Input Count Rate Maximum Dynamic Range Throughput us cps cps 0 gt 50000 12500 8 0 gt 75000 23500 0 gt 200k 0 8 oa soo os 3 3 Calibrate Figure 34 shows the Calibrate menu ISOTOPIC features a Calibration Wizard Section 3 3 2 page 68 to assist you in
319. nt nuclide absorbs a slow neutron This can be helpful in organizing reports by nuclide category More than one flag can be checked Libraries produced with Nuclide Navigator II or later 158 3 MENU COMMANDS versions will already have these flags set For other libraries 1t will be necessary to consult a reference for the proper settings The No MDA Calculation flag indicates that the nuclide E dit Library Nuclide HH will not be reported unless present in the spectrum If Nuclide Name RESTE this is not checked the MDA value will be printed if the HalfLife 12400 fs y nuclide is not present in the spectrum Uncertainty 50000 Nuclide Flags The Activity Not in Total flag indicates that the activity leer Bev SUR T for this nuclide will not be included in the total activity Fai Nal n ANAON Fi for this sample Fission Product I Naturally Occurring Isotope N These flags are listed on the report and saved in the uFo Photon Reaction P file Charged Particle Reaction C No MDA Calculation M Activity Not in Total 8 Manually Adding Nuclides To manually add a nuclide to the library list locate the nuclide immediately below the desired insertion position and click once to highlight 1t Next click on the manual Insert button to open the Edit Library Nuclide dialog The dialog will be blank Fill in the name and half life as well as any other inputs and click on OK Cancel
320. number of voxels For example if the surface area of a detector is 40 cm and the activity emitted from a voxel does not interact with the collimator then unshadowed area for that voxel is 40 cm If the activity of the voxel enters the detector from the side and half of the activity is shadowed by the collimator then the effective area from that voxel is 20 cm If most of the activity does not interact with the collimator then the average area for all vowels might be 36 cm The collimator correction factor would then be 1 11 The computed activity is then increased by this correction factor 4 11 4 Computing Masses Equation 108 can be used when gram quantities Mass cides of reported nuclides are needed in addition to activities N A nuclide nuclide _ NAL nuclide Ay 108 Mass where N number of atoms of a reported nuclide atoms metido decay constant of a reported nuclide sec At atomic number of the measured nuclide g Av Avogadro s number 6 02 x 10 atoms Af 227 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual For most waste samples the correction factors for container attenuation matrix attenuation sample self attenuation and geometry are unknown However one of the attenuation correction factors usually dominates the other correction factors The program identifies the magnitude of each factor for each sample This is done by fixing the smaller attenuation correction
321. o change it enter a new number and click on Apply This will move the knee to this energy and update the fit graph and table The value in the Knee dialog field will be set to the marker energy when the marker is moved and clicked in the Figure 54 Set Knee spectrum or the Efficiency graph window This is most easily Energy seen in the Efficiency graph window The knee energy is not changed until you click on Apply To close the Knee dialog click on the Close button ISOTOPIC will use the knee value shown when Apply was last clicked The table of worksheet entries including the gammas sec half life and certification date contains all the information needed to do the calibration It can be saved by clicking on the Save button in the Table section of the sidebar This opens a standard file save dialog Enter a filename and click on Save ISOTOPIC will assign the default extension of EFT 84 3 MENU COMMANDS When the Efficiency graph and table are displayed the marker in the graph window can be moved to an energy by clicking the mouse on the graph the table the Full Spectrum View or the Expanded Spectrum View The Peak ROI and Library indexing buttons on the Status Sidebar can also be used to move the marker to the desired energy You can also perform a manual efficiency calibration see page 75 Other Efficiency Sidebar Control Menu Functions In addition to Edit File the Efficiency Calibration Sidebar control
322. o Clb Collimator Material PEC File C User Test Files Pipe background Pbc cy E Cancel lt Back Next gt Figure 81 Detectors Page 114 3 MENU COMMANDS NOTES Each time you add an MCB or move it to a different PC or port be sure to rerun the MCB Configuration or the Name list will not be up to date If you subsequently do not see the new or moved detector on the Name list return to the Services Edit Detector List dialog Section 3 7 5 make sure this detector is on your ISO Pick List and click on OK Finally exit and restart the Supervisor program If you permanently remove an MCB from the system any configurations that use it will have to be edited See the discussion in Section 5 4 Next refer to the diagram at the top of the page and select the detector s Orientation The position of the physical detector in this counting situation is defined by the Detector Height Offset from Edge and Standoff to auto calculate the standoff see below The definitions of these dimensions are illustrated in the figure on the wizard screen t is important that these values be accurate as they are used in the model to calculate the detection efficiency and the matrix attenuation Note that if the detector is on the Top of the container the container lid thickness is used for the container absorption calculation both containers otherwise the container wall thickness is used In the case where the analysis uses two spectra
323. o cara wide an Da iaa 162 3 1 1 2 elect Databas AE EePS D ER e ee RAPERE USER 163 Slabs PUrg e SCANS ts Se Gp hades YU ee TRO E yee ewes E RISE 163 3 7 1 4 Manage Configurations Dani 164 357 2 Operator Permissions ores derine de dada 166 Sr Change PassWord sii ANI de dara 167 34 Loco Unlock Detector dea ai lacra 167 3 7 5 Edit Detector List os eR race Con ERROR Rem E doe Jes Egon dota 168 SEMIS PLVS 169 3 8 1 Off Mark UnMark sets a iii 170 IS Al A alg bal eesbir ue led ae ed pate eae a LT Le 170 Se Oe NCA ona ead eed aii dae aed in Oe Bay aoe Ac Rasta ea amie eee 170 ISA Clear All oie Ao ase qnos A AAA Ae ARES ATAR A 170 ae Filen da Ra a Da cus 170 220 0 Recalde aa il lana ed eei ef etus 171 DO Display sue co a E h se aw CeO eee pcs e 171 Ile Logarithmic estero oun Ae Es AA 171 Boo 2s A ULOMIALIC ace si uus Massie ale gwen whoa aeons 172 3 9 3 Baseline ZOO ose Sl cot t Come pay is Uy PLE RU S Er 172 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual quU 7 OOM A A E Pes wht aie ee Mane gant aue 172 3 9 Se V A A A psa vicina wok cei t de dubbi 172 3 95 AECA A A bc ree sh eee SS Pan eu i e 172 3 307 Ts BUE IO WE Zee state Cp E LUC ECC TRA AER A DIOR aR Se 173 SERE a ETE ECL T E TT TU ETT TOEIC 173 3 9 8 1 Points Eul RODEADA 173 3 9 8 2 Fill Singlets Fill Multiplet Peaks Fill Multiplet Composites 173 3 916 5 O PEC OlO S es edax A pte sc pes da e S ges 174 3 9 8 4 Peak Info Font Color
324. o uncertainty of the calibration source and uncertainty of the calibration fit 4 7 7 1 Interpolative For this calculation the calibration points are sorted in ascending order by energy If energy E is less than the first lowest energy calibration point E and E are the two lowest energy calibration points If energy E is greater than the last highest energy calibration point E and E are the two highest energy calibration points For all other cases E lt E lt E SEn E T o E E Oo E X4 EE i 62 212 4 ANALYSIS METHODS where o the uncertainty not the fractional uncertainty associated with energy E from the certificate This calculation is also used when energy is less than the first calibration point the efficiency fit is polynomial and the detector is N type 4 7 7 2 Linear Quadratic or Polynomial In general the efficiency curve or efficiency fit can be expressed as Ine a x k 1 m 63 where the efficiency at energy E In the natural log a the k fitting parameter The parameters x n and m depend on the type of efficiency curves e For linear quadratic fits x In E n k 1 64 m 2or3 e For polynomial fits x E n 2 k 65 m 6 The summation in Eq 63 is the sum over all the fitting parameters k 1 m not the sum over all the calibration points Now let
325. of the counting time 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE BACKGROUND Acquisition Count Rate Limits Real 0 5 Minimum Low High Maximum Live 120 S 250 00 300 00 500 00 800 00 al Create Background Report Print On Completion m SAMPLE Type Analysis Settings File C User QA Saf Don t Clear at Start Peak Records in Database Lock Acquire on Violation s Browse Edit QA File Prefix a OA File Sequence E SAMPLE Analysis Parameter Limits m Check Limits Minimum Low High Maximum TotalActiviy Bq f300000 fiooooo 120000 iapooo _ Suggest Ay Peak Shift keV fo 25000 0 50000 Av FWHM Ratios i200 fi 500 Av FWTM Ratios fisoo 2000 Figure 215 Example of Quality Assurance Settings Analysis Options Sample System Decay Report Analysis Corrections Isotopes File C Ause QA Analysis Preference Sdf Edition 8 7 02 2 08 10 PM Creation 8 7 02 2 08 10 PM Save s Description Presets Analysis Range From fi 0 To feooo Random Summing fo Background Type Auto C 1 Poit C 3 Point 5 Point Nuclide Library Calibration Internal Intemal v OA lib Browse A Browse OK Cancel Help Figure 216 Typical Settings for Quality Assurance Analysis 275 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Superv
326. og for this detector Fig 215 then go to the SAMPLE Type Analysis Settings File section and click on the Edit button This will open the Analysis Options dialog Fig 216 which will allow us to create a sample defaults Spr file for analyzing the QA acquisitions for this detector We will now enter the following analysis options for this Spr file a On the Sample tab click on the Presets button to open the Presets dialog for this MCB type then enter a Live Time preset of 600 seconds b In the Nuclide Library section unmark the Internal box then browse to retrieve the newly created QA 1ib file c Click on the Decay tab Mark the Collection checkbox and enter 06 27 2000 as the Date and 12 00 00 as the Time The format for the date and time will be determined by the Windows settings for the host PC d Return to the Sample tab click on Save As and save this file as QA SDF e Click on OK to close the Analysis Options dialog This will return you to the Quality Assurance Settings dialog In the BACKGROUND Acquisition section enter a Live Time preset of 120 seconds Enter arbitrary count rate values for the Low and High background settings until you know what the realistic numbers should be Do not use zero for the Low limit if you do you will not receive a warning if the detector is not counting for instance if it is disconnected Remember that these values are count rates so are independent
327. oil To determine the value accurately core samples must be taken and the activity mapped per centimeter of depth The a value is the reciprocal of the relaxation length for the activity The relaxation value is 127 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual determined by measuring the activity changes determined from core samples The soil depth above which 63 of the activity lies remains is the relaxation length Table 3 equates the relaxation value with a usable number for the a value If you have no idea how much activity seepage has occurred over time a value of 0 6 is commonly used Table 3 Estimating a p density at an Estimated Soil Density of 1 65 g cc Relaxation length mm o density 1 10 00 6 061 3 2 00 1 212 10 1 00 0 606 20 0 50 0 303 30 0 33 0 202 40 0 25 0 152 50 0 20 0 121 60 0 17 0 101 70 0 14 0 087 80 0 13 0 076 90 0 11 0 067 100 0 10 0 061 200 0 05 0 030 NOTES In moist areas the o density number usually ranges from 0 03 to 0 2 In dry areas the a density number usually ranges from 0 2 to 1 mm represents a fresh deposit with minimum activity seepage 3 5 4 Crystal Reports The Report Properties dialog Fig 93 is used when you wish to use a Crystal Reports template for your Container Surface and or Soil Mode reports Crystal Reports is available as an option with ISOTOPIC When you specify a Crystal Reports template here the resulting reports can be viewed and or printe
328. on Cancel instead 5 3 1 Sample Tab Sample settings Fig 206 are those whose values are generally different for each sample type When an srr file is recalled the date of Creation and last date the file was updated Edition are displayed Whenever the file is changed the edition date is updated when it is saved The Description is used to identify the sample type file and can be 64 characters long Clicking on the Presets button opens a Presets dialog corresponding to the available presets for this MCB as discussed in Acquire MCB Properties Section 3 2 8 The Calibration data to be saved Container Surface Analysis Options with the spectrum or used for on line analysis can be the currently Sample System Decay Report Analysis Corrections l l File C User DefaukSch T d loaded Internal workin g calibra lle C NU sersDefault Sdf Browse Save As douotacalibration sored on disi Creation 8 25 2000 1 48 06 PM Edition 8 25 2000 1 48 06 D iption y P t The working calibration is the BEN default settings Presets calibration just created with the Analysis Range Random Summing Calibrate menu functions see From 10 To 8000 0 Section 3 3 or the calibration most recently recalled from disk When the spc file for this spectrum is saved to disk the Nuclide Library Calibration Internal lv current calibration will be saved with it for later analysis or comparison Browse Br
329. on Start button to adjust the shaping parameters interactively with a live waveform showing the actual pulse shape or just to verify that all is well To enter the InSight mode click on the Start button refer to the discussion in the MCB Properties Manual ADC This tab Fig 24 contains the Gate ZDT Mode Conversion Gain Lower Level Discriminator and Upper Level Discriminator controls In addition the current real time live time and count rate are monitored at the bottom of the dialog Gate The Gate control allows you to select a logic gating function With this function Off no gating is performed that is all detector signals are processed with the function in Coincidence a gating input signal must be present at the proper time for the conversion of the event in Anticoincidence the gating input signal must not be present for the conversion of the detector signal The gating signal must occur prior to and extend 500 nanoseconds beyond peak detect peak maximum 39 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Conversion Gain The Conversion Gain sets the maximum channel number in the spectrum If set to 16384 the energy scale will be divided into 16384 channels The conversion gain is entered in powers of 2 e g 8192 4096 2048 The up down arrow buttons step through the valid settings for the digiDART Upper and Lower Level Discriminators In the digiDART the lower and upper level discr
330. on the browse button to locate the Alpha Rho File to be used in the correction calculation In some circumstances advanced users might wish to override the Alpha Rho File To do this mark the Override Value checkbox and specify the alpha rho value to be used for nonhomogeneous nuclides i e where a p gt 0 120 3 MENU COMMANDS The Optimize Alpha Rho Bl Soil Gamma Analysis Parameter Setup BAX feature is also for advanced Ele Alpha Rho Print Tables users and is only rarely used Soil Setup File C User LWSHO1_070626 m1 OK Mark this checkbox to enable Field ID D amp D Site xYZ Cancel the automatic adjustment of the alpha rho value based on the relative intensities of gamma rays from a single nuclide Alpha Rho File M1 RHO E Override Value Optimize Alpha Rho These gamma rays are user Library File 1Meter lib je defined in the Concentration EN wm I Directed Fit Ratio Limits section of the Alpha Rho dialog see Fraction Limit 70 Decay Date EE page 124 Match Width 0 75 PwHM amp nalyze Chan 10 to 8000 Peak Cutoff Background Type Enter the name of the 100 5 points Library File to be used in the analysis of the spectrum This library can be in the NuclideNavigator or Figure 86 The Soil Mode Analysis Parameters GammaVision format Use the browse button to find the file on the system LIBRARY SETUP SUGGESTIONS FOR SOIL MODE
331. on the individual detector For p type GEM detectors the efficiency decreases as the energy decreases For n type GMX detectors the efficiency is nearly constant at energies below 100 keV For both types the efficiency decreases at energies above this Offset for Purposes of Comparison N TYPE with THIN WINDOW Logarithmic Efficiency Arbitrary Units 10 100 1000 Energy Log Figure 36 Detector Efficiency as a Function of Energy The efficiency calibration is critically important to the accuracy of the activity results from ISOTOPIC We recommend that you use only calibrated sources traceable to a known standard accompanied by the certificate supplied by the authority that certified the calibration source e g NIST NPL or PTB The time between the calibration of the radionuclide source by its manufacturer and the time the spectrum is collected is important as this defines the decay correction needed to calculate source strength for the spectrum To perform the calibration you will need an energy calibrated spectrum of the radionuclides in the calibration source In addition you will need to know and their source strengths and calibration dates You can enter these data into ISOTOPIC via the Certificate File Editor see the discussion starting on page 72 and can review the results of each step Questionable points can be deleted additional points added and the fitting process repeated until you obtain the desired result
332. ongly recommend you move not only the mDB database file but all of the analysis spectrum bitmap and reporting files related to the records in that database Subsequently these should all be stored in the same folder or in the same relationship relative folder structure as when they were originally acquired Otherwise the Recall File and Recall Configuration and File s commands might not be able to correctly recall all the necessary information and existing Container Surface Mode HTML reports might not show the embedded spectrum and fine tuning plot images 1 6 1 Container Surface Mode As noted in the introduction the new Container Surface Mode configuration wizard combines analysis and report setup detector selection and position information collimator description and container characterization in one convenient wizard The resulting analysis setup called a configuration is stored in the ISOTOPIC database The files generated for each sample include SPC An1 UFO BMP and HTML files Additional information is captured in the database for each measurement Filenames for SPC An1 UFO and HTML files are structured as follows Container ID Iso nnnnn where Container ID is entered on the upper section of the ISOTOPIC Operator screen Iso identifies these as files generated in ISOTOPIC and nnnnn is a numerical suffix that reflects the number of acquisitions performed to date with the corresponding detector
333. onment including the use of the mouse be sure to read the Microsoft documentation supplied with your Windows software and familiarize yourself with a few simple applications before proceeding O The convention used in this manual to represent actual keys pressed is to enclose the key label within angle brackets for example lt F1 gt For key combinations the key labels are joined by a within the angle brackets for example lt Alt 2 gt XV xvi 1 INTRODUCTION ISOTOPIC version 4 1 is the latest version of the acclaimed ISOTOPIC software having undergone many evolutionary experience based improvements from earlier versions ISOTOPIC provides a practical solution to a wide range of gamma ray measurement problems encountered in site characterization prior to remediation and to decontamination and decommissioning D amp D operations ISOTOPIC v4 1 is based on work done originally at several U S Department of Energy DOE sites in the analysis of thousands of fissile waste containers and in methods developed at the U S Energy Measurements Laboratory EML NYC for measuring wide area contamination of soils and surfaces ISOTOPIC v4 1 has two major components e The ISOTOPIC Supervisor program which controls how data acquisition and analysis will be performed by operators in the field e ISOTOPIC Operator the software interface for actual field measurements This manual describes the ISOTOPIC Supervisor progr
334. ontents of a Detector to a buffer window the Title Bar displays the Detector name If you have opened a spectrum file from disk the buffer window Title Bar shows the spectrum name and sample description To switch windows click on the window you wish to activate or cycle between windows by pressing lt Ctrl Tab gt or choosing a window from the Window menu Each spectrum window contains a Full Spectrum View and an Expanded Spectrum View see items 7 and 8 below The Full Spectrum View shows the full histogram from the file or the Detector memory The vertical scale is always logarithmic and the window can be moved and sized see Section 2 3 4 The Full Spectrum View contains a rectangular window that marks the portion of spectrum now displayed in the Expanded Spectrum View To quickly move to different part of the spectrum just click on that area in the Full Spectrum View and the expanded display updates immediately at the new position The Expanded Spectrum View shows all or part of the full histogram this allows you to zoom in on a particular part of the spectrum and see it in more detail You can change the expanded view vertical and horizontal scaling and perform a number of analytical operations such as determining peak information marking ROIs or calibrating the spectrum This window contains a vertical line called a marker that highlights a particular position in 2 DISPLAY FEATURES the spectrum Information about that positio
335. open the PBC Peak dialog Fig 114 Use the same PBC Peak dialog to add a peak click on the peak just below the desired insertion point in the peak list then click on Insert This will open the PBC Peak dialog Enter the energy and counts for the peak and click on OK 145 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Peaks can be deleted with Cut and moved with Cut Paste The order of the peaks is not important and has no effect on the correction Several peaks can be cut at one time from the list then pasted back into the list into a different order Cut peaks remain queued up for pasting last one first Each relocated peak will be assigned a Rank number according to its new position Click on the peak just below the desired insertion point in the peak list then click on Paste Saving or Canceling Changes and Closing the Edit Session To save this modified PBC file and use it as the working file click on the control menu then Save PBC Table As Either use the current filename which will overwrite the previous values or assign a new filename then click on Save ISOTOPIC will assign the default PBC extension To exit the edit session click on the control menu then Close To abandon any changes and restore the PBc file to its condition before editing click on the control menu then Close A dialog will open to confirm the deletion of the changes select No 3 5 7 Diagnosis Figure 118 shows the Diagnosis
336. or all channels 3 5 1 General Good Practice Procedures for ISOTOPIC Measurements These suggestions might require advance preparation e A turntable and scale are two inexpensive accessories that can greatly improve the measurement results Contact your ORTEC sales representative Rotating the drum will make it appear more homogeneous to the detector and improve the item correction factor 99 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Weighing the item will reduce the uncertainty in the matrix density e Using a collimator will reduce the background activity A detector recess of 2 54 cm 1 inch is a good general purpose setting as it allows a wide FOV For more information on FOV see the discussion on page 115 A deeper recess reduces the background even more However in most monitoring situations this can cause a significant drop in the number of gamma rays detected from the item being measured e Knowing the fill height of the activity within the container helps determine the volume of the activity Fill height is used in conjunction with the item weight to establish the matrix density The fill height can be changed for each item in the Operator program If a drum lid is sealed and cannot be unsealed because contamination could result then other nondestructive methods should be used to determine the fill height or procedures should be instituted for documenting the fill height before the lid is sealed
337. or clock increments by 20 ms Real time means elapsed time or clock time Live time refers to the amount of time that the Detector is available to accept another pulse 1 e is not busy and is equal to the real time minus the dead time the time the Detector is not available 46 3 MENU COMMANDS Enter the ROI Peak count preset value in counts With this preset condition the Detector stops counting when any ROI channel reaches this value unless there are no ROIs marked in the Detector in which case that Detector continues counting until the count is manually stopped Enter the ROI Integral preset value in counts With this preset condition the Detector stops counting when the sum of all counts in all channels for this Detector marked with an ROI reaches this value unless no ROIs are marked in the Detector The Uncertainty preset stops acquisition when the statistical or counting uncertainty of a user selected net peak reaches the value entered Enter the Preset in value as percent uncertainty at 1 sigma of the net peak area The range is from 99 to 0 1 in 0 1 steps The peak is the region selected here The region must be at least 7 channels wide with 3 channels of background on each side of the peak As the uncertainty is calculated approximately every 30 seconds the uncertainty achieved for a high count rate sample might be better than the preset value Use the Start Chamnel and Width fields to enter the channel limits directly o
338. or the net area times the efficiency at this energy See page 317 The next column shows the counting uncertainty for this net peak area The 1 sigma values are no higher than the peak cutoff The next column shows the full width at half maximum FWHM of the net peak area This is in energy 1f the spectrum is calibrated channels otherwise The next column shows the closest match from the suspected nuclide library 1f the spectrum is calibrated If not calibrated or no match is found a dash is printed If a nuclide is listed in both the analysis library and the suspected nuclide library it is possible for different peaks to be associated with the same nuclide in different libraries because the acceptance window is larger 283 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual for the suspects than for the analysis It could indicate that the energy calibration is incorrect or that the libraries need improving The next column shows a symbol if the peak is too wide or too narrow as compared to the shape calibration For peaks or 1f the spectrum is not calibrated the column is blank The last column shows a symbol if the peak has been included in a deconvolution region It can mean that the system is not correctly energy calibrated 5 7 3 Peak Energy Matrix Figure 223 shows the peak energy matrix for the library peaks If the library based peak stripping is enabled there is a separate list for each library The library name is prin
339. otten a aie essa eae nea temas ane de E s De aa 3l ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Sd D ER aot agra d iam shes SR NM Deus quate Rea Ea 32 3S4 ADOM ISOTOPIC RS Edo wheels Gyre eae XA RE 32 3 9 ANOTE ER AAA EAS AAA EA II d edv ues 32 Du A O SA 33 SPUMA 33 O AAA EE ENE AET EEES eee ES 33 324 Copy t BUHGE A A 33 39s DA an aca A AA SRA AR O ets 34 3 2 6 Download Specta Eo E eges ES 34 3 2 6 1 The Detective s MCA Mode Conversion Gain Setting Affects Downloaded and Moved Spectrum Size 34 ALO O Display Select acy A rte us Oey de E Rode 35 5 2197 MGB Properties rada dd ads 35 SV A A EN E cay 36 ARAU E A ects wee CRS ost en 36 PUMP MGT A aa ahs Cade A S COR e ea is 38 ADE Sai Ee AMD eae quA PEE 39 Stabilizer A Erde RM XE BRE Se Xd qd eT RA 40 High Volar a pi de EU E RMEM 41 Field DA di i 42 EE he a sca ened ek a UE eater ae 43 AU ee EP E 43 cl PEIPER 46 MDA Preset sas eto Ete RON ERO Mise Ves eet 47 Nucltide Report ssp losas AS EX REPE 48 IL Gan Stabilization a SS a ea Be E cers 51 32 83 Ze Stabilization eee e dame eam e 53 3 2 8 4 ZDT Zero Dead Time Mode eee 54 Off Uncorrected Spectrum Only o ooo oomoooo 55 NORM_CORR ZDT and Uncorrected Spectra Stored 55 CORR ERR ZDT and Error Spectra Stored 55 Choosing a ZDT Mode ces devseiaro riscos arts darse 57 The NORM CORR Diagnostic Mode
340. ottom of the Editing dialog s nuclide list and change its label to Insert plus the name of the nuclide Now in the Editing dialog locate the nuclide immediately below the desired insertion position click on it once then click on Insert nuclide name This will insert the nuclide and display its peak list on the right Double clicking on a nuclide in the master library will add it to the working library inserting it immediately above the currently highlighted nuclide in the list Editing GyDemo Lib AE Xe 131M Creation 4 13 88 10 5804AM p Cd109 Cadmium Seetteetecsascsnscessed Edition 4 5 95 8 19 53 AM Half Life 436 Days Uncertainty 5 4000 Edit Cd 108 Peaks 22 FARN 6000 3 24 94 1 700DE r uzizccuO mmmuuuucuuu rr Insert Cut Paste eise fier Figure 132 The Master Library left and Library Editing Dialog right 3 6 3 2 Creating a New Library Manually Open the control menu and click on New This will clear the Editing dialog so nuclides can be entered manually Click on the Insert button to open the Insert Library Nuclide dialog shown in Fig 133 Enter the Nuclide Name and Half Life and click on OK 157 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Now at the bottom of the right hand peak list click on Insert to open the Edit Library Peak dialog Fig 137 Enter the energy of the gamma ray and the yield of the pea
341. ough that it is provided merely as an example We strongly recommend you check appropriate reference sources to ensure the half lives and gamma ray yields are the latest accepted values The suspect library file is called Suspect 1ib This library is used to help with identification of nuclides that emit gamma rays listed in the unidentified peak list Suspect 1ib can be changed to better suit your facility However this file must remain in the C NUser directory 154 3 MENU COMMANDS At startup ISOTOPIC automatically attempts to load the library last loaded Thereafter this working library can be replaced at any time with Library Select File The library stays resident in memory after it has been loaded In the Operator reports the nuclides are listed in the order they appear in the library 3 6 1 Select Peak This opens a window containing a list of Library List HE Library ERE ue Lib the library peaks in energy order Fig 129 This list shows the nuclide name energy gammas 100 disintegrations and half life Clicking on any field moves the marker line to that energy in the spectrum The Library List can be sorted by nuclide energy percent or half life by clicking on the desired column header Click again to reverse the sort 3 6 2 Select File Figure 129 Peak List Dialog Box This opens the Load Library File dialog If a library has already been selected it is shown in the File name field If File nam
342. ove X Close Alt F4 9 Close the Efficiency Calibration Sidebar then Cancel to close the y id Calibration Wizard Restore Editing the Efficiency Table Edit File To edit an energy already present in the Efficiency Table click in the table to highlight the entry of interest This will load the current values into the Mode sidebar see Fig 44 Edit the efficiency and peak energy values as needed Poomi E then click on Enter to update the fit and table and save the edited file To remove an entry from the table click to highlight it then click on Knee Delete Entry on the calibration sidebar 3 3 2 3 Efficiency Calibrations Create New If you chose to perform a new effi ciency calibration the Efficiency Calibration Wizard dialog Fig 46 will open Browse for an existing Certificate EFT File If you wish you can click on the adjacent Edit button to open the Certificate File Editor dialog which also allows you to modify an existing certificate or create a new one See Section 3 3 2 2 for instructions on using this editor Click on Browse to find the correct Library file Above Below None Figure 45 Deleting the Efficiency Calibration Efficiency Calibration Wizard Please enter the following information for the efficiency calibration Certificate File C User Test FilesiGvDemo Eft Browse Edit Library C User Test Files Reactor water Lib Browse Edit Source La
343. ows the setup summary on Create New Data Source the final wizard screen Click on Finish When you click finish you will create the data source which you have just configured The driver may prompt you for more information User Data Source GYGA Driver Microsoft Access Driver mdb lt Back Figure 219 Final Wizard Screen The last setup screen is shown in Fig 220 Click on OK the Quality Assurance Settings dialog Fig 191 will open At this point the database is ready and QA setup and measure ments can proceed ODBC Microsoft Access 97 Setup x OK Data Source Name Description GammaVision 32 QA Database Cancel m Database Database C User GvQa32 Mdb Help Select Create Repair Compact en Bu Ere Ex Advanced m System Database None C Database Options gt gt Figure 220 Select Database 278 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 5 7 The QA Report A typical report is shown in Figs 221 through 225 The exact details of the report depend on the options selected the spectrum the calibration and the libraries 5 7 1 First Page The beginning of the report Fig 221 shows all the bookkeeping data that are stored with the spectrum files along with other messages about the analysis Report Header These top two lines are repeated on every page The first line gives the program name input report code in this example 63 analysis vers
344. owse OK Cancel Help ok Background Type Auto C 1 Point 3 Point 5 Point Figure 206 Sample Tab 264 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE The filename of the Nuclide Library to be used in the spectrum analysis can be the Internal working library or a library on disk The working library is the library from Library Select File and will include any modifications made during the interactive analysis mode The Background Type can be set to Auto 1 pt 3 pt or 5 pt These are explained in more detail in Section 4 1 1 Random Summing is the random summing correction factor Entering zero turns this correction off The Analysis Range in channels is entered here This is usually used to eliminate analysis of the ends of the spectrum that do not contain useful data The Analysis Range should be as wide as possible because the automatic energy recalibration feature see Section 4 1 6 requires separated library peaks to work properly Also the correlation of lines from a single nuclide done by the analysis is defeated if the energy range analyzed does not include all the lines 5 3 2 System Tab System settings are those settings that are generally the same from sample to sample However all of these entries except the Laboratory name can be different for each sample type The dialog is shown in Fig 207 The Laboratory name composed of any 64 characters is printed as the second line on each page of the QA sample measurem
345. pad lt gt H Zoom Out increases the horizontal full scale of the Expanded Spectrum View according to the discussion in Section 2 1 so the peaks appear reduced in size This duplicates Display Zoom Out and Keypad lt gt Center moves the marker to the center of the screen by shifting the spectrum without moving the marker from its current channel This duplicates Display Center and Keypad lt 5 gt i Baseline Zoom switches to autoscale mode and sets the baseline of the Expanded Spectrum View to zero Autoscale is then switched off NOTE In addition to the preceding commands see the Full View command on the Display menu duplicated by lt Alt F7 gt This function adjusts the horizontal and vertical scaling to display the entire spectrum in the Expanded Spectrum View The right most part of the Toolbar is a droplist of the available Buffer Detectors Fig 5 To select a Detector or the buffer click in the Butter field or on the down arrow beside it to open the list then click on pall Sear eae the desired entry The sidebar will update with the live time real Figure 5 Drop Down time and presets for the spectrum selected Detector List Finally when the mouse pointer is paused over the center of a Toolbar doll sl button a pop up fool tip also mouse over box opens describing the button s function Fig 6 Mel ad Figure 6 Tool Tip 2 3 Using the Mouse The mouse can be used for every function in
346. peak centroid can deviate from the nearest library peak energy and still be associated with that library peak The value entered is multiplied by the FWHM at the peak energy to get the width used If the value is too small some spectrum peaks will be misidentified due to statistical variation in the centroid and if it is too large some library peaks will be incorrectly identified HINT If your final report includes false positives add more key line flags This is especially helpful for the ISOWAN32 analysis engine NOTE If multiplets are not present the Match Width can be set to values as great as 1 0 This is helpful when there is a slight gain shift and the identification of critical peaks is missed The Background Type can be set to Auto 1 pt 3 pt or 5 pt These are explained in more detail in Section 4 1 1 The Peak Search Sensitivity sets the sensitivity for the peak search used in the Interactive in viewed area function Section 3 5 7 2 and the full spectrum analysis in the Operator program Before a suspected peak is accepted the magnitude of the second difference must be greater than the weighted error of the channel counts The Peak Search Sensitivity is a multiplicative factor 107 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Isotopic Settings Analysis Number of Detectors 1 Live Time Preset sec Ask for Detector Position Adjustments on Start E Analysis Uranium Plutonium Library Peak Search Sensitiv
347. perator must select the site to be characterized with the understanding that the approximate useful viewing area for a germanium detector placed 1 m above a reasonably level surface is a circle with a radius of approximately 10 m After the detector and electronics are set up on the site the operator can start acquiring a spectrum Count times used vary widely however selecting a count time between 10 and 60 minutes is typical At the completion of spectrum acquisition and after the peak search the gamma spectroscopy software will determine the following e Energy line corresponding to peak centroid location e Radionuclide name that peak represents if in the file library e Net counts for the peak being considered 236 4 ANALYSIS METHODS e Gamma fraction for that energy line of the radionuclide being considered e Count time live time of the acquired spectrum The end result of this process will yield an array of data that lists net counts per minute per peak identified by name energy and yield These data are stored for analysis using Beck s methodology 4 14 1 2 Application of Calibration Factors Calibration Factors Described by Beck The basic calibration equation derived by Beck for use with in situ spectrometry 1s expressed in terms of peak count rate N activity or inventory in the soil A and uncollided flux as n N N c MER Drs E eC Ned 119 A N A The fundamental calibration par
348. pha Rho use the Override value Menu 124 3 MENU COMMANDS New This command will create a new alpha rho RHO file The first dialog is a standard file open dialog Enter a name for the new file and click on Save A second dialog Fig 90 will open allowing you to build a list of nuclides and alpha rho values Enter a Description that will easily distinguish this particular rHo file from all others To begin adding nuclides to the table click on Add This will open the Alpha Rho Value dialog shown in Fig 91 Enter a Nuclide name it must be entered exactly as entered it is in the nuclide library including metastable state e g Ag 110m for Ag The software does will add correct capitalization and place a dash between the nuclide and its atomic weight For example if you enter co60 it will be reformatted as Co 60 The droplist shows the nuclides already in the table NOTE Do not duplicate entries this will result in ambiguous results because the report will not show which value was used Alpha Rho Table Description M1 Alpha Rho File OK Nuclide Cog y Albha Rho Gs Cancel Distribution Unfom Units Default Concentration Ratio Limits Edit Energy 1 kev Energy 2 keV Delete Figure 90 Alpha Rho File Entry Dialog Select the Source Distribution for this nuclide by clicking on one of the radio buttons If the distribution is Exponential enter the nuclide Alpha Rho value which
349. precisely positioned Start Stop Clear Copy to Buffer Zoom Out Undo Zoom In Mark ROI Clear ROI Peak Into Input Count Rate Sum Figure 9 Zooming In Using the Rubber Rectangle and Right Mouse Button Menu 2 3 4 Sizing and Moving the Full Spectrum View To change the horizontal and vertical size of the Full Spectrum View move the mouse pointer onto the side edge bottom edge or corner of the window until the pointer changes to a double sided arrow see Fig 10 Click and hold the left mouse button drag the edge of the window until it is the desired size then release the mouse button To move the Full Spectrum View to a different part of the screen move the mouse pointer onto the top edge of the window until the pointer changes to a four sided arrow see Fig 10 Click and hold the left mouse button drag the window to its new location and release the mouse button 20 2 DISPLAY FEATURES te Analyze Library Services ROI Display At 158 fees A 2 2 gt 442 Buffer Figure 10 Two Sided Pointer for Sizing Full Spectrum View and Four Sided Pointer for Moving Window 2 4 The ROI Peak and Library Indexing Buttons The ROI Peak and Library indexing buttons on the Status Sidebar aj 9 el are useful for rapidly locating ROIs or peaks and for advancing between amp Pek at entries in the library When the last item in either direction is reached the fe Loe atl Library compu
350. printed When ISOTOPIC performs an analysis it writes the results to a uro file and to a fixed format ASCII format RPT file If you are analyzing a spectrum that has not yet been saved to disk 267 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual ISOTOPIC automatically creates a Container Surface Analysis Options spectrum file with the extension of Sample System Decay Report Analysis Corrections AN1 The UFO RPT and AN1 files share the same filename These Reporting Options Uncertainty Reporting reports are saved in the Spectrum e Percent C Counting i ifi C Activity Total directory specified on the I Library peak ist Directories tab under File Settings I ibis pesk mati ue eere in Supervisor v Nuclide abundance e 1 C 2 C 3Sigma The Print option sends the Rpt file Output to the default Windows printer for this PC C Printer Iv Display Analysis Results File Browse The File option allows you to Program MoepadExe Brose specify a filename to which the QA Measurement report will be written Each new report will overwrite the preceding one without warning Figure 209 Report Tab Note that while preceding report contents will be lost each QA measurement will generate a unique pair of sPc and uro files unless you mark the overwrite box on the QA measurement dialog so you can regenerate the report contents by reanalyzing the spc file with ISOTOPIC Operator
351. r click on Suggest Region If the marker is positioned in an ROI around the peak of interest Suggest Region reads the limits of the ROI with the marker and display those limits in the Start Chan and Width fields The ROI can be cleared after the preset is entered without affecting the uncertainty calculation If the marker is not positioned in an ROI the start channel is 1 5 times the FWHM below the marker channel and the width is 3 times the FWHM The net peak area and statistical uncertainty are calculated in the same manner as for Calculate Peak Info see Section 3 4 2 Marking the Overflow checkbox terminates acquisition when data in any channel exceeds 2 1 over 2 x 10 counts MDA Preset The MDA preset Fig 31 can monitor up to 20 nuclides at one time and stops data collection when the values of the minimum detectable activity MDA for all of the user specified MDA nuclides reach the needed value The MDA preset is implemented in the hardware The formulas for the MDA are given in Section 4 5 and can be generally represented as follows MDA a b c Counts 1 Live time Eff Yield The coefficients a b and c are determined by the MDA formula to be used The Eff detector efficiency is determined from external programs The Yield branching ratio is read from the 47 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual working library using the nuclide and energy specified The MDA value is the one entered in
352. r the method chosen cps mds 4 5 2 ISOTOPIC v4 MDA Methods 4 5 2 1 Method 1 Traditional ORTEC 100 2500 50 x 2 B 1t _ SENS SENS2 SENS 41 mda LT where SENS peak cutoff value described in the spr file LT live time sec NOTE If the peak is rejected the peak area is added to the background term B 205 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 4 5 2 2 Method 2 Critical Level ORTEC mda B CR 2 33 x a 42 Critical level CL is defined as the smallest concentration of radioactive material in a sample that will yield a net count above background that will be detected with a 95 probability NOTE If B is computed as zero it is assigned a value of 1 for CL calculations 4 5 2 3 Method 3 Suppress MDA Output The MDA is not calculated and is set to zero 4 5 2 4 Method 4 KTA Rule Ai FWHM LU eX x N S 43 E n mda LT where N number of channels under peak A channels FWHM full width at half maximum channels use the Details dialog for the proper value o confidence level selected in the spr file 1 2 or 3 4 5 2 5 Method 5 Japan 2 Sigma Limit cr 22 CATA mda L T 4 5 2 6 Method 6 Japan 3 Sigma Limit 1 1 0 8888xB ESA 45 mda L T 206 4 ANALYSIS METHODS 4 5 2 7 Method 7 Currie Limit B CR aa 1 645 x VB 46 LT NOTE If B is computed as zero it is assigned a value of 1 for MDA calculations 4 5 2
353. racterization and parameters to adjust the analysis parameters This file is located in the c User folder Under most circumstances the default values are set so that you never need use this file The times you might want to change this file are When the detector is not an ORTEC detector and the dead layer of germanium and outer container have different thicknesses than the standard ORTEC detector When the far field method of analysis is preferred over the close geometry method When the close geometry analysis needs to be speeded up and When you have a better estimate of uncertainty for matrix density and container thickness than the default value Table 8 shows the available analysis adjustment parameters Variable FrontAlCapThickness Table 8 HPGe Detector Parameters Default Comment Endcap Al thickness mm SideALThickness Side thickness of the Al endcap mm PTypeFrontDeadLayer Dead layer for the top of Ge crystals for p type detectors mm NTypeFrontDeadLayer Dead layer on the top of Ge crystals for n type detectors mm NTypeSideDeadLayer Dead layer for the side of Ge crystals for p type detectors mm GapCMEndcapAndCrystal 314 Distance between the endcap and dead layer of germanium cm APPENDIX A STARTUP AND ANALYSIS SETUP Two analysis methods are available a close geometry analysis and far field analysis Both can be used concurrently That is the
354. raction field If you enter a value here it is used in Operator as the default value on the Adjustments sidebar in the Results Plot window see the Operator Manual Click on Next to go to the Analysis page 3 5 2 3 Analysis Page This page allows you to specify the analysis parameters as well as the contents of the container report generated in ISOTOPIC Operator Analysis Tab Figure 77 shows the Analysis tab ANALYSIS SETUP SUGGESTIONS FOR CONTAINER MODE e When analyzing containers high attenuation is usually an issue In such cases averaging the activity of a high energy gamma ray with that of a lower energy gamma ray could bias the results unless your container modeling is perfect To minimize this problem no activity averaging is done in Container Mode and the Not In Average A flag is ignored Instead only one gamma ray for each library nuclide is used as a reference gamma ray for activity reporting Because of this you must optimize your library as follows Use the Cut Insert and Paste buttons to rearrange the library as required see Section 3 6 3 3 For each nuclide in the library choose one high energy gamma ray as the reference peak to be used for determining activity Move all the reference gamma rays so they are listed in the library ahead of any other gamma rays In other words if the library contains 10 nuclides the library should start with the 10 reference gamma rays The remaining gamma ra
355. raction of the PBC area and the recalculation of the percent error can result in the new net peak area being below the sensitivity cutoff thus eliminating this peak from use in the activity calculation If the first library peak is rejected the MDA is reported 4 7 Reported Uncertainty The uncertainty printed on the report can be either counting or total uncertainty They can be printed at 1 2 or 3 sigma The counting uncertainty is the uncertainty of the peak area due to statistical uncertainty and was discussed earlier For a peak net area the counting uncertainty can be expressed in percent of the peak area This same percent is used to express the percent counting uncertainty in the activity values 4 7 1 Total Uncertainty Estimate The total uncertainty estimate 1 sigma is determined by summing in quadrature the individual uncertainties from the various analysis components NP RE S NE Sg EM t count Onor Orsum Saps Onuc Sep Oseo uni 57 210 4 ANALYSIS METHODS where 0 total uncertainty estimate O oun counting uncertainty estimate 0 5 additional normally distributed uncertainty estimate O sum random summing uncertainty estimate Os absorption uncertainty estimate Onc nuclide uncertainty estimate Og efficiency uncertainty estimate 0 geometry uncertainty estimate Oni uniformly distributed uncertainty estimate All components of uncertainty estimates except o are computed at the 1
356. raph is duplicated by the Properties item on the right mouse button menu The droplists on the left side of the dialog control the screen and printout colors As Text pee Mans PIN E omposite ac HE noted above there are some differences Background Ee Fill Mod between screen and printer fonts and colors Maker r m Pm Also if you do not have a color printer the Data Set Colors Multiplets Composite screen colors will be rendered in grayscale Dus sj mmm I Auto Y Spectrum Fill Color o to o The Text color affects the color of the axes E au Roi Color ELE JV Auto Y Residual axis labels and spectrum title Background ETA AN d controls the color of the spectrum ulcus Line Linear Log Horizontal background in both the full and expanded E I NEN windows Markers applies to the ROI bars IV ishowMuckds ama Palo nae M Show Axes D to D key Data Set Colors allows you to choose separate colors for spectrum Data Fitted Cance peaks and Residuals select a data type from the left hand droplist then choose a color from the list on the right Similarly use Fill Color to control the colors of ROIs Nuclide Peaks Unknown Peaks Multiplets and Composites in both point and fill modes Spectrum Style determines how the histogram data are represented Points Line or Fill All Figure 234 The Plot Options Dialog The Show N
357. rectly to the intensity of the full energy peak Nonetheless these can be included in bici the library to account for the peak in the spectrum Figure 137 Edit or Manually Add Library Peak Values The Not In Average A flag in the Peak Flags section of the dialog should be set for these peaks All the peaks marked as Key Line K must be present before the nuclide will be listed as present on the report If no lines are marked as key lines the nuclide will be listed as present if the first line is in the spectrum To duplicate the operation of older versions of ISOTOPIC mark either no lines or only the first line as a key line 160 3 MENU COMMANDS Some old libraries could have these flags set in an unwanted manner These libraries should be checked before use HINT If your final report includes false positives add more key line flags This is especially helpful for the ISOWAN32 analysis engine in Container Surface Mode Adding Nuclide Peaks To add a peak Click on the peak just below the desired insertion point in the peak list then click on Insert This will open the Edit Library Peak dialog all the fields will be blank Enter the necessary information for the peak and click on OK Rearranging the Peak List The entries in the peak list can be rearranged with the Cut and Paste buttons Several peaks can be cut at one time from the list then pasted back into the list into a different order Cut peaks remai
358. resets are not altered This function might not operate on some types of Detectors when they are collecting data The data can also be cleared with lt Alt 3 gt the Clear Spectrum button on the Toolbar or the Clear command on the right mouse button menu 3 2 4 Copy to Buffer The Copy to Buffer function opens a Buffer window or uses an unused Buffer then transfers the data and descriptors e g live time real time from the active Detector to the Buffer This function can also be performed with Alt 5 or the Copy to Buffer command on the right mouse button menu 33 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 3 2 5 QA See Chapter 5 Quality Assurance 3 2 6 Download Spectra This is supported only by the Detective trans SPEC digiDART DART and MicroNOMAD This command downloads the spectra from the portable MCB to the computer disk The files are stored in the directory defined under File Settings in the format you select when saving The filename format is where sss is the sequence number of the spectrum This is the index number shown on the digiDART spectrum list display iiiiiiii is the ID string entered when the spectrum was collected It is shown on the digiDART spectrum list display ddddddddd_is the date the spectrum was collected as recorded in the MCB ttttttttt is the time the spectrum was collected as recorded in the MCB ext is the extension for the spectrum file type selecte
359. retains the Display Analysis Results and Interactive in Viewed Area commands allow you to recall analyses uFo files that were generated within Operator to view and or analyze interactively Data sets including archived records can only be reanalyzed in Operator GVPlot replaces WINPLOTS for more versatile spectrum plotting ISOTOPIC algorithms have been verified and validated for quality assurance requirements 1 INTRODUCTION e The v4 x database has been expanded and is not compatible with the databases from earlier versions However you can run both ISOTOPIC v4 and ISOTOPIC v3 1 on the same PC if you uninstall v3 1 before installing v4 x install v4 x then reinstall v3 1 See the Operator Manual for complete instructions e As of v4 ISOTOPIC takes side detector efficiency into account As a result detector efficiency is greater than in previous versions of ISOTOPIC and activity values using the same configuration parameters are usually concomitantly lower in v4 x For large standoff distances the results should be about the same between the versions 1 1 4 User Manual Enhancements We have added more setup and analysis suggestions to the v4 1 Supervisor User s Manual See e General Good Practice Procedures for ISOTOPIC Measurements Section 3 5 1 page 99 e Container Setup Suggestions page 102 e Analysis Setup Suggestions for Container Mode page 106 e Detector Setup Suggestions for Container Mode page 113 e
360. riate source s If the detectors are not efficiency calibrated all nuclide activities will be reported as zero The operator permissions which determine the parameters operators can adjust must be set If all permissions are enabled operators can perform all ISOTOPIC functions except calibration attenuation database entry selection of Seagate Crystal Reports templates QA setup and choosing the spectrum display preferences The Container Surface and Soil mode configurations which govern data acquisition and analysis in the Operator program must be created If the Allow modification of configuration settings operator permission is set in the Supervisor program operators can create and or modify configurations within the Operator program If your organization uses ISOTOPIC s onboard quality assurance tools QA settings must be established in the Supervisor program for each detector that will be used 1 6 Sample Measurement Files and Filename Conventions Beginning with ISOTOPIC v4 all sample measurement analysis reanalysis and reporting is performed in the Operator program including the analysis of archived data Detector QA measurements can be made in both the Supervisor and Operator programs The type and number of files generated during sample measurement differs slightly between Container Surface Mode and Soil Mode ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual When you archive a particular ISOTOPIC database we str
361. rmally the first peak in the library is the main peak for the nuclide and this would indicate that this peak does not belong to this nuclide The library should be changed to reflect the actual peaks The abundance for this peak was higher than the running average of those included so far starting at the first energy for this nuclide in the library and going down the peaks for this nuclide The abundance for this peak was lower than the running average of those included so far starting at the first energy for this nuclide in the library and going down the peaks for this nuclide This peak was outside the user specified limits for the analysis When the library directed centroid was recalculated after background subtraction the centroid value was outside the energy limits This means the peak could not be attributed to this nuclide The library should be changed to include the actual peaks or the calibration checked This also occurs for very small peaks where the peak shape is ill defined The peak area for this peak was derived using other peaks for this nuclide This is enabled by the library based peak stripping option The next column might contain a symbol that indicates which peaks were used in the average activity calculation for this nuclide There might be a symbol in the previous column 287 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual indicating that the peak did not pass a test but if the is present i
362. ror matrix because its diagonal elements are the variances of the fitting parameters and the off diagonal elements are the covariances of the fitting parameters see Eq 7 25 in Bevington Ofa Z i j 1 m 73 2 4 Ifi j 0 is the variance for the fitting parameter ai If i xj o J is the covariance aja a between the fitting parameter a and a Uncertainty of the Fit From Eq 3 13 in Bevington the polynomial fit uncertainty is given by o Y 5 ay da 8y 0a i j 1 m 74 where y is the polynomial given in Eq 66 and a is the i fitting parameter The error matrix has been used instead of c for clarity Equation 74 does not use the factor 2 before the i j covariance terms as is done in Bevington Eq 3 13 This is due to the double summation notation used in Eq 74 and because the error matrix is symmetric 9 0 The diagonal elements are not double counted in the above equation In Bevington Eq 3 13 6 is i denoted as o aj 215 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual From Eq 66 since dy da x we have E 2x ME where for a linear quadratic fit pc Jji 2j 1 and for a polynomial fit 12 1 J i 22 J Finally the calibration uncertainty is m 75 76 where e is the fitted efficiency at energy E from Eq 63 and o is calculated from Eq 75 If o is zero then the sigma above c or sigma below 0 value
363. round Correction Create PBC Select PBC Edit PBC Diagnosis Display Analysis Results Interactive in Viewed Area Mode Container Surface Soil Library Select Peak Select File Edit Isotopic Editor Nuclide Navigator List Services Database Management Create Database Select Database Purge Scans Manage Configurations Operator Permissions Change Password Lock Unlock Detector Edit Detector List ROI Off F2 or Alt O Mark F2 or Alt M 26 page 94 page 99 page 154 page 162 page 169 UnMark Mark Peak Clear Clear All Save File Recall File Display Logarithmic Automatic Baseline Zoom Zoom In Zoom Out Center Full View F2 or Alt U Insert Delete Keypad Keypad Keypad Keypad Keypad 5 Alt F7 3 MENU COMMANDS page 171 Preferences gt Points Fill ROI Fill All Fill Singlets Fill Multiplet Peaks Fill Multiplet Composites Spectrum Colors Peak Info Font Color Window page 175 Cascade Tile Horizontally Tile Vertically Arrange Icons List of spectrum windows Right Mouse Button Menu page 175 Start Stop Clear Copy to Buffer Zoom In Zoom Out Undo Zoom In Mark ROI Clear ROI Peak Info Input Count Rate 27 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Sum MCB Properties 3 1 File The File menu contains the spectrum file save recall print and compare commands
364. round is given by Peak 11341 02 1835 rm a FWHM 2 15 Fw 1 5 M 3 Library Y 88 Yttrium at E 76 2119 06 Bq Gross Area 154290 Net rea 149017 428 Gross Net Count Rate 42 84 41 17 cps Marker 11 341 1 835 76 keV Peak 11343 01 1836 08 keV Library Y 88 at 1836 m a 1 3 06 Bq Gross Area 154290 Net Area 149017 428 Figure 69 Peak Info Displayed at Top of Peak 1 2 h y C y a h I l 19 i l i h 2 6 where B the background area 1 the ROI low limit h the ROI high limit C the contents of channel i 6 the number of data channels used three on each end The gross area is the sum of all the channels marked by the ROI according to the following where A the gross counts in the ROI the ROT low limit h the ROI high limit C the contents of channel i 20 95 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual l Figure 70 Background Calculation Details The adjusted gross area is the sum of all the channels marked by the ROI but not used in the background calculated as follows h 3 AFA C 21 1 3 where A the adjusted gross counts in the ROI the ROI low limit h the ROI high limit C the contents of channel i The net area is the adjusted gross area minus the adjusted calculated background as follows B h 1 5 A A LARA n ag h 1 1 22 The uncertainty in the net area is the square root of the sum of the squares of the unc
365. ry energy The FWHM multiplier or Match Width can be changed on the Analysis page under Settings Configurations If it is within this limit and has counting error less than either 10 or the input sensitivity value whichever is less it is a qualified recalibration peak The energy range is split into two parts and the number of qualified library peaks in each region is counted It there are more than the user set number of qualified recalibration peaks in both regions of the spectrum these spectrum centroids and library energies are used to recalculate the energy calibration for the spectrum The default energy is 10 keV and the number of peaks is 0 below and 10 above Only this analysis is affected and the calibration in the spectrum file is not changed If the energy recalibration is performed a notice is written on the report even if the recalibration had little or no effect The Calibration menu can be used to print the new coefficients from the urFo file They are printed on the Operator reports Since this energy recalibration is dependent on the library and the spectrum changes in the library can affect the calibration and hence the peak energies reported Only the energy factors are changed The shape coefficient and efficiency coefficients are not altered While the automatic energy recalibration will correct for small changes in the calibration 1t is not intended as a substitute for accurate calibrations or as a correction for syste
366. s 4 5 2 15 Method 15 Nachweisgrenze DIN 25 482 5 This method represents the lowest true value of activity that can be reliably reported with similar samples Its value is approximately twice the value computed for Erkennunggrenze Section 4 5 2 14 208 4 ANALYSIS METHODS 2x196x B x 1422 2 x 1 96 x 1 Na x x x ot x x i 2N 2N m CR SS SSS SS is LT 4x LT 4 5 2 16 Method 16 EDF France This method is defined for the EDF and CEA in Rapport CEA R 5506 Determination du Seuilet de la Limite de Detection en Spectrometrie Gamma B CR y 6 2 vB 55 maa LT NOTE If B is computed as zero it is assigned a value of 1 for MDA calculations 4 5 2 17 Method 17 NUREG 0472 B CR 4 66 x Z 56 mda 4 5 3 Peak Area Rate In all cases the reported MDA is this peak area rate converted to activity The MDA activity will include the efficiency correction and any other corrections being used 4 6 Corrections If enabled the following corrections are made on a nuclide by nuclide or peak by peak basis 4 6 1 Decay Correction If enabled the decay correction projects the activity at the time of count back to the time the sample was collected This is useful when there is a long time relative to the half life between the sample collection time and the sample count time The sample collection time is entered on the dialog If the time is greater than 12 half lives the correction is not made
367. s see Section 3 9 8 3 In Fill ROI mode the unmarked regions of the spectrum are displayed as points while the ROIs are filled from the baseline to the data point with the ROI spectrum color In Fill All mode all the data points are filled from the baseline to the data point with the Foreground and ROI spectrum colors Figure 159 shows a comparison of the three display modes Note that the point pixel size in the Point and Fill ROI mode illustrations has been exaggerated to make them easier to see 3 9 8 2 Fill Singlets Fill Multiplet Peaks Fill Multiplet Composites The peaks detected during analysis can be displayed as con trasting solid lines superimposed on the spectrum or can be filled to background height with a contrasting color Choose whether to fill singlets multiplets and or multiplet composites by clicking on the menu item s to mark them with a checkmark Click again to remove a checkmark The fill color e Fil ROI Fill All v Fill Singlets Fill Multiplet Peaks v Fill Multiplet Composites Spectrum Colors Peak Info Font Color Figure 158 Display Preferences Submenu ts ae pe Ta a pl bo ta hn Ta a s Fy Figure 159 Comparison of the Points Fill ROI and Fill All Display Modes for these peaks can be selected on the Spectrum Colors dialog discussed in the next section 173 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 3 9 8 3 Spectrum Colors
368. s affect only the spectrum windows The colors of the remaining features on the screen must be changed using the Windows Control Panel which will also of course affect the appearance of all other Windows applications on this PC 174 3 9 8 4 Peak Info Font Color This function opens the Font dialog see Fig 161 It allows the selection of the font type size and color used in the display Peak Info data in the text box in the spectrum windows see Section 3 4 2 Fig 69 3 MENU COMMANDS Font Ei Font style Size Regular e 10 Cancel 12 14 A 18 T Times New Roman 24 IT Verdana xl zl xi Effects Sample Strikeout m Underline bc Color MA Teal Y Script Westem y Figure 161 Peak Info Font Selection 3 10 Window This menu contains standard Windows commands for controlling the display of the spectrum windows Fig 162 In addition to the Cascade spectrum window display mode Cascade Tile Horizontal Tile Tile Horizontally Vertical etc the list of currently open buffer and Detector windows is shown The currently active spectrum is checkmarked To make a different window the active window click on its entry in the list This is especially useful if the spectrum has been expanded and not all the spectra are visible Tile Vertically Arrange Icons v 1 Buffer GvDemo Spc Figure 162 Window Menu 3 11 Right Mouse Button Menu Figure 163 shows the right mouse button menu To open
369. s 196 o RT 46 parabol Cene toria e Ere DSi 198 MDA sears drive bs ttd ameE LUCR 47 Stepped ose LER LT Sena 197 TEAMING oec b eta EF LI RI pi 46 Background methods 179 ROLintestal sy pean e ee trent ERES 47 Baseline Restorer ss acadae eke tawst beads 36 ROI peak count oss eed E Te dr 4I ADORE eoe trio itis any tease are CIEL 33 176 UNC iria eere RE PER p RS 47 Calibrate menu 0 tee ETC n 60 Activity Callbration es iu rp Le e e rec bets 61 computing item activity 223 automatic energy isis ers 86 computing peak activity 201 CIICIONCY ries ici 61 63 210 Activity reporting O dada 61 62 153 total activity vs activity per unit 109 Me ds 264 Amplifier gain manual efficiency sarria 75 A T ERER 293 manual energy 54 3 Fu ee dre betes 87 Analysis peak shape 2s tee ese dre Gates 62 all analysis performed in Operator 2 join NEM 93 archived data AAA ERES 2 7 recalibration triada 90 B30winds ini naana pd 316 recall des 93 display Tesulls ecce scere bu E S 146 S VE core dro bip tite e drca 93 energy recalibration 189 A O els 93 264 IMeractiWS ideas 151 Calibration Wizard 60 68 COLD IBI s d S e oe EDS EN 314 efficiency calibration T ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual energy calibration 4 0 ace estera a 69 CSET ou ica po Mae NET 18 172 Clear ROL sand Mil 3 shot ace otto e amp with 176 C
370. s a different set of gamma rays and reference gamma rays that are plotted in the same manner On a computer screen the different nuclides would be plotted in different colors 228 4 ANALYSIS METHODS 200 150 100 50 Diff 0 O 50 100 150 200 l Il T ttt p vc E op dl 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 200 300 400 600 1000 2000 Energy Ke Figure 187 Plot of Peak Area Corrected for Branching Ratios for Gamma Rays of Sb 125 50 z Diff O 50 100 150 200 b ode d Ld LII 1 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 200 300400 600 1000 2000 Energy KeV Figure 188 Plot of Sb Eu and Eu Activities 229 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual If a sheet of steel were positioned between the point source and the detector and if the gamma ray peaks corrected for yields were then plotted the resulting display would be similar to Fig 189 Note the change in the slope of the points with energy 125 200 e Sb 154 e g 150x e 155 Eu 100 50 xDiff 0 O ceo e 0 e e o 50 o 0 100 O 150 200 I Edad AA 20 30 40 506080100 200 300400 600 1000 2000 Energy Ke Container Thickness e s in Figure 189 Activity of the Standard Without a Container Correction Factor In an actual waste sample there are several attenuation factors that affect the intensity of the detected gamma rays These factors include matrix attenuation and self absorptio
371. s are in agreement one can assume that the U enrichment and the attenuation corrections have been determined properly If they do not agree the analyst must decide which method is more accurate Usually enrichment determination using the 186 and 1001 keV gamma rays is more accurate 4 12 1 7 U Enrichment Calculations The total grams of uranium Gre can be computed using the following formula Gy Gy Gas Gas Gy 116 where G grams of U G grams of U G53 grams of U Gris grams of U Frequently there is not enough gamma ray activity to characterize the U activity due to its low photon abundance and high attenuation at 120 keV The nuclide U does not emit any gamma rays Typically the sum of the U activity and the U can be estimated using the following equation G 234 G G 236 0 011 G 235 117 1 011 G 235 G Tot 238 The U activity comes from reprocessed uranium Equation 118 represents a typical concentration of U If fuel rods have been left in a reactor for an extended time period the 2261 234 4 ANALYSIS METHODS concentration will be larger For highly enriched or depleted uranium the U concentration may differ from the concentration estimated by Eqn 118 The U enrichment Enr can be computed as follows 100 Enr G4 Gr 118 re w 01s 235 Within the 186 to 1001 keV region the 186 keV gamma ray is used to determine th
372. s computed in this manner are used in Method 13 below To determine the gross area 1 Collect the FWHM and peak centroid from the Details dialog 2 Determine the starting channel for the low energy background by subtracting 1 25 times the FWHM channels The starting channel for the high energy background is 1 25 times the FWHM 3 Establish an ROI and integrate The number of channels used to integrate the peak N is used to establish the peak background For example consider the peak described in the Details dialog in Fig 180 The peak channel is 5582 Two and a half times the FWHM is 18 48 channels Round up to 19 channels The outer two channels are the first channels for the background Thus integrating the 17 channels 5573 5589 represents A The average background is determined by integrating channels 5570 5572 and 5590 5592 and dividing by 6 A Gross counts counts If the peak is found the results can be determined from the Details dialog or standard ISOTOPIC Operator report If the peak is not found the gross counts can be determined by setting an ROI at the peak energy and determining it from peak information 4 5 1 2 Background Methods B Background reported in the Identified Peak Summary counts These backgrounds are used in Methods 1 2 5 6 7 8 12 and 16 below For some MDA methods if the peak fails validity tests B B peak area B The average of three high energy channels and three low energy chan
373. s not found there or cannot be read then the internal values are used Some of these values can only be set in this file A 1 3 1 Contents B30WIN TXT Message file name The name of the file containing all the text and format statements used in the report YES NO spellings These are the spellings of the replies to questions It is not used in ISOWAN32 JANFEBMARAPRMAYJUNJULAUGSEPOCTNOVDEC spellings The alternate to English spellings of the months These spellings are used in addition to English to convert the input dates to fixed format D Deconvol charact The character on the report denoting that this peak is part of a deconvolution 316 APPENDIX A STARTUP AND ANALYSIS SETUP S shape character This character on the report means that the peak had a bad shape flag set to true M Multiplet char The character on the report denoting that this peak is part of a multiplet Unknown suspect The character on the report denoting that this peak has not been found in the suspect library D A27 EBAR TBL Ebar table filename The filename for the average energy table D A27 IEQT TBL IEq table filename The filename for the iodine equivalence table F Ebar on off The flag to turn on or off the average energy calculation F IEq on off The flag to turn on or off the iodine equivalence calculation F T print eff cor peak area The flag to turn on or off the printing of the efficiency corrected net peak area for unknown peaks It i
374. s on 11 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 12 2 DISPLAY FEATURES This chapter addresses the display features in ISOTOPIC Supervisor discusses the role of the mouse and keyboard and covers the use of the Toolbar and sidebars To start the program either click on the desktop shortcut or go to the Windows Taskbar and click on Start Programs Isotopic 41 Isotopic Supervisor 4 1 This will open the main Supervisor screen The principal features are shown in Fig 2 Pulse Ht Analysis Start 12 00 00 AM Real 0 00 Live Dead Buffer Buffer thl Library ue ORTEC 11 41 43 AM Fri 3 12 04 Marker 1 973 447 84 kev Calib Lib 1408 Bytes 9 Nuclides 13 Alloc 14 Peaks 20 Alloc Figure 2 Main ISOTOPIC Supervisor Screen Features 1 Title bar shows the program name and current mode Container Surface or Soil On the far right are the Minimize Maximize and Close buttons There is also a title bar on each of the spectrum windows showing the source of the data which is either the Detector name or Buffer and the spectrum file name The title bar on the active spectrum window is normally a brighter color than the bar on inactive windows the color scheme depends on the Windows desktop scheme you have selected 2 Menu Bar showing the available menu commands which can be selected with either the mouse or keyboard these functions are discussed in detail in Chap
375. s pee e geo D Rote tora 231 4 11 7 Minimum Detectable Activity for Volumes s sees 233 4 12 U Enrichment Determination Methods in Containers o o o oooooooo 234 4 12 1 U En chment Calculations eir sou ate yaQ aed ys TER ae REFER EE 234 4 13 Limitations on Container Analysis atada ERREUR ER 235 2 T4 Soil Analysis Methods esee ce RAS A AAA te dees ice AG 236 4 14 1 Overview or Soil Mode soe A EAR 236 4 14 1 1 Field Acquisition of an In Situ Spectrum sss 236 4 14 1 2 Application of Calibration Factors o o oooooooooooomoo o 237 Calibration Factors Described by Beck 237 Information Needed es RE Ee ER a 237 Calculation of the Angular Correction Factor 238 Calibration Factors for Field Ge Detectors I K Helfer and K M Mil cot Ges hr eter ias 238 Example visas dd rali ane aera 241 EXAMPLE oa 242 Example or os Seen nna CERAM a aeRO Re eR ES 243 4 14 1 3 Calculation of Peak Count Rate Per Unit Uncollided Flux 244 4 14 1 4 Calculation of Total Uncollided Flux per Unit Inventory 246 5 TABLE OF CONTENTS 4 14 1 5 Calculation of the Overall Calibration Factor 248 4 14 2 Critical Level Counts Calculation 0 0 0 cee ee eee 248 AAD Analysis EIOS St ERAS eee RO ee ee pee ou ERAS 249 4131 ISOWAN32 e ds ma oec OR ee EE ERR eed aha Woe Ua ex 249 ql TSOBNM Idi did pinta itm iube Le Ed M TE 249 QUA
376. s printed in place of the net peak count rate in the unknown peak table Note the efficiency number is area and the peak number is rate This also prints out the half life and yield for library peaks in the Library Peak Usage section 0 of pks eng recal low The number of peaks in the low part of the energy spectrum needed in order to do an energy recalibration 15 of pks eng recal high The number of peaks in the high part of the energy spectrum needed in order to do an energy recalibration 0 0 recal energy dividing The energy dividing the high and low regions for the energy recalibration 1 0 scaling factor on activity This number is multiplied times the activity before it is printed This is in addition to all the other factors entered 317 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 2 0 range multiplier The multiplier of the FWHM for the acceptance width of the suspect library 0060 Page length 12 The page length of the Soil Mode and QA report in lines F erase uFo file This controls the erasure of the uro file after the analysis Note that if the file is erased by ISOWAN32 after the analysis the display results feature will not work because display uses the uFo file F MDA type T Allow change The first number is the MDA method to be used as the default See Section 4 5 2 to select the MDA method index number Enter a T after the number to allow the MDA method to be changed in configurations used
377. s table above There is one of these tables for each detector covering all measurements whether background or standard sample type The total number of records in this table is denoted by NumMeas in the Detectors 329 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual table which is also the measurement number of the last record in this table The records are stored sequentially by measurement number Field Name SQL Data Type Description Measurement SQL_INTEGER Measurement Number Primary key MeasTime SQL_TIMESTAMP Date Time for this measurement MeasType SQL_SMALLINT Activity analysis 1 or Background 0 LiveTime SQL_REAL Acquisition Live Time in Seconds CountRate SQL_REAL Background CPS only for Background measurement Activity SQL_REAL Total Activity PeakShift SQL_REAL Average Peak Shift FWHMRatio SQL REAL Average FWHM Ratio FWTMRatio SQL_REAL Average FWTM Ratio C 2 4 P dmmmm Peaks Table s Where d is the detector number in decimal mmmm is the measurement number to 4 places There is one of these tables for each measurement in the table above but only if the output of actual centroid energies is enabled Field Name SQL Data Type Description PeakNumber SQL_INTEGER Peak No counter Primary key PeakFlags SQL_INTEGER Analysis Results Flags Nuclide SQL_CHAR 8 Library Nuclide Name this peak belongs to Energy SQL_REAL Library Energy Centroid SQL_REAL Actual Centroid Energy CalFWHM SQL_REAL Expect
378. seful for demonstrating that the counts in the uncorrected spectrum divided by the live time is the same counting rate as the counts in the ZDT spectrum divided by the real time in the special case of constant counting rate Because the error spectrum is not collected in NORM_CORR mode the standard deviation in the ZDT counts cannot be calculated if the counting rate is varying ISOTOPIC provides some protection for users if the ZDT LTC mode is inadvertently selected In this case ISOTOPIC v4 x ignores the ZDT spectrum and presumes you intended to use the uncorrected spectrum in a constant counting rate application To Summarize e Use the ZDT Off mode when the counting rate is expected to be constant during the time taken to acquire the spectrum e Use the ZDT CORR ERR mode when the counting rate is expected to change or might change significantly during the time required to acquire the spectrum e Avoid using the NORM CORR mode because ISOTOPIC v4 x will default to analyzing the LTC spectrum and will ignore the ZDT spectrum More Information Visit our website or contact your ORTEC representative for more detailed information e Application note ANS6 Loss Free Counting with Uncertainty Analysis Using ORTEC s Innovative Zero Dead Time Technique http www ortec online com pdf an56 paf e General gamma spectroscopy technical papers http www ortec online com papers reprints htm General 58 3 MENU COMMANDS 3 2 8 5 Settin
379. sigma uncertainty below this value Library peaks with 1 sigma uncertainty are printed but are not used in the activity calculation The default value is 100 The Background Type can be Auto 1 point 3 point or 5 point These are explained in Section 4 1 1 In most in situ spectra the best choice will be 3 point for 8K or fewer channels and 5 point for 16K channels Note that Soil Mode analysis uses MDA Method 12 Regulatory Guide 4 16 by default To use another MDA method change the MDA type parameter in the B30winds ini file Section A 1 3 to the desired method number according to the information and numbering scheme in Section 4 5 122 3 MENU COMMANDS 3 5 3 4 Report The Report tab Fig 87 specifies the options for the final Soil report which is described in detail in the Operator user manual The Activity Units can be in becquerels Bq microcuries Ci nanocuries nCi or picocuries pCi for the activity The selection of per unit area or per unit weight is done in the alpha rho table The four Output sections of the report can be turned on or off by marking or unmarking the corresponding checkbox The Unknown Peaks list a Soil Gamma Analysis Parameter Setup Quay should be included to check A co hee that the spectrum does not Soil Setup File C UseLwSH01_070626 m1 OK contain significant amounts Field ID D amp D Site xY2 Cancel of any nuclides not included in the library Activity Units
380. size of the spectrum that was last transferred from Detector or disk file The Detector list on the right side of the Toolbar indicates whether the buffer or a particular Detector is currently displayed and the Status Sidebar shows the presets for the displayed data This duplicates lt F4 gt and Display Detector Buffer see Section 4 6 2 294 6 KEYBOARD FUNCTIONS 6 3 6 Narrower Wider lt gt lt gt The lt gt key increases the horizontal scale of the Expanded Spectrum View so the peaks appear wider while the lt gt key decreases the horizontal scale making the peaks look narrower The horizontal and vertical scale values are displayed on the Toolbar These functions are duplicated by lt F7 gt lt F8 gt 6 4 Function Keys 6 4 1 ROI lt F2 gt The lt F2 gt key toggles the ROI marker status between the Mark UnMark and Off conditions then the arrow keys are used to set or clear the ROI bits for particular channels or groups of channels or return the marker to normal usage Off in which mode the marker can be moved without changing any of the ROI bits The current ROI marking status Marking Unmarking is shown in at the extreme right of the Menu Bar Off mode is shown as blank ROI bits are changed by using the keyboard to move the marker to a channel as follows e Mark The channel is marked set as an ROI with the marker e UnMark The channel is removed from the ROI reset with the marker e Off The
381. sor User s Manual F Sort isotope peaks by energy If T this sorts the isotope peak matrix part of the report by energy The normal listing is by library order 2 0 Multiplet channel shift limit The limit in channels that the peaks can be shifted in the fitting process in ISOENV32 0 0 Background width FWHM for MDAs Some types of MDA calculate the background independently of the analysis peak results This sets the peak width as a multiple of the FWHM F T Print MDA in Nuclide Summary If T this prints the MDA for the nuclides in the final summary as well as the activity 0 1 Env factor The env factor is used to reject nuclides if not enough different gamma rays are detected This is an alternative check to the Fraction Limit and is available for only for the ISOENV32 analysis engine This factor is multiplied by the correction factors for the first peak this includes detector efficiency and yield in the library This product is compared to correction factors for the second peak in the library If the correction factor for the second peak in the library is less than the first peak product i e it can be expected to be a weak peak then only the first peak is used to identify the nuclide To retain a nuclide on the preliminary identification list set the factor to a value greater than 1 Decrease the factor to reduce the chance of false positive nuclide identification 320 APPENDIX B TRANSFERRING INFORMATION FROM THE ISOTOPIC DA
382. stems Soil rpt for Soil Mode reports StandardIso vl rpt and StandardIsoAve vl rpt as well as your custom templates can reside in any location However as of this release StandardIsoAve vl rpt must remain in c NUser IMPORTANT Please note that these templates are merely examples to illustrate the potential of this reporting option The resulting reports have not been rigorously tested for accuracy 3 5 5 Attenuation This command is active in Container Surface Mode It opens a series of dialogs that allow you to view change add to and delete from the attenuation database The attenuation database is used for the calculations with collimators material matrices and containers You can add modify or remove as many materials as you wish The initial dialog is shown in Fig 94 NOTE Each ISOTOPIC database has its own attenuation database See the discussion in Section 3 7 1 1 129 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual The left side of the screen shows the table of mass attenuation coefficients by energy ISOTOPIC does not use linear attenuation coefficients therefore all entries in that column are zero The right side shows a graph of the selected coefficient for the selected material To select a material use the droplist to show the available materials in the database The display will update when a new material is selected 3 5 5 1 Editing an Existing Material To edit a material s
383. t The filenames are structured as follows Field ID Iso nnnnn where Field ID is entered at the top of the Soil Mode setup dialog Iso identifies these as files generated in ISOTOPIC and nnnnn is a numerical suffix that reflects the number of acquisitions performed to date with the corresponding detector for the current database Example D amp D Site XYZ Iso00200 Spc The Operator report is in ASCII text and does not include any bitmap images and Soil Mode measurements are made with only a single detector so there is no averaged report 1 6 2 1 Reanalysis When you reanalyze a Soil Mode scan data set a new suite of spectrum analysis and report files are created the original files are not overwritten Filenames are structured as follows Field ID Buf nnnnn ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual where Field ID is entered at the top of the Soil Mode setup dialog Buf identifies these as files generated using a buffer window and nnnnn is a numerical suffix reflecting the number of reanalyses performed in a buffer window for the current database 1 7 Operation Release Notes for Version 4 1 1 7 1 Regional Settings Except for Icelandic Windows your Windows Regional Settings must be configured to use a period as the Decimal Symbol to avoid errors when setting up or using container configurations 1 7 2 MCBs with a USB Interface UNKNOWN MODE Error After Power Loss If your MCB has a U
384. t F7 Preferences gt Figure 156 Display Menu 171 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 3 9 2 Automatic Automatic switches the Expanded Spectrum View to a linear scale that is automatically adjusted until the largest peak shown is at its maximum height without overflowing the display It also toggles the vertical scale of the spectrum display between the automatic and manual modes If the logarithmic scale was enabled the display is switched to linear This function is duplicated by Keypad lt gt and the Vertical Auto Scale Toolbar button 3 9 3 Baseline Zoom Baseline Zoom switches to autoscale mode then sets and keeps the baseline of the expanded display at zero counts Autoscale is then switched off This function is duplicated by the Baseline Zoom Toolbar button 3 9 4 Zoom In Zoom In adjusts the horizontal and vertical scales in the Los A 9 Expanded Spectrum View to view a smaller portion of Figure 157 Vertical and Horizontal the spectrum The vertical scale is divided by two and Full Scale Setting on the Toolbar the horizontal scale is reduced by about 6 of the full horizontal scale The current horizontal and vertical full scale values are shown on the Toolbar see Fig 157 This command is duplicated by Keypad lt gt the Toolbar Zoom In button and Zoom In on the right mouse button menu 3 9 5 Zoom Out Zoom Out adjusts the horizontal and vertical scales in the Expanded Spec
385. t Fraction in Matrix Material Combustible v Uranium g Estimated Density 9 3 g cc Plutonium fo Tare Weight 0 0000 kg Cancel lt Back Next gt Figure 76 Matrix Tab Container Page The Material list is drawn from the attenuation database Most common materials are in the database See Section 3 5 5 3 for instructions on adding new materials A default Estimated Density for the material is used unless you enter a new density here The default value is typically the crystalline density of the material In practice however the fill density of a pure material is much less than its crystalline density If you know the actual density enter it here The Tare wt is the weight of the empty container 105 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual If uranium or plutonium is present the possibility of self attenuation exists Self attenuation effects are corrected in the software These corrections are almost impossible to estimate initially The program will calculate an initial selection When uranium is detected in the sample 1f the sample is nonhomogeneous ISOTOPIC assigns an initial value of 0 001 weight fraction uranium The presence of uranium fluorescence X rays at 98 44 keV indicates that a significant amount of uranium self attenuation is present If you know the matrix contains a greater fraction of uranium or plutonium you should enter that greater fraction in the appropriate Total Weight F
386. t Fractions Use Entered Value 4 o Determined from Spectrum All uranium isotopes with weight Fractions entered will be referenced to U235 Pu Isotopic Weight fractions Pu 238 Use Entered Value Pu 239 G Determined from Spectrum Pu 240 Pu 241 Pu 242 Total 0 99975 Cancel lt Back Next gt Figure 79 Uranium Plutonium Tab Analysis Page 111 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Report Tab The settings on this tab Fig 80 govern the content and generation of the Operator program s Container Surface Mode report Note that the Supervisor program no longer generates reports Choose the Uncertainty Reporting options The Confidence level multiplier shown here is used on the report only All internal checks on peak uncertainty are done at the 1 sigma level See Section 4 7 for details on the total uncertainty calculation The uncertainty can be in Activity e g 200 Bq 10 Bq or Percent e g 200 Bg 5 If Counting is selected counting uncertainty will be printed If Total is selected both the counting and total uncertainty will be printed Isotopic Settings Analysis Number of Detector s Live Time Preset sec o Ask for Detector Position Adjustments on Start Uncertainty Reporting Confidence Level Percent Counting e 1 C2 C 3 si in Activity Units C Total ep 2 3 sigma Reporting Options Iw Library Peaks V Library Peak Matrix
387. t common measurements position the detector so the item being measured is within the field of view 113 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual e Generally you will position the detector at the horizontal center of the item For box shaped items the detector can be positioned off center It is important to enter the proper Distance for the edge parameter Note the Detector 1 of x indicator on the left immediately below the diagram in Fig 81 This number reflects the number of detectors in this configuration For multi detector configurations or configurations in which the same detector is used in different orientations when you click the Next button this same page will be presented for each of the remaining detectors in the configuration Choose the Name of the Detector to be configured and its Type then enter the detector crystal Length and Diameter in millimeters from the detector data sheet Isotopic Settings Detectors Cortainer Wall Thickness Detector 1 of 1 Crystal Dimension in mm Mame No detector Type E Type v Length 70 Diameter 60 Detector Configuration Detector Collimator Orientation Front Side Top Weighting nor V No Collimator Detector Height 60 9600 cm Offset From Edge 91 4400 cm Depth Recess NN Em Detector Standoff to Collimator Front Thickness cm Standoff 88 9000 em Calculate Inner Diameter h cm Calibration File c User GvDem
388. t determination are susceptible to thorium interference The Ra nuclide daughter of Th emits a 186 keV gamma ray thorium Infinite thickness indicates a matrix thickness in which 99 9 of the penetrating gamma rays are absorbed 235 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual fluorescence X rays 89 96 and 93 35 keV will be emitted when macro quantities of thorium are present 4 14 Soil Analysis Methods The Soil Mode provides both qualitative and quantitative analysis results of radionuclides deposited through various scenarios in non laboratory environments The software package is based on methods developed by Beck et al at the DOE EML The analysis is accomplished in a five stage process 1 Field acquisition of a calibration spectrum followed by energy and full width half maximum FWHM calculations and storage of all coefficients 2 Field acquisition of an in situ spectrum followed by the peak search routines necessary to yield net count rate per gamma ray energy 3 Application of calibration factors derived from the methods described by Beck et al yielding qualitative and quantitative analysis results 4 Storage of all acquired data and analysis results in separate files identified per field location 5 Capability of supervisory administrative review or reanalysis of all stored data files and analysis results 4 14 1 Overview of Soil Mode 4 14 1 1 Field Acquisition of an Jn Situ Spectrum The o
389. t half lives as the basis for tracking changes in detector efficiency After a year the counting statistics from a weak peak could introduce a significant error the QA measurement 255 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Quality Assurance Settings for ISOCART 1 DIGIDART 1 BACKGROUND Acquisition Count Rate Limits Real 10 S Minimum Low High Maximum Wes 5 0 eo fioe fies Cart Create Background Report T SAMPLE Type Analysis Settings File Don t Clear at Start C User Default Sd Peak Records in Database Lock Acquire on Violation s Browse Edit OA File Prefix 04 QA File Sequence 0 SAMPLE Analysis Parameter Limits Check Limits Minimum Low High Maximum Total Activity Bq fo Suggest Av Peak Shift kev T Av FWHM Ratios AvFWTM Ratios Figure 191 QA Settings Dialog 3 A QA library containing only the nuclides in the QA source must be created using the nuclide library editor see Section 3 6 4 A sample type settings file SDF must be created which contains the defaults for the QA acquisition and analysis see Section 5 3 5 A database to contain the QA results must exist The ISOTOPIC QA database GvQa32 Mdb is installed as part of the standard ISOTOPIC installation and should be located in the Yuser directory on the drive where ISOTOPIC was installed However if you select the Settings command and ISOTOPIC cannot find GvQa
390. t was used in the activity calculation 5 7 5 Nuclides in Sample Figure 225 shows the activity in the sample If the spectrum is not efficiency calibrated or the library is not found this table is suppressed The nuclides are arranged in library order The activity is the average activity multiplied by the scale factor You enter the column label If decay correction is requested the decay corrected activity is also printed If the nuclide is not found the MDA value is printed with a lt symbol after the nuclide name and no uncertainty Average activity FERRER SUMMARY oF NUCLIDES IM SAMPLE FERRE Time of Count Time Corrected Uncertainty 1 Sigma Activity Activity Counting TOTAL Nuc lide Bq Bq Lib d 1 0193E403 1 0183E403 3 2651E 00 1 1793E4 015 brary order 3 05844E 04 3 48851E 04 6 6582E 02 1 1240E 01 2 1273E402 2 1285E402 8 2197E 01 1 1270E 015 ll peaks for activity calculation had bad shape Activity omitted from total Activity omitted from total and all peaks had bad shape HDi value printed Activity printed but activity lt MDA Activity lt MD and failed test rea lt Critical level Failed fraction or key line test Halflife limit exceeded Comments 2 SUMMARY A Total Activity O 0 to 2641 65 keV 3 2075846E 04 Eq 4 Total activity Total Decayed Activity 0 0 to 2641 68 keV 3 5112727E404 Bn inalyzed by Reviewed hy Supervisor Startistop analysis La
391. ta are merged with the spectrum when it is saved as an spc file The information is used in the analysis section to perform the desired analysis It is important that the energy and efficiency calibrations be performed correctly because the calibration results will affect all analyses employing them e The energy calibration data are used to define the energies of the peaks in the spectrum If incorrect the calculated energies will not correspond to the correct library entry and the peak might be incorrectly identified The shape parameters are used to define the expected shape for a singlet peak If incorrect peaks will be labeled as having a bad shape when they do not and bad peaks will not be marked Peaks marked with poor shape might not be included in the activity calculation resulting in loss of accuracy even for singlet peaks For deconvolutions these parameters define the Gaussian shape used for the components of the total peak area Incorrect peak shapes can result in poor deconvolution results and even incorrect peak height ratios in multiplets An incorrect efficiency calibration can cause the nuclide activity to be incorrectly reported If a detector is not efficiency calibrated nuclide activities will be reported as zero The methods used by ISOTOPIC to calculate the peak centroid and width in the Calibrate functions are also used in the Settings functions This ensures consistency of results The energy calibration and the
392. tainer configurations and the basic Cacxts20 Y srs60xxxecal Mdb d colli TAN S GvDemo Mdb srs4275 1417 Mdb attenuation and collimator entries Any ov0a32 Mdb amp jers4275ecal Mdb special additions such as custom config LibO Mdb OrtecDB mdb urations or new attenuation materials must be added manually to the new database File name To create a new database Fig 141 Saveastype Database y Cancel simply browse to the folder in which the new database will be located enter a new filename and click on Save If you do not create the new database in your current Start Up directory as assigned on the Directories tab Figure 141 Create a New Database 162 3 MENU COMMANDS under File Settings Section 3 1 1 you must go to the Directories tab and switch the Start Up entry to the location of the new database file NOTES When you create a new database it is automatically selected as the target database for the Supervisor and Operator programs To choose another database use the Select Database command below Before using the new database you must issue the Services Edit Detector List command see Section 3 7 5 then click on OK to close the dialog This step is necessary to make the Detectors on the ISO Pick List available on the Detector Name list in the Configuration Wizard see Sections 3 5 2 4 and 3 5 3 1 If the pick list shows all desired Detectors you do not have to modify or re create the list
393. tatistical uncertainty is the uncertainty in the gross area and the uncertainty in the background added in quadrature The uncertainty in the gross area is the square root of the area The uncertainty in the background is not as simple because the background is a calculated number The background area uncertainty is the uncertainty in the channels used to calculate the end points of the background multiplied by the ratio of the number of channels in the peak to the number of channels used to calculate the background For wide peaks and low counts per channel there is high uncertainty in the calculated background background area peakwidth de width of low average width of high average gross area error gross area net area error y gross area error background error Y bkg error 31 187 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Referring back to Figs 167 and 168 and Table 4 the background uncertainty is Background error 432 2311 2276 1 5 5 39 4 32 Net area error y 18143 1552 4 140 4 or 0 8 of net peak area The peak width is calculated at the half maximum tenth maximum and twenty fifth maximum for the net peak shape The peak width points are linearly interpolated between the two channels that bracket the respective height value For spectra containing very few counts the uncertainty in peak area will never be less than 1 4 1 5 Peak Centroid The peak centroid channel in
394. tects a minor error a warning message is displayed Click on OK to acknowledge the warning and remember that this warning was given The calibration process will continue as normal When the final review screen is displayed Fig 49 click on Edit Energy to review the cause of the error and correct it if needed see Section 3 3 2 4 Read From File If you chose to Read From File Energy Calibration File HE the Energy Calibration File dialog Fig 40 will open Enter the name of the file in which the desired energy c alibration is stored The m Please enter the pathname of the energy calibration file libration Description stored in Ed b atio i ese pt on stored Path CAU set Mike D 17 00 cal Clb Browse the file is displayed read only to assist youn choosing the correct Description calibration with daughters in library 2 literMB 183 file Any type of file that stores calibration records can be used This function operates the same as Calibrate Recall Calibration recalling the energy calibration only Since this is a complete calibration no checking e g FWHM is performed Figure 40 Select the File that Contains the Desired Energy Calibration Click on Next The next screen displayed will depend on the choices you made on the opening screen When you reach the Finish Calibration Wizard screen you will have an opportunity to review and edit the energy calibration table 71 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISO
395. ted To switch only the compare between Normal and Corrected use lt Shift F3 gt that is to show Normal Corrected use lt Shift F3 gt Figure 18 Compare Mode Screen The Compare spectrum is offset from the starting spectrum and can be moved up and down incrementally with the Shift 1 gt and Shift gt accelerators In addition the vertical scale of both spectra can be simultaneously changed with 1 and 1 Note that the Compare spectrum ROIs if any were saved with the file are not marked in this mode 31 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Figure 19 is a detailed view of the compare similar to that in Fig 18 In this illustration the starting spectrum is displayed in color 1 the Compare spectrum is shown in color 2 the starting spectrum ROIs are marked in color 3 and the portion of the starting spectrum that exceeds the Compare spectrum is indicated by color 4 These colors called Foreground Compare ROL and Composite respectively are chosen on the Color Preferences dialog discussed in Section 3 9 8 3 O veni Press Esc to leave Compare mode Figure 19 Spectrum Colors in Compare 3 1 6 Exit Mode This exits ISOTOPIC and returns to Windows If the buffer contains a spectrum that has not been saved a warning message is displayed All MCBs continue to acquire data until the presets are met 3 1 7 About ISOTOPIC Figure 20 shows the About box for Isotopic Sup
396. ted at the beginning of the list They are arranged in ascending energy order The list can be suppressed It is not printed if the library is not found or the spectrum is not calibrated Arranged in ascending order A o I E E T I F I E D P E A E a Uu i M A ER Y Tec e e s c e Nuclide Peak Centroid Background Met irea Intensity Uncert FWHM Channel Energy Counts Counts CtefSec 1 Sigma key AM 241 360 97 59 56 212820 136820 68 410 0 82 1 429 CH 134 1406 26 232 48 108031 1143 0 572 52 32 0 2468 Library entries x ao 3092 06 510 50 68474 1110 0 555 45 76 0 1693 03 134 3411 40 563 23 129511 281343 140 672 0 26 1 815D CH 134 3446 22 569 31 139684 510466 255 233 0 17 1 8190 3 Peak fails shape tests n Peak area deconvoluted Actual peak energy Deconvolution Figure 223 Identified Peak Summary The first column shows the nuclide name as listed in the library The second column is the peak channel as determined by the peak finder see page 188 If the peak centroid cannot be found then this is set to O along with the remaining entries on this line It is reported to two decimal places but normal variation can be in the tenths of a channel The third column shows the peak centroid in energy if the spectrum is calibrated zero otherwise This is the first column converted to energy according to the energy coefficients in the calibration data This too is reported to the nearest hundredth of a channel Peaks are inc
397. tense peak your reference gamma ray will not be used Click on Next to go to the Detectors page 3 5 2 4 Detectors Page Use the Detectors page Fig 81 to define the position of each detector relative to the container DETECTOR SETUP SUGGESTIONS FOR CONTAINER MODE e Select the orientation of the detector with respect to the item For a box the most common orientation position is the Front which ISOTOPIC defines as the wide side The user should try to measure activity through the least thickness of matrix to minimize the item correction factor Normally you will not use the Side position narrow width for routine measurements unless you are making multiple measurements For cylinders the most common position is the Side If measuring a thick disk looking down on the disk i e along its cylindrical axis use the Top position for the cylinder orientation Typically you will consider the largest dimension of the item to be measured then position the detector at a distance half the size of the largest dimension For example if a drum is 100 cm high the detector is usually positioned approximately 50 cm from the face of the collimator to the inner container It is important to measure the Standoff distance from the front of the collimator not the detector end cap unless a collimator is not used If you are not sure of the appropriate detector to item distance use the Calculate button to help determine the field of view FOV For mos
398. ter 3 13 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 14 Toolbar beneath the Menu Bar contains icons for recalling spectra saving them to disk starting and stopping data acquisition and adjusting the vertical and horizontal scales for the active spectrum Detector Droplist on the Toolbar displays the list of currently available Detectors Clicking on this field opens a list of all Detectors currently on the ISOTOPIC Detector pick list Selecting a Detector opens a new spectrum window and displays the spectrum for this Detector The droplist shows the name of the most recently selected Detector Up to 8 Detector and buffer windows can be open at one time ROI Status Area on the right side of the menu bar indicates whether the ROI marking mode is currently Mark UnMark or Off This operates in conjunction with the lt F2 gt accelerator key see Section 6 4 1 Spectrum Area which can display one or more windows of data from Detectors or buffers containing spectra from Detectors or from spectrum files on disk These windows can be moved sized minimized maximized and closed with the mouse as well as tiled horizontally or vertically from the Window menu When more than one window is open only one is active available for data manipulation and analysis at a time Active and inactive windows follow the color conventions of your Windows desktop theme If the window is monitoring a Detector or you have copied the c
399. ter beeps and ISOTOPIC posts a no more message on the Supple mentary Information Line If a library file has not been loaded or the Detec tor is not calibrated the Library buttons are disabled and shown in gray ROI Drs aya The indexing buttons are displayed in two different ways depending on a whether the active spectrum is a Detector or a buffer This two are shown Peak in Fig 11 i me at When the active spectrum is a Detector the buttons appear at the bottom f Ley a of the Status Sidebar If the active spectrum is a buffer the buttons are CET IE overlaid where the Presets and indexing buttons are displayed in Detector sien iim mode Buttons Detector The ROI Peak and Library buttons function the same for both Detector window top and buffer For buffers the additional features are the ability to insert or eid HM ottom delete an ROI with the Ins and Del buttons respectively located between the ROI indexing buttons and to display the peak information for an ROI with the Info button located between the Peak indexing arrows 21 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual The Library buttons are useful after a peak has been located to advance forward or backward through the library to the next closest library entry Each button click advances to the next library entry and moves the marker to the corresponding energy Instead of using the Peak buttons to index from a previously iden
400. that control loa tog A the spectrum vertical scale These commands are also on the Display menu In addition vertical scale can be adjusted by zooming in with the mouse see Fig 9 Figure 3 Vertical Scaling Section of Toolbar Log Vertical Log Lin Scale switches between logarithmic and linear scaling When switching from logarithmic to linear it uses the previous linear scale setting The keyboard equivalent is Keypad lt gt Al Vertical Auto Scale turns on the autoscale mode a linear scale that automatically adjusts until the largest peak shown is at its maximum height without overflowing the display The keyboard equivalent is Keypad lt gt The field to the left of these two buttons displays LOG if the scale is logarithmic or indicates the current vertical full scale linear value The horizontal scaling section Fig 4 follows next It includes a 4096 e e Ed ki field that shows the current window width in channels and the Zoom In Zoom Out Center and Baseline Zoom buttons These commands are also on the Display menu In addition horizontal scale can be adjusted by zooming in with the mouse see Fig 9 Figure 4 Horizontal Scaling Section of Toolbar 17 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual B Zoom In decreases the horizontal full scale of the Expanded Spectrum View according to the discussion in Section 2 1 so the peaks appear magnified This duplicates Display Zoom In and Key
401. that is halfway between minimum gain and maximum gain This should be done before selecting the ROI for the peak because the initialization might move the peak in the spectrum and because it ensures that the maximum range is available for the stabilization process If the peak is moved by this command use the amplifier fine gain control Alt gt or Alt gt to move the peak to the desired channel When starting a new system the zero initialize command should also be given before starting the gain stabilization The Suggest button is used to set the peak center and peak width of the peak area used by the stabilizer Before selecting this command the ROI must be marked and the marker put in the region to be used When operating the peak will be centered in the ROI After the region has been recorded the stabilization is turned on If the stabilization is turned on when this command is executed the old stabilization region is replaced by the new peak defined by the marker and stabilization continues using the new peak 52 3 MENU COMMANDS The Gain Stabilizer Enabled checkbox enables or disables the gain stabilization It can only be turned on after the Suggest button has been used to select a working peak 3 2 8 3 Zero Stabilization The Zero Stabilizer function adjusts the zero level or offset level to maintain a peak in a fixed location The zero level stabilizer uses a peak in the spectrum to monitor the zero level of
402. the dialog Counts is the gross counts in the specified region and Live time is the live time The MDA value is calculated in the MCB given the values a b c Live time and Yield The calculated value is compared with the MDA value on the dialog and when it is lower acquisition is stopped Coefficients A B and C can be Properties for DIGIDART 176 entered as numbers for the MDA mplifier mplifier 2 ADC Stabilizer High Voltage Iculation desired calculation desired Field Data About Status Presets MDA Preset Nuclide Report Select the Nuclide and Energy from EET Nucl Energy eli the droplists The Nuclide list contains 180 0000 oeol 1173 23 Update all the nuclides in the working library Delete The Energy list shows all the gamma MDA Preset Coefficients ray energies for the selected nuclide in Correction 150 0000 cA A 0 000000 the library Nuclide Co 60 v B 0 000000 Energy 1173 23 keV C 121 00000 The MDA field is labeled Correction when the Detector is not efficiency calibrated Figure 31 The digiDART MDA Preset Tab Nuclide Report The Nuclide Report displays the activity of up to nine user selected peaks Once the report is set up the Nuclide Report can be viewed at any time on the digiDART display when it is not connected to a PC The peak area calculations in the hardware are the same as the calculations done here so the Nuclide Report display is the same as the
403. the system amplifier The zero stabilizer controls the offset bias level so the peak will be maintained in its original position The input pulse height to channel number relationship is Channel number Intercept Gain pulse height 8 where Intercept The channel number of the zero height input pulse Gain The relation between pulse height and channel number slope of the curve Changes in either the zero intercept or gain can affect the positions of all the peaks in the spectrum When used with the gain stabilizer both the zero intercept and the gain slope are monitored to keep all the peaks in the spectrum stabilized The zero stabilization and gain stabilization are separate functions in the MCB but both will affect the position of the peaks in the spectrum The stabilization operates by keeping a peak centered in the defined ROI The ROI should be set symmetrically about the center of a peak with reasonably good count rate in the lower channels of the spectrum The ROI should be about twice the FWHM of the peak If the region is too large counts not in the peak will have an effect on the stabilization The ROI can be cleared after the PEAK command so that peak count preset can be used on another peak The zero stabilization dialog Initialize button sets the zero offset to its midpoint that is halfway between minimum offset and maximum offset This should be done before selecting the ROI for the peak because the initialization m
404. the following F e F c a 2a C 15 where F e FWHM in energy F c FWHM in channels at channel C A energy calibration slope defined in Eq 13 62 3 MENU COMMANDS az energy calibration quadratic coefficient defined in Eq 13 C channel number When you apply a FWHM fit ISOTOPIC automatically checks the fit for validity If the FWHM curve is negative at any part of the spectrum or if the curve bends over has a maximum and then goes down a warning message Non physical FWHM fit is displayed Click on OK then display the FWHM curve to see why the fit is incorrect Also if the delta between the data points and the FWHM fit is greater than 25 a message is displayed The curve can be accepted 1f the warning was displayed because the fit is outside the energy of interest or because some of the data points should be deleted If you have a low activity source counting longer could remedy the poor fit The energy calibration can be performed on a spectrum in either a buffer window retrieved from disk or copied from an MCB memory or a Detector The calibration spectrum should have well separated peaks containing 2000 5000 counts The calibration is linked to the spectrum and is transferred with it when the spectrum is transferred e g from Detector to buffer or disk file 3 3 1 2 Efficiency Calibration The efficiency calibration calculates the detection efficiency of the HPGe detector system as a function of en
405. the history of the site These distributions can be different for each individual isotope i e natural isotopes are subject to different corrections than fresh fallout The in situ case Soil Mode typically functions in the third mode rather than the more interactive mode The EML in situ methodology is based on the use of empirically determined calibration factors to provide quantitative radionuclide analysis for radionuclides deposited near the soil surface within the viewing area of the germanium detector The analysis requires that you specify only four parameters Three of these parameters are detector parameters the manufacturer s quoted efficiency the germanium crystal length to diameter ratio and the detector orientation up or down The fourth parameter alpha rho is used to correct for gamma ray attenuation according to the distribution of the radionuclide in the soil Complete details are in Section 4 14 ISOTOPIC has been a helpful tool in characterizing gamma ray emitting radioactivity in poorly characterized matrices and large fields This program has been used at the Oak Ridge K 25 Site for several years where it has been a major tool for the analysis of more than 6 000 samples It has been used for measurement of radioactive waste holdup measurements and inventory verification Typical analysis time for one spectrum is a few minutes It has also been used in the characterization of several large sites including the DOE Idaho Nat
406. the keyboard numbers will function in the following combinations The keypad number keys will not perform these functions 6 3 1 Start lt Alt 1 gt lt Alt 1 gt starts the acquisition in the selected Detector Any presets desired must be entered before starting acquisition This accelerator duplicates the Start Toolbar button the Start command on the right mouse button menu and Acquire Start Section 3 2 1 6 3 2 Stop lt Alt 2 gt lt Alt 2 gt stops acquisition in the selected Detector This duplicates the Stop Toolbar button the Stop command on the right mouse button menu and Acquire Stop Section 3 2 2 6 3 3 Clear lt Alt 3 gt lt Alt 3 gt clears the displayed Detector histogram data and its descriptors e g real time live time This accelerator duplicates the Clear Spectrum Toolbar button the Clear command on the right mouse button menu and Acquire Clear Section 3 2 3 6 3 4 Copy to Buffer lt Alt 5 gt lt Alt 5 gt copies the histogram data from the selected Detector to the buffer along with its descriptors e g live time real time and displays the spectrum in a new window This duplicates the Copy to Buffer command on the right mouse button menu and Acquire Copy to Buffer Section 6 3 5 Detector Buffer lt Alt 6 gt lt Alt 6 gt switches the display between the histogram of the spectrum in the selected Detector and the spectrum in the buffer The buffer will have the memory
407. the offset and slope from the recalibration of the spectrum These will not be very different from the previous values 5 7 2 Unidentified Peak Summary Figure 222 shows the peak energy matrix of the unidentified peak summary You can suppress this report The first column is the peak channel as determined by the peak finder see Section 4 1 5 It is reported to two decimal places but normal variation can be in the tenths of a channel The second column shows the peak centroid in energy if the spectrum is calibrated zero otherwise This is the first column converted to energy according to the energy coefficients in the calibration data This too is reported to the nearest hundredth of a channel Peaks are included in the unknown list if they are too far from a library peak so these extra digits might be of use The third column shows the background under the peak This is the straight line background 282 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Net area live time Straight line background or area X efficiency THETA N I D E H T I F I E Dp P E A E 5 U H M A E Y echo ch Wo n i Peak Centroid Background Net Area Efficiency Uncert FWHM Suspected Channel Energy Counts Counts t brea 1 Sigma keV Nuclide 127 33 20 98 84417 57612 D OODE D0 1 22 2 206 TC 99M s 533 82 88 10 202723 192605 7 18868E 06 0 354 1 442 PB 214 644 92 106 45 78113 857 7 123E 03 54 66 0 492 NP 239 s 739 92 122 13 165599 57741 2 698E 05 1 74 1 472 CO 57 827 12 136 53 14
408. tified peak position the marker anywhere in the spectrum and click on the Library buttons to locate the entries closest in energy to that point If a warning beep sounds it means that all library entries have been exhausted in that direction or that the spectrum is not calibrated In any case if an appropriate peak is available at the location of the marker data on the peak activity are displayed on the Marker Information Line at the bottom of the screen The ROI and Peak indexing buttons are duplicated by Shift gt lt Shift gt gt and Ctrl gt lt Ctrl respectively The Library buttons are duplicated by Alt gt lt Alt The Del button function is duplicated by the Delete key and Clear ROI on the menus and Toolbar The Ins button has the same function as the Insert key and Mark ROI on the menus and Toolbar The Info button duplicates the Calculate Peak Info and the Peak Info command on the right mouse button menu 2 5 Drag and Drop Several types of files can be selected and loaded into ISOTOPIC using the Windows drag and drop feature The file types are spectra SPC AN1 CHN calibration CLB library LIB analysis results UFO peak background correction PBC and region of interest ROI The drag and drop file is handled the same as a file recall operation for that type of file For spectra this means the file is loaded into a buffer and displayed Library and PBC files be
409. times are the start time of the sample collection and the stop time of the sample collec tion For example for air filters the start time is the time when the air 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Container Surface Analysis Options Sample System Decay Report Analysis Corrections Decay Correction Date 8 25 2000 M d pyyy Time 1 47 09 PM During Acquisition kaws Sample Collection Collection Sample Start Date Sample End Date M d pyyy Time Time h mm ss tt Cancel Help Figure 208 Decay Tab flow is started and the stop time is when the air flow is stopped These times are used to calculate the build up of the activity in the sample It is assumed that the spectrum is not collected during the build up time 5 3 4 Report Tab This screen Fig 209 controls the contents destination and some details of the QA sample measurement report Select one or more Reporting Options by marking the checkboxes Next choose the Uncertainty Reporting options The Confi dence level multiplier shown here is used on the spectrum report only All internal checks on peak uncertainty are done at the 1 sigma level See Chapter 4 for details on the total uncertainty calculation The uncertainty can be in Activity e g 200 Bg 10 Bq or Percent e g 200 Bq 5 If you select Counting the counting uncertainty will be printed If you choose Total both the counting and total uncertainty will be
410. tion in the active Detector Any warnings arising from problems detected at the hardware level will appear in a Clear Alt 3 message box or on the Supplemental Information Line at the bottom of the display The Detector can also be started with the lt Alt 1 gt QA dl shortcut the Start Acquisition button on the Toolbar or the Start command on the right mouse button menu If the Detector is already started or if a buffer is the active spectrum this entry is gray MCB Properties Figure 21 Acquire NOTES To associate a sample description with this spectrum ss enu before starting acquisition select Acquire MCB Properties click on the About tab see Fig 27 on page 42 enter the Sample description and click on Close The Supervisor program does not have a spectrum analysis capability To analyze a spectrum acquired here go to the Operator program and use the Select configuration and file s and Analyze spectrum in memory commands as described in the Operator User Manual 3 2 2 Stop Stop terminates data collection in the active Detector If the Detector is not collecting data or the active spectrum is a buffer the entry is gray The Detector can also be stopped with the shortcut Alt 2 gt the Stop Acquisition button on the Toolbar and the Stop command on the right mouse button menu 3 2 3 Clear Clear erases the spectral data and the descriptors e g real time live time start time for the active spectrum The p
411. tion program so double clicking on a spectrum file name in Windows Explorer will start GVPlot and display that spectrum 7 1 1 Screen Features Figure 227 shows the major GVPlot screen features 1 Title bar shows the current spectrum filename On the far right are the standard Windows Minimize Maximize and Close buttons 2 Menu Bar shows the available menu commands which can be selected with either the mouse or keyboard these functions are discussed in detail in the following sections 299 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual File View Options ROI Help 3 5 8 e 4 330 Energy keV Figure 227 The Main GVPlot Display 3 Toolbar beneath the Menu Bar contains icons for recalling a spectrum printing it and adjusting the vertical and horizontal scale of the spectrum window You can display or hide the toolbar from the View menu 4 The Expanded Spectrum Window shows all or part of the full histogram this allows you to zoom in on a particular part of the spectrum and see it in more detail You can change the vertical and horizontal scaling and perform a number of operations such as displaying peak information marking and modifying ROIs and displaying the residuals see item 6 below This window contains a vertical line called a marker that highlights a particular position in the spectrum Information about that position is displayed on the Marker Information Line see item 8 below Right
412. tion ratio section of the report will show Failed To use the concentration ratio limits for one or more nuclides set up your entries as described below then mark the Optimize Alpha Rho checkbox on the Analysis tab of the Soil Mode configuration dialog see Section 3 5 3 3 CAUTION This is a rarely used and advanced feature that should be approached with caution If a nuclide has two intense gamma rays at least 500 keV apart to reflect different attenuations the a p value can be determined from information obtained from these two gamma rays However long count times could be necessary to obtain the excellent counting statistics required to make this feature useful Enter the two energies and the upper and lower limits of the ratio for the nuclide activity for these two energies Now click on Add to add these values to the table shown above the entry 126 3 MENU COMMANDS fields To delete an entry click on the entry to highlight it and then click on Delete To change an entry click on the entry to highlight it change the values and click on Update Repeat for all the nuclides to be added to the table Click on OK to return to Fig 90 Click on Cancel to return to Fig 90 without saving the changes made here To modify an existing nuclide values select the nuclide from the droplist then click on Edit to open the dialog shown in Fig 91 Make any changes and click on OK To remove an entry from the table click on the N
413. title bar icon to open the menu Mark or unmark Table to show or hide the Analysis Results Table use Print on the results window s control menu to print the table as displayed 148 When the Analysis Results Table is displayed and ISOTOPIC is in interactive analysis mode more details can be displayed for any peak by double clicking on that peak in the table This opens a Details window as shown in Fig 124 Use the Peak buttons to step to the next highest energy and next lowest energy peaks Click on Close or press lt Esc gt to exit 3 MENU COMMANDS Analysis RAE Move Close Alt F4 v Table Figure 123 Analysis Sidebar Control Menu The Details window shows the following peak information derived from the uFo file structure which is described in detail in the File Structure Manual Energy 165 85 Centroid 165 85 Center 1003 88 mlo mhi 986 1022 multilo hi 0 0 Fwhm 6 263 0 477 keV Fwi m 12 01 0 915 keV FwO4m 15 18 1 16 keV rea 181118 Background 90187 Counts 181118 FirstNet 181118 FirstBackground 0 Uncertainty 0 0062793 Abundance 879 193 MDA 4 13299 fwPeakFlagi 2 3 0x0000 0x0040 0x0000 Lo HiWidth 3 3 BackLo Hi 2647 33 2227 67 Slope bove 0 qfParaBack 0 0 0 irpNuclide 7 754 7530 0 12 Figure 124 UFO Peak Record Description Energy Centroid Center mlo mhi The library peak energy in keV or the centroid energy for unknown peaks
414. to the channel corresponding to that energy If the calibration as it now stands is not sufficiently accurate the channel corresponding to that energy could be off by a channel or two If this is not the correct peak channel move the cursor to the correct channel click once on the library peak and press Enter To exit the calibration function click on the Energy Calibration Sidebar Close button This will close the calibration function and the new calibration will be held in memory available for subsequent spectra gathered on this Detector To save the calibration to disk select Calibrate Save Calibration 91 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 3 3 3 5 Other Sidebar Control Menu Functions The remaining items on the sidebar control menu are Move Close Restore Clear Table and Destroy Destroy clears all energy calibration values Restore reinstates the internal energy calibration table to the values stored when the calibration function was entered Clear table erases all the values in the table but retains the function energy and FWHM to be used when the next values are entered In this way a recalibration can be done without manual entry of any points Close exits the Energy calibration function and saves the current calibration as the working calibration 3 3 3 6 Using Multiple Spectra for a Single Calibration To use more than one source when simultaneous collection is not possible to make a single
415. to the main ISOTOPIC screen click on Close 3 5 6 Peak Background Correction The Peak Background Correction submenu is shown in Fig 106 Use these Create PBC commands to load a new working PBc file and to create or edit PBC files iiam The PBC files are organized by nuclide then by peaks for each nuclide Figure 106 PBC Menu The Psc file for each detector is used with the peak background correction in Container Surface Mode container analysis Note that the PBC correction is related to the detector and the shield but not to the geometry of the sample Any of the correction table nuclide data include the nuclide name which can be any combination of eight characters but must be consistent throughout all files 3 5 6 1 Create PBC This starts the PBC wizard which creates psc files automatically from either an archived spectrum file discussion starts below or a live spectrum see page 140 At startup ISOTOPIC automatically attempts to load the Bc file last loaded Thereafter it can be replaced at any time using Select PBC 138 3 MENU COMMANDS From an Archived Spectrum File e Click on File Recall and select the spectrum file from which the PBC file will be derived e Select Create PBC This will open the dialog shown in Fig 107 Browse for the Analysis Library This will normally be a library of background nuclides Isotopic Supervisor Container Surface Mode zl 1E 4 pe
416. total summation is the center of moment of the peak and is calculated as the weighted channel number of the peak That is the peak centroid is the sum of the net channel contents times the channel number divided by the sum of the channel contents The centroid is calculated on the data in the measured full width at one twenty fifth 1 25 maximum FW0 4M for the peak Peak centroid 33 where i the channel number C net contents of channel i 1 For the directed fit method the centroid comes from the fitting process From the Table 4 values and the calculated background the net spectrum is shown in Table 5 continuing the example calculation on this peak 188 4 ANALYSIS METHODS The FW 04M is 2 2 times the FWHM for a Gaussian peak The peak integration channels are then 2284 to 2300 The channel numbers are rounded to the nearest integers The centroid for this example is 4 0366x10 1 761x10 2292 16 Table 5 Example Net Spectrum Channel Background Net Spectrum Channel Background Net Spectrum 2270 11 7152 5 284 2300 12 0572 56 942 2271 11 7266 2 273 2301 12 0686 28 931 2272 11 7380 2 262 2302 12 0800 11 920 2273 11 7494 2 250 2303 12 0914 2 091 2274 11 7608 4 760 2304 12 1028 1 102 2275 11 7722 0 227 2305 12 1142 1 885 2276 11 7836 3 216 2306 12 1256 1 874 2277 11 7950 4 205 2307 12 1370 1 863 2278 11 8064 2 806 2308 12 1484 4 851 2279 11 8178 4 182 2309 12 1598 3 840 2280 11 8292 1 829 2310 12 1712
417. trip This function strips the specified disk spectrum from the spectrum in the buffer NOTE The PBC method Section 3 5 6 1 is preferred The Strip method is an alternate that can produce numerous spurious peaks A standard file open dialog Fig 71 opens prompting for a filename and Stripping Factor The file must be a valid spectrum data file containing the same number of channels as the displayed spectrum 98 Strip Spectrum File Look in I User Alpha Ha 00020001 Spc Px 235cs137 spe Py 312eub00 J Cut fx ODacb An By 250gem00 spe Ma 312eul00 Maa Ba ODacb Spc fa 2679cm00 spc fa 312qcm00 pins fx Dabed Spc fi 268qcm00 spc a 32505137 Tmpl Ma 118 spc Ma 2snfind Ant fa 3250537a Ha 00020000 Spc 4 129 spe Ma 2snfind spe Ra 325cs37c Fieneme Files of type Integer SPC Cancel Stripping Factor Factor by which file data will be multiplied before being subtracted from spectrum in memory M Use Ratio of Live Times Figure 71 Strip Dialog 3 MENU COMMANDS The Stripping Factor is a real number that is multiplied channel by channel times the disk spectrum before being subtracted from the base spectrum If the Use Ratio of Live Times box is marked the stripping factor is calculated as the ratio of the live time of the base spectrum divided by the live time of the disk spectrum The factor can be negative in which case the spectra are added NOTE The live t
418. trum View to view a larger portion of the spectrum The vertical scale is doubled and the horizontal scale is increased by about 646 of the full horizontal scale This command is duplicated by Keypad lt gt the Toolbar s Zoom Out button and Zoom Out on the right mouse button menu 3 9 6 Center This function forces the marker to the center of the screen by shifting the spectrum without moving the marker from its current channel This function is only required when moving the marker with the mouse the keyboard functions for moving the marker automatically shift the spectrum to center the marker when the marker travels past the end of the current expanded display Center is duplicated by Keypad 5 and the Center button on the Toolbar 172 3 9 7 Full View 3 MENU COMMANDS Full View adjusts the horizontal and vertical scaling to display the entire spectrum in the Expanded Spectrum View This command is duplicated by lt Alt F7 gt 3 9 8 Preferences This displays the options available for selecting the screen colors and Points spectrum display options This selection is for the active spectrum display only The submenu is shown in Fig 158 3 9 8 1 Points Fill ROI Fill All Use these functions to select the histogram display mode for both spectrum windows In Points mode the data are displayed as points or pixels on the screen in the colors chosen for Foreground and ROI under Display Preferences Spectrum Color
419. trum window You can also call a settings file from the GVPlot command line to ensure that the resulting plot s will be displayed according to your specifications The Print dialog Fig 231 allows you to select a printer Name and specify the sd Number of copies to be printed this number Mame HP DeskJet 550C Pinter X A n Status Default printer Ready is reset to 1 after every print session Click mH tigen eee on Properties to change print options such as Where LPTI paper size orientation and output resolution pulse Number of copies i OK Cancel Figure 231 The Print Plot Dialog 7 1 3 2 View Figure 232 shows the View menu which allows you to hide or display the View Toolbar and Status Bar v Toolbar v Status Bar Figure 232 The View Menu 303 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 7 1 3 3 Options The Options menu is shown in Fig 233 These menu items govern the Options appearance of the spectrum window and printed output a br We Ies v Auto Load UFO Graph Figure 233 The This command opens the dialog shown in Fig 234 which lets you set Options Mestu the graph colors symbol type and axis scaling factors These settings are stored when you exit GVPlot and reloaded the next time GVPlot is started You can also save these settings in an ASCII text file using the Save Settings As command and retrieve them with Recall Settings G
420. ts of coefficients one for the fit above the knee and one for below the knee or just one for the polynomial fit and a set of energy efficiency pairs The energy efficiency pairs are used for the interpolative fit The pairs might also be used to recalculate the efficiency and to display the efficiency plot Interpolative Fit The interpolative fit uses straight lines between the data points and does a linear interpolation between two points one above and one below to obtain the efficiency at the selected energy For energies below the minimum energy data point or above the maximum data point the efficiency is the straight line projection of the last two data points at the appropriate end The interpolative fit is used where the efficiency is recognized to be a complex function of energy that cannot be fit using the other functions If interpolative fit is used over the entire energy range the knee energy should be set below the minimum energy of interest Linear Fit The linear fit uses a straight line fit to the data points This is used when few data points are used or if the data points are all very close in energy Also for an n type detector the below the knee efficiency is nearly a straight line down to approximately 10 keV and the linear fit will produce the best result For only two data points in the entire calibration linear and interpolative are equivalent If sufficient data are available the linear fit is not as accurate as
421. ty in the geometry correction 96 The peak fit uncertainty method is determined in Section 4 1 4 The matrix uncertainty is computed by assuming that the localized attenuation and difference in gamma ray path length can vary by 40 E NT NE E e I e 7 x 100 87 A e 4 A upxa B A l 4 where u mass attenuation coefficient cm g p matrix density g cm X container diameter or width cm a container constant 1 for box 0 834 for cylinder Note that for high density material the correction factor approaches CF upy 88 Thus high density material can have an uncertainty of 40 Measurements of bulk thorium uranium and plutonium can exhibit excessive gamma ray self attenuation that is impossible to quantify Neutron methods should be used to quantify these materials The geometry uncertainty varies with the container shape For cylinders or boxes experience has shown that a practical uncertainty to assign is to assume that the activity is in the outside one fourth of the container and to compute a geometry correction which is then compared to the geometry correction factor for homogenous material _ CF4 CF geometry E CF x 100 89 219 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual where CF Correction for a homogenous container CF Correction factor if activity is located in the front or outside fourth of the container If the container is a rotated cylinder th
422. uclide Name checkbox allows you to hide or display the nuclide markers for an analyzed spectrum an example of these markers is shown in Fig page Turning the nuclide markers on or off slightly adjusts the graph s vertical scaling 304 7 UTILITIES Clearing the Show Axes checkbox removes the axes so the portion of histogram shown in the Expanded Spectrum Window occupies the entire window without an inside border Set the Y Axis Scale of both the Full and Expanded Spectrum Windows to Linear or Logarithmic You can also do this with the Vertical Log Lin Scale button on the toolbar The Draw Multiplet radio buttons determine whether Composite multiplets are drawn as a Composite curve shown individually Each or displayed as individual peaks superimposed with the composite curve Both These modes are compared in Fig 235 This display is most easily seen with all Fill Modes turned off checkboxes Each unmarked The Fill Mode checkboxes allow you to determine which peak types if any will be displayed in fill mode rather than data point mode Both Auto Y Spectrum allows you set up a fixed y axis range for the Expanded Spectrum Window Auto Y unmarked off or allow the program to autoscale the y axis to accommodate the tallest peak currently displayed in the expanded view Auto Y marked on The Auto Y Residual functions similarly for the residuals plot which is displayed from the right mouse button menu Sect
423. uclide field to open the list highlight the nuclide to be removed and click on Delete When the table is completed click on OK to save it A pop up box will ask if this file is to be used as the default alpha rho file on the Analysis tab Click on Yes to use the new file or No to retain the currently assigned file Edit Use this function to change the values in an alpha rho table A standard file open dialog is displayed select the RHO file to be edited and click on Open The RHo file will be displayed as in Fig 90 Follow the Add Edit Delete instructions above When the changes are complete click on OK to save them Print This prints the current alpha rho table in table form to the default printer View This displays the table in a dialog in the same format as the printed table Print Tables The Print Tables menu is shown in Fig 92 This will print the N N Curves and Flux tables used in calculating the detector efficiency based Nf No Curves on the detector Description entered on the Detector tab ENS Figure 92 Print Soil Files 3 5 3 6 Helpful Hints for Establishing o p Values It is not easy to determine an accurate o p value for the soil activity you are measuring The o p values apply only to radioactive fallout that has penetrated the soil over a number of years Usually the activity will seep into the soil in an exponential manner with the highest concentration of activity located near the top of the s
424. ues oe 20 Move Close Alt F4 v Graph v Table Restore Destroy E dit File Figure 55 Efficiency Calibration Sidebar Control Menu Move Size Close Alt F4 Linear Log Log y Grid Figure 56 Efficiency Graph Control Menu 85 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 3 3 2 7 Saving the Calibration and Finishing the Wizard The calibration is now stored with the MCB or the spectrum in the buffer window but not on disk Click on the Save Calibration button to save the calibration to a CLB file This should always be done to preserve the calibration for later use When finished editing all calibrations complete the Calibration Wizard and close the dialog by clicking on Finish 3 3 3 Energy The first step in the energy calibration is to collect a spectrum of a known source with isolated peaks The spectrum peaks must be well defined with a small statistical uncertainty When the Detector has finished this data acquisition select Calibrate from the menu bar then Energy The Energy Calibration Sidebar Fig 57 will automatically open placed over the Status Sidebar The Calibration Sidebar can be moved by its title bar to another position It is usually helpful to zoom in on the spectrum so the peaks are clearly displayed 3 3 3 1 Auto Calibration The Auto Calibrate button performs a complete energy and FWHM calibration on the displayed spectrum using the working library
425. umber 6 327 549 54 3 MENU COMMANDS ZDT mode has a unique feature in that it can store both the corrected spectrum and the uncorrected spectrum or the corrected spectrum and the uncertainty spectrum Therefore supported MCBs allow you to choose between three ZDT Mode settings on the ADC tab under MCB Properties Off NORM_CORR and CORR_ERR Off Uncorrected Spectrum Only In this mode only the uncorrected spectrum live time and real time with dead time losses also called the live time corrected or LTC spectrum is collected and stored in the SPC file The LTC spectrum can be used to determine exactly how many pulses at any energy were processed by the spectrometer The corrected spectrum gives the best estimate of the total counts that would have been in the peak if the system were free of dead time effects The uncertainty spectrum can be used to calculate the counting uncertainty channel by channel in the corrected spectrum NOTE When the spectrometer is placed in ZDT mode the throughput of the instrument is reduced somewhat as extra processing must be done on the spectrum therefore 1f the gamma ray flux is not changing as a function of time but absolute highest throughput is desirable you might wish to store only the LTC spectrum in the MCB memory NORM CORR ZDT and Uncorrected Spectra Stored When the ZDT mode is set to NORM_CORR the two spectra stored are the LTC spectrum and the ZDT spectrum corrected
426. urce as defined in the analysis library N Total Activity D DC x A x 1 where N the number of nuclides in the analysis library DC the decay correction factor for nuclide x in the analysis library A the calculated activity in becquerels for nuclide x in the analysis library The total activity of a calibration or check source tests the efficiency calibration currently in use and the general operating parameters of the system including source positioning contamination library values and energy calibration This efficiency parameter is the most important of the QA checks It is very important that results not be reported unless you can show that the efficiency has not changed since the detector was last calibrated One or two gamma rays one at high energy and one at low energy are all that are necessary 251 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual e Average FWHM Ratio The sum of the ratio of each peak s measured FWHM vs its calibrated FWHM divided by the total number of peaks for all peaks defined in the analysis library P Y FWHM FWHM Meas Cal Average FWHM Ratio 53 D where P the number of identified peaks in the spectrum FWHM meas the measured FWHM of analysis library peak x in keV FWHM the calibrated FWHM of analysis library peak x in keV Average FWHM gives the general state of health of the detector As a detector ages air eventually enters it and the FWHM eventu
427. uring the analysis of ZDT spectra A CORR ERR spectrum is analyzed as a regular spectrum most of the time with a few exceptions as listed below To calculate the peak area uncertainty the error spectrum is used If the peak limits are from L and H channels then the background variance is calculated as E B n n B n n x H L 1Y var 4 B sum of background counts for the channels adjacent to the peak start low energy channel L B sum of background counts for the channels adjacent to the peak end high energy channel H n the number of low background points n 1 3 or 5 used n the number of high background points n 1 3 or 5 used The peak area uncertainty is calculated from ae V G B where G is the sum of counts from the error spectrum from channels L to H y rror r UU amora v from error spectrum 100 Area from ZDT spectrum e Inthe ISOWAN322 analysis engine the peak fitting routine fits all the library peaks as singlets to calculate the peak centroid peak start and end channels and peak background A linear background under the peak is assumed during the peak fitting process 3 MENU COMMANDS e The error spectrum is always used to calculate the uncertainties of counts whenever needed For example if peak deconvolution is needed the error spectrum is used to find the best fit for the peak background Choosing a ZDT Mode Table 1 shows which spectra are collected i
428. uscule time intervals by adding counts to the ZDT spectrum in proportion to the instantaneous ratio of real time to live time Thus the dead time correction can correctly track rapidly changing counting rates The CORR ERR mode should be used whenever the counting rate might change significantly during the measurement time In addition to the rapidly decaying isotope example above the CORR ERR mode should be used when monitoring cooling water flow from a nuclear reactor The CORR ERR mode accommodates brief bursts of high activity in the water flowing past the gamma ray detector Both the corrected and error spectra are stored in the resulting spectrum file 357 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual Note that the counts in the ZDT spectrum must be divided by the elapsed REAL time to compute the dead time corrected counting rate It is important to note that the standard deviation in the Nzpr counts in a gamma ray peak in the ZDT spectrum is not N Instead the standard ZDT deviation is obtained from the Nzre counts in the same peak ROI in the accompanying error spectrum The standard deviation in this case is N pp And the standard deviation in the computed counting rate N Real Time is Live Time ZDT Nerr The NORM_CORR Diagnostic Mode Why is there a NORM_CORR mode and why should you avoid using it This mode simultaneously collects the ZDT spectrum and the conventional uncorrected spectrum It is u
429. vertical expansion before the Zoom In It is not the same as Zoom Out 3 11 8 Mark ROI This function marks an ROI in the spectrum for the total width of the rubber rectangle AII channels are marked See also Sections 2 3 3 and 3 8 2 3 11 9 Clear ROI This clears the ROI bits of all channels in the rubber rectangle or all ROI channels contiguous to the channel containing the marker See also Section 3 8 3 176 3 MENU COMMANDS 3 11 10 Peak Info This command is discussed in Section 3 4 2 3 11 11 Input Count Rate This command is active only for supported ORTEC MCBs For these units the input count rate can be displayed in the upper left corner of the spectrum window as shown in Fig 164 Note that this is the input count rate and not the number of processed pulses Figure 164 Input Count Rate Window The buffer shows the input count rate when the spectrum from an MCB with ICR support has been either transferred to the buffer from the MCB or saved to disk If the MCB is stopped the value displayed is the current input count rate value and not the value at the time the MCB was stopped 3 11 12 Sum The Sum function is described in detail in Section 3 4 3 3 11 13 MCB Properties This command accesses the MCB setup dialogs discussed in Section 3 2 8 177 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual 178 4 ANALYSIS METHODS This chapter describes the calculation details of the analysis o
430. w a rubber rectangle MCB Properties Figure 7 Right Mouse Button Menu for Spectra 1 Click and hold the left mouse button this anchors the starting corner of the rectangle 2 Drag the mouse diagonally across the area of interest A reverse color rectangle bisected by the marker line is drawn Note that when drawing a rubber rectangle the marker line combines with a horizontal line inside the rectangle to form crosshairs Fig 8 They make it easy to select the center channel in the area of interest this might be the center of an ROI to be marked or unmarked a portion of the spectrum to be summed or a peak for the Peak Info function 1 1 ZS 3 Release the mouse button this anchors the ending corner of the Marker 310 uncal 25863 Cie rectangle Figure 8 The Rubber 4 Right click the mouse to open the context menu and select one of Rectangle s Crosshairs the available commands Once an area is selected the commands can also be issued from the Toolbar Menu Bar Status Sidebar or keyboard As an example Fig 9 illustrates the process of marking a region with a rubber rectangle and zooming in using the right mouse button menu 19 ISOTOPIC v4 1 ISOPLUS B32 Supervisor User s Manual The rectangle can also be moved using the arrow keys The Shift gt and Shift gt gt keys move the box left and right while Shift t gt and Shift 1 move the box up and down This enables the box to be
431. ys for all of the library nuclides can then follow in any order In all cases make certain that the most intense clean no interferences likely gamma ray for a particular nuclide is referenced first in your library The next three most intense gamma rays should be listed next in the library 106 3 MENU COMMANDS e The following parameters can affect the detection of weak peaks Peak search sensitivity Match width set to 0 5 Peak cutoff set to 40 and increase if necessary Background type default set to Auto but adjust to 5 if necessary for very weak peaks Do not clutter your library with too many nuclides and gamma rays The search engines will not be very effective in this situation Use only the nuclides and gamma rays that are likely to be present When creating libraries if you work from the supplied Libo or Lib1 master library it might be helpful to delete all X rays from the list of gamma rays for each nuclide The energy Auto calibrate feature works better 1f the library includes no X rays First enter the Number of Detectors and the Live Time Preset in seconds If the operator will be adjusting detector positions before each measurement mark the Ask for Detector Position Adjustments on Start checkbox For measurements from a single fixed detector position leave this box unmarked Enter the Library file and Match Width to be used for the analysis The Match Width sets the maximum amount by which a

ISOTOPIC v4 Supervisor User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents